JP2016049240A - Game machine - Google Patents

Game machine Download PDF

Info

Publication number
JP2016049240A
JP2016049240A JP2014175848A JP2014175848A JP2016049240A JP 2016049240 A JP2016049240 A JP 2016049240A JP 2014175848 A JP2014175848 A JP 2014175848A JP 2014175848 A JP2014175848 A JP 2014175848A JP 2016049240 A JP2016049240 A JP 2016049240A
Authority
JP
Japan
Prior art keywords
movable
light
light guide
leds
base
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Pending
Application number
JP2014175848A
Other languages
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
泰典 樋口
Taisuke Higuchi
泰典 樋口
祐仁 五十君
Sukehito Isokimi
祐仁 五十君
卓哉 遠藤
Takuya Endo
卓哉 遠藤
悟志 間部
Satoshi Mabe
悟志 間部
智重 川井
Tomoshige Kawai
智重 川井
竜也 中村
Tatsuya Nakamura
竜也 中村
Original Assignee
京楽産業.株式会社
Kyoraku Sangyo Co Ltd
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 京楽産業.株式会社, Kyoraku Sangyo Co Ltd filed Critical 京楽産業.株式会社
Priority to JP2014175848A priority Critical patent/JP2016049240A/en
Publication of JP2016049240A publication Critical patent/JP2016049240A/en
Pending legal-status Critical Current

Links

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of improving viewability of a screen of an image display, disposing a generator in front of the image display and lifting/lowering the image display.SOLUTION: A reel type game machine (1) including a housing (3) and a front door (2) includes: an image display (7) that is disposed on an upper side of the front door (2) for displaying information related to a game, and a screen (7a) of which is inclined with respect to a vertical face so as to be located forward as it heading for the upper side; a first guide mechanism (103) for liftably/lowerably guiding the image display (7) in a prescribed direction parallel to the screen; first lifting/lowering drive means (104) capable of liftingly/loweringly driving the image display (7) in the prescribed direction; a movable generator (8) disposed in front of the screen (7a) of the image display (7); a second guide mechanism (105) for liftably/lowerably guiding the movable generator (8) in a direction parallel to the prescribed direction; and second lifting/lowering drive means (106) capable of liftingly/loweringly driving the movable generator (8) in the direction parallel to the prescribed direction.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 3

Description

本発明は、遊技機(スロットマシン)に関し、特に画像表示器の画面をその一端縁が他端縁よりも前方へ位置するように傾斜させ、画像表示器をその画面と平行な所定方向へ駆動可能にしたものに関する。   The present invention relates to a gaming machine (slot machine), and in particular, the screen of an image display is tilted so that one end edge thereof is positioned forward of the other end, and the image display is driven in a predetermined direction parallel to the screen. It relates to what has been made possible.

スロットマシンは、筐体とその前面を閉じる前面扉とでケーシンクを構成し、筐体の中段部に3つの回転式のリールを含むリール装置が装備され、前面扉の上部に演出情報を表示する為の画像表示器が装備され、この画像表示器の画面を透明パネルを通して遊技者が見ることができる。前面扉の中段部には、3つのリールの前部を視認可能にする表示窓と表示器類が装備され、これら表示窓と表示器類を前面扉の透明パネルを通して遊技者が見ることができる。   The slot machine forms a case sink with a casing and a front door that closes the front surface of the slot machine, and a reel device including three rotary reels is installed in the middle part of the casing, and effects information is displayed on the upper part of the front door. An image display is provided for the player, and the player can view the screen of the image display through a transparent panel. The middle part of the front door is equipped with a display window and indicators that allow the front part of the three reels to be visually recognized. The player can see these display windows and indicators through the transparent panel of the front door. .

前面扉の中段下部には、操作パネル部が設けられ、この操作パネル部には、メダル投入部、種々のスイッチやボタン類が設けられている。前面扉の下部には、登場キャラクタ等を印刷した装飾パネルが設けられ、この装飾パネルの下側にはメダル排出口やメダル受皿を有する受皿ユニットが装備されている。   An operation panel portion is provided at the lower middle part of the front door, and this operation panel portion is provided with a medal insertion portion, various switches and buttons. A decorative panel printed with characters and the like is provided at the lower part of the front door, and a tray unit having a medal outlet and a medal tray is provided below the decorative panel.

前記3つのリールの各々の周面には複数の図柄が表記されており、これら複数の図柄のうちの一部の図柄が前記表示窓から視認可能であり、3つのリールを回転駆動する電動モータ及び制御部が設けられている。   A plurality of symbols are written on the peripheral surface of each of the three reels, and some of the symbols are visible from the display window, and the electric motor that rotationally drives the three reels. And a control unit.

メダルを投入口へ投入する操作やBETスイッチの操作を検出し、この投入操作が検出されたことを条件に、遊技者によるリールの回転を指示するスタートスイッチの操作の検出情報とストップスイッチの操作の検出情報とに基づいて、制御部が各リールを回転駆動するモータの動作を制御し、各リールの回転及び停止制御を行うと共に、複数のリールが停止した結果、表示窓内に表示された図柄の組み合わせから遊技の結果を判定するようになっている。   Detecting the operation of inserting the medal into the insertion slot and the operation of the BET switch, and detecting that the insertion operation has been detected, the detection information of the operation of the start switch instructing the player to rotate the reel and the operation of the stop switch Based on the detected information, the control unit controls the operation of the motor that rotationally drives each reel, and controls the rotation and stop of each reel. As a result, a plurality of reels are stopped and displayed in the display window. The result of the game is determined from the combination of symbols.

スロットマシンにおいて、一般的な画像表示器は、前面扉の上部に画面を鉛直面と平行にして固定的に設けられているが、特許文献1には、前面扉の上部に装備した画像表示器の画面の角度を変更可能な表示部傾斜装置を設けた回胴式遊技機が開示されている。前記の表示部傾斜装置は、画面を鉛直面に対して任意の傾斜角の前傾状態や後傾状態に変更可能である。但し、画像表示器の上下方向の位置を変えることはできない。   In a slot machine, a general image display is fixedly provided on the upper part of the front door with the screen parallel to the vertical plane. However, Patent Document 1 discloses an image display equipped on the upper part of the front door. A swivel type gaming machine provided with a display unit tilting device capable of changing the angle of the screen is disclosed. The display unit tilting device can change the screen to a forward tilt state or a rear tilt state with an arbitrary tilt angle with respect to the vertical plane. However, the vertical position of the image display cannot be changed.

特開2014−8122号公報JP 2014-8122 A

一般的な画像表示器は、前面扉の上部に画面を鉛直面と平行にして固定的に設けられているため、遊技者によってはその画面が見難い場合がある。特許文献1の遊技機においては、画像表示器の画面の鉛直面に対する傾斜方向と傾斜角を任意に変更可能であるが、画像表示器の上下方向位置が一定であるため、画像表示器の上下移動を利用して演出効果を得ることはできない。   Since a general image display is fixedly provided on the upper part of the front door with the screen parallel to the vertical surface, it may be difficult for some players to see the screen. In the gaming machine of Patent Document 1, the tilt direction and tilt angle with respect to the vertical plane of the screen of the image display can be arbitrarily changed. However, since the vertical position of the image display is constant, the top and bottom of the image display It is not possible to obtain a production effect using movement.

本発明の目的は、画像表示器の画面を見易くし、画像表示器を移動可能にした遊技機を提供することである。   An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine in which the screen of an image display is easy to see and the image display can be moved.

第1発明に係る遊技機は、遊技に関する情報を表示する画像表示器(7) であって、その画面(7a)を画面一端縁が画面他端縁よりも前方へ位置するように傾斜させた画像表示器(7) と、前記画像表示器(7) をその画面(7a)と平行な所定方向へ移動可能に案内する第1案内機構(103) と、前記画像表示器(7) を前記所定方向へ駆動可能な第1駆動手段(104) とを備えたことを特徴としている。   The gaming machine according to the first aspect of the present invention is an image display (7) for displaying information relating to a game, wherein the screen (7a) is inclined so that one end edge of the screen is located forward of the other end edge of the screen. An image display (7), a first guide mechanism (103) for guiding the image display (7) to be movable in a predetermined direction parallel to the screen (7a), and the image display (7) And a first driving means (104) capable of driving in a predetermined direction.

第2発明に係る遊技機は、第1発明において、前記画像表示器(7) の画面(7a)の前側に配設された可動役物(8) と、前記可動役物(8) を前記所定方向と平行な方向へ移動可能に案内する第2案内機構(105) と、前記可動役物(8) を前記所定方向と平行な方向へ駆動可能な第2駆動手段(106) とを備えたことを特徴としている。   A gaming machine according to a second aspect of the present invention is the game machine according to the first aspect, wherein the movable accessory (8) disposed on the front side of the screen (7a) of the image display (7) and the movable accessory (8) are A second guide mechanism (105) for movably guiding in a direction parallel to a predetermined direction; and a second driving means (106) capable of driving the movable accessory (8) in a direction parallel to the predetermined direction. It is characterized by that.

本発明によれば、画像表示器の画面をその一端縁が他端縁よりも前方へ位置するように傾斜させたため画面を見易くして、画像表示器の移動を利用して演出効果を得ることができる。 According to the present invention, the screen of the image display device is tilted so that one end edge thereof is positioned forward of the other end edge, so that the screen is easy to see and the effect is obtained using the movement of the image display device. Can do.

本発明の実施例1に係る回胴式遊技機の斜視図である。 BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a rotating game machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention. 遊技機の制御系のブロック図である。 It is a block diagram of the control system of a gaming machine. 画像表示器役物ユニットの斜視図である。 It is a perspective view of an image display instrument accessory unit. 画像表示器役物ユニット(画像表示器と可動役物を取り外した状態)の斜視図である。 It is a perspective view of an image display accessory unit (a state where an image display and a movable accessory are removed). 画像表示器役物ユニットの要部の前側から視た斜視図である。 It is the perspective view seen from the front side of the principal part of an image display accessory unit. 画像表示器役物ユニットの後側から視た斜視図である。 It is the perspective view seen from the rear side of the image display instrument unit. 画像表示器役物ユニットの平面図である。 It is a top view of an image display instrument accessory unit. 画像表示器役物ユニットの正面図である。 It is a front view of an image display instrument accessory unit. 画像表示器と第1案内機構と第1昇降駆動手段の揺動アーム部材等の後側から視た斜視図である。 It is the perspective view seen from the back side of an image display, the 1st guide mechanism, the swing arm member of the 1st raising-lowering drive means, etc. 画像表示器と第1案内機構と第1昇降駆動手段の揺動アーム部材等の平面図である。 FIG. 5 is a plan view of an image display, a first guide mechanism, a swing arm member of a first elevating drive unit, and the like. 画像表示器役物ユニットの左側面図である。 It is a left view of an image display accessory unit. 図7のXII −XII 線断面図である。 It is the XII-XII sectional view taken on the line of FIG. 図7のXIII−XIII線断面図である。 It is the XIII-XIII sectional view taken on the line of FIG. 画像表示器役物ユニットの1対の第1昇降駆動ユニットと1対の第2案内駆動ユニットの平面図である。 It is a top view of a pair of 1st raising / lowering drive unit and a pair of 2nd guide drive unit of an image display instrument unit. 第1昇降駆動ユニットの後側からの斜視図である。 It is a perspective view from the back side of the 1st raising / lowering drive unit. 第1昇降駆動ユニットの分解斜視図である。 It is a disassembled perspective view of a 1st raising / lowering drive unit. 第1昇降駆動ユニットの一部切欠き縦断右側面図である。 It is a partially notched longitudinal right side view of the first lifting drive unit. 第2案内駆動ユニット(側面ベース部材取り外し状態)の左側面図である。 It is a left view of a 2nd guide drive unit (side surface base member removal state). 第2案内駆動ユニットの分解斜視図である。 It is a disassembled perspective view of a 2nd guide drive unit. 第2案内駆動ユニット(側面ベース部材取り外し状態)の斜視図である。 It is a perspective view of the 2nd guidance drive unit (side surface base member removal state). 第2案内駆動ユニットを左側から視た斜視図である。 It is the perspective view which looked at the 2nd guidance drive unit from the left side. 第2案内駆動ユニットの要部の斜視図である。 It is a perspective view of the principal part of the 2nd guidance drive unit. 第2案内駆動ユニットを右側から視た斜視図である。 It is the perspective view which looked at the 2nd guidance drive unit from the right side. 実施例1に係る可動バー役物の正面図である。 It is a front view of the movable bar accessory which concerns on Example 1. FIG. 可動バー役物の上面図である。 It is a top view of a movable bar accessory. 可動バー役物の下面図である。 It is a bottom view of a movable bar accessory. 可動バー役物の背面図である。 It is a rear view of a movable bar accessory. 可動バー役物の前側からの斜視図である。 It is a perspective view from the front side of a movable bar accessory. 可動バー役物の後側からの斜視図である。 It is a perspective view from the rear side of a movable bar accessory. 図28の可動バー役物の固定導光板を省略した図である。 It is the figure which abbreviate | omitted the fixed light-guide plate of the movable bar combination of FIG. 図30の可動バー役物の電飾器を省略した図である。 It is the figure which abbreviate | omitted the electrical ornament of the movable bar accessory of FIG. 図31の可動バー役物のLED基板を省略した図である。 It is the figure which abbreviate | omitted the LED board of the movable bar combination of FIG. 固定導光板、電飾器、及びLED基板の前側からの分解斜視図である。 It is a disassembled perspective view from the front side of a fixed light-guide plate, an electrical decorator, and an LED board. 固定導光板、電飾器、及びLED基板の後側からの分解斜視図である。 It is a disassembled perspective view from the back side of a fixed light-guide plate, an electrical decorator, and an LED board. 中央電飾器の前側からの分解斜視図である。 It is a disassembled perspective view from the front side of a center electrical decoration. 左電飾器の前側からの分解斜視図である。 It is a disassembled perspective view from the front side of a left electrical ornament. 右電飾器の前側からの分解斜視図である。 It is a disassembled perspective view from the front side of a right electrical ornament. 第1左固定導光板、及び第2LED基板の正面図である。 It is a front view of a 1st left fixed light-guide plate and a 2nd LED board. 第2左固定導光板、及び第2LED基板の正面図である。 It is a front view of a 2nd left fixed light-guide plate and a 2nd LED board. 右固定導光板、及び第3LED基板の正面図である。 It is a front view of a right fixed light-guide plate and a 3rd LED board. 第2可動ベース、及び可動導光板の前側からの斜視図である。 It is a perspective view from the front side of a 2nd movable base and a movable light-guide plate. 第2可動ベース、可動導光板、及び第2駆動手段の後側からの斜視図である。 It is a perspective view from the rear side of a 2nd movable base, a movable light-guide plate, and a 2nd drive means. 図42から第2駆動手段のスライド板を省略した図である。 It is the figure which abbreviate | omitted the slide plate of the 2nd drive means from FIG. 第2可動ベース、可動導光板、及び第2駆動手段の分解斜視図である。 It is a disassembled perspective view of a 2nd movable base, a movable light-guide plate, and a 2nd drive means. 第2可動ベース、可動導光板、及び第2駆動手段の分解斜視図である。 It is a disassembled perspective view of a 2nd movable base, a movable light-guide plate, and a 2nd drive means. 第1退避位置の第1可動導光板、第2退避位置の第2可動導光板、及び第2駆動手段の背面図である。 It is a rear view of the 1st movable light guide plate of the 1st evacuation position, the 2nd movable light guide plate of the 2nd evacuation position, and the 2nd drive means. 第1進出位置の第1可動導光板、第2退避位置の第2可動導光板、及び第2駆動手段の背面図である。 It is a rear view of the 1st movable light guide plate of the 1st advance position, the 2nd movable light guide plate of the 2nd retreat position, and the 2nd drive means. 第1進出位置の第1可動導光板、第2進出位置の第2可動導光板、及び第2駆動手段の背面図である。 It is a rear view of the 1st movable light guide plate of the 1st advance position, the 2nd movable light guide plate of the 2nd advance position, and the 2nd drive means. 第1可動導光板、及び第1連結バーの前側からの分解斜視図である。 It is a disassembled perspective view from the front side of a 1st movable light-guide plate and a 1st connection bar. 第1可動導光板、及び第1連結バーの後側からの分解斜視図である。 It is a disassembled perspective view from the rear side of a 1st movable light-guide plate and a 1st connection bar. 第1可動導光板、第1LED基板、及び第1光導入構造の断面図である。 It is sectional drawing of a 1st movable light-guide plate, a 1st LED board, and a 1st light introduction structure. 第2可動導光板、及び第2連結バーの前側からの分解斜視図である。 It is a disassembled perspective view from the front side of a 2nd movable light-guide plate and a 2nd connection bar. 第2可動導光板、及び第2連結バーの後側からの分解斜視図である。 It is a disassembled perspective view from the back side of a 2nd movable light-guide plate and a 2nd connection bar. 第2可動導光板、第1LED基板、及び第2光導入構造の断面図である。 It is sectional drawing of a 2nd movable light-guide plate, a 1st LED board, and a 2nd light introduction structure. 変更形態に係る第1可動導光板、第1LED基板、及び第1光導入構造の断面図である。 It is sectional drawing of the 1st movable light-guide plate, 1st LED board, and 1st light introduction structure which concern on a change form. 変更形態に係る第2可動導光板、第1LED基板、及び第2光導入構造の断面図である。 It is sectional drawing of the 2nd movable light-guide plate which concerns on a change form, a 1st LED board, and a 2nd light introduction structure. 実施例1に係る電飾パネルの前側からの分解斜視図である。 It is a disassembled perspective view from the front side of the electrical decoration panel which concerns on Example 1. FIG. 電飾パネルの後側からの分解斜視図である。 It is a disassembled perspective view from the rear side of an electrical decoration panel. 電飾装置の前側からの分解斜視図である。 It is a disassembled perspective view from the front side of an electrical decoration apparatus. 電飾装置の後側からの分解斜視図である。 It is a disassembled perspective view from the rear side of an electrical decoration apparatus. 主発光部材及び発光パネルの前側からの斜視図である。 It is a perspective view from the front side of a main light emitting member and a light emission panel. 主発光部材及び発光パネルの正面図である。 It is a front view of a main light emitting member and a light emitting panel. 主発光部材の正面図である。 It is a front view of a main light emitting member. 主発光部材の背面図である。 It is a rear view of a main light emitting member. 発光パネルの正面図である。 It is a front view of a light emission panel. 発光パネルの背面図である。 It is a rear view of a light emission panel. 発光パネルと複数のLEDとの位置関係を示す正面図である。 It is a front view which shows the positional relationship of a light emission panel and several LED. 発光パネルと複数のLEDとの位置関係を示す背面図である。 It is a rear view which shows the positional relationship of a light emission panel and several LED. 実施例2に係る可動バー役物の初期状態の正面図である。 It is a front view of the initial state of the movable bar accessory which concerns on Example 2. FIG. 可動バー役物の初期状態の前側からの斜視図である。 It is a perspective view from the front side of the initial state of a movable bar accessory. 可動バー役物の展開状態の正面図である。 It is a front view of the expansion | deployment state of a movable bar accessory. 可動バー役物の展開状態の前側からの斜視図である。 It is a perspective view from the front side of the unfolded state of a movable bar accessory. 可動バー役物の展開途中状態の正面図である。 It is a front view in the middle of expansion of a movable bar accessory. 可動バー役物の展開途中状態の前側からの斜視図である。 It is a perspective view from the front side of the expansion middle state of a movable bar accessory. 可動バー役物の展開途中状態の背面図である。 It is a rear view in the middle of expansion of a movable bar accessory. 可動バー役物の展開途中状態の後側からの斜視図である。 It is a perspective view from the rear side of the state in the middle of expansion | deployment of a movable bar accessory. 可動バー役物の上面図である。 It is a top view of a movable bar accessory. 可動バー役物の下面図である。 It is a bottom view of a movable bar accessory. 可動バー役物の複数の可動部材を分解した状態の前側からの斜視図である。 It is a perspective view from the front side of the state which decomposed | disassembled the several movable member of a movable bar accessory. 複数の可動部材の後側からの分解斜視図である。 It is a disassembled perspective view from the rear side of a some movable member. 可動バー役物のスライドベースを分解した状態の前側からの斜視図である。 It is a perspective view from the front side of the state which decomposed | disassembled the slide base of a movable bar accessory. スライドベースの後側からの分解斜視図である。 It is a disassembled perspective view from the rear side of a slide base. 可動バー役物の複数の揺動アームと第1ベースを分解した状態の前側からの斜視図である。 It is the perspective view from the front side of the state which decomposed | disassembled the several rocking arm and 1st base of a movable bar accessory. 複数の揺動アームの後側からの分解斜視図である。 It is a disassembled perspective view from the rear side of a plurality of swing arms. 可動バー役物の第1,第2,第3ベースを分解した状態の前側からの斜視図である。 It is a perspective view from the front side of the state which decomposed | disassembled the 1st, 2nd, 3rd base of a movable bar accessory. 可動バー役物の第1,第2,第3ベースを分解した状態の後側からの斜視図である。 It is a perspective view from the rear side of the state which decomposed | disassembled the 1st, 2nd, 3rd base of the movable bar accessory. 可動バー役物のスライド板等を分解した状態の前側からの斜視図である。 It is a perspective view from the front side of the state which decomposed | disassembled the slide plate etc. of a movable bar accessory. 第2駆動手段の一部を示す正面図である。 It is a front view which shows a part of 2nd drive means. 実施例3に係る電飾パネルの前側からの分解斜視図である。 It is a disassembled perspective view from the front side of the electrical decoration panel which concerns on Example 3. FIG. 電飾パネルの後側からの分解斜視図である。 It is a disassembled perspective view from the rear side of an electrical decoration panel. 電飾装置の前側からの分解斜視図である。 It is a disassembled perspective view from the front side of an electrical decoration apparatus. 電飾装置の後側からの分解斜視図である。 It is a disassembled perspective view from the rear side of an electrical decoration apparatus. 電飾装置の左右の装飾板を省略した前側からの斜視図である。 It is the perspective view from the front side which abbreviate | omitted the decorative board on either side of an electrical decoration apparatus. 電飾装置のLED基板を省略した後側からの斜視図である。 It is a perspective view from the back side which abbreviate | omitted the LED board of the electrical decoration apparatus. 発光パネルと複数の導光バーの後側からの分解斜視図である。 It is a disassembled perspective view from the rear side of a light emission panel and a some light guide bar. 中央電飾ユニットの前側からの分解斜視図である。 It is a disassembled perspective view from the front side of a center electrical decoration unit. 中央電飾ユニットの後側からの分解斜視図である。 It is a disassembled perspective view from the rear side of a center electrical decoration unit. 発光パネル、左右の装飾板、及び中央電飾ユニットと複数のLEDとの位置関係を示す正面図である。 It is a front view which shows the positional relationship of a light emission panel, a left-right decorative board, and a center electrical decoration unit, and several LED. 発光パネル及び中央電飾ユニットと複数のLEDとの位置関係を示す背面図である。 It is a rear view which shows the positional relationship of a light emission panel and a center electrical decoration unit, and several LED. 実施例4に係る画像表示器の動作による遊技演出を示す図表である。 It is a graph which shows the game effect by operation | movement of the image display which concerns on Example 4. FIG. 画像表示器の動作説明図である。 It is operation | movement explanatory drawing of an image display. 可動バー役物の動作による遊技演出を示す図表である。 It is a graph which shows the game production | presentation by operation | movement of a movable bar accessory. 可動バー役物の動作説明図である。 It is operation | movement explanatory drawing of a movable bar accessory. 可動バー役物の他の動作説明図である。 It is other operation | movement explanatory drawing of a movable bar accessory. 図104相当図である。 It is a figure equivalent to FIG. 図104相当図である。 It is a figure equivalent to FIG. 可動バー役物の電飾による遊技演出を示す図表である。 It is a graph which shows the game production by the electrical decoration of a movable bar accessory. 変更形態に係る画像表示器の動作説明図である。 It is operation | movement explanatory drawing of the image display which concerns on a change form. 変更形態に係る可動バー役物の動作説明図である。 It is operation | movement explanatory drawing of the movable bar accessory which concerns on a change form. 実施例5に係る画像表示器の配置、動作を示す図である。 FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating the arrangement and operation of an image display according to a fifth embodiment.

次に、本発明を実施するための形態について、実施例に基づいて説明する。 Next, the form for implementing this invention is demonstrated based on an Example.

本発明に係る回胴式遊技機であるスロットマシンの実施例について、図面に基づいて説明する。図1、図2に示すように、このスロットマシン1は、遊技者側に面する前面扉2が箱状の筐体3の前面の開口を開閉可能にするためヒンジ機構により左端を回動支点として回動可能に取り付けられている。尚、以下の説明において、遊技者から視て手前側を前方、左右方向を左右方向として説明する。   An embodiment of a slot machine, which is a rotating game machine according to the present invention, will be described with reference to the drawings. As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the slot machine 1 has a front door 2 facing the player that can open and close the opening of the front of the box-shaped housing 3. It is attached so that rotation is possible. In the following description, it is assumed that the front side is the front and the left / right direction is the left / right direction as viewed from the player.

前記筐体3は、上面板3aと、左右の側面板3b,3cと、底面板3dと、背面板3eとを有し、筐体3の前後幅は上方ほど小さく形成され、筐体3の前面の開口は鉛直面に対して後傾側(上方ほど後方へ移行)へ緩傾斜している。   The housing 3 includes a top plate 3a, left and right side plates 3b and 3c, a bottom plate 3d, and a back plate 3e. The opening on the front surface is gently inclined toward the rearwardly inclined side (moving backward toward the upper side) with respect to the vertical surface.

前面扉2は、上部透明パネル(図示略)と、中段パネル部4と、操作パネル部5と、下部パネル部6を有し、これらは化粧板としての視覚効果を高めるようにデザインされた硬質合成樹脂により形成されている。前面扉2の上部には、画像表示器7(液晶表示器)と可動役物8と案内駆動機構部100Aをユニット化した画像表示器役物ユニット100が装備され、これらの前面側が箱状の上部透明パネルで覆われている。筐体3は、前面扉2を閉じた状態では、画像表示器役物ユニット100の案内駆動機構部100Aを収納するようになっている。   The front door 2 has an upper transparent panel (not shown), a middle panel portion 4, an operation panel portion 5, and a lower panel portion 6, which are designed to enhance the visual effect as a decorative board. It is formed of a synthetic resin. At the upper part of the front door 2 is mounted an image display accessory unit 100 in which an image display 7 (liquid crystal display), a movable accessory 8 and a guide drive mechanism 100A are unitized, and these front sides are box-like. It is covered with an upper transparent panel. When the front door 2 is closed, the housing 3 accommodates the guide drive mechanism 100A of the image display accessory unit 100.

筐体3の内部には、スロットマシン1の全体の動作を統括制御するメイン制御基板70と、3つの円筒状の回転リールである左リール11、中リール12、右リール13を有する回胴装置10(リールユニット)と、電源装置、メダルの払い出し用のメダル排出スリットを有するホッパ装置51と、ホッパ装置51から溢れたメダルを収納する補助貯留部等を備えている。   Inside the housing 3 is a spinning device having a main control board 70 for overall control of the overall operation of the slot machine 1, and a left reel 11, a middle reel 12, and a right reel 13, which are three cylindrical rotating reels. 10 (reel unit), a power supply device, a hopper device 51 having a medal discharge slit for paying out medals, an auxiliary storage unit for storing medals overflowing from the hopper device 51, and the like.

回胴装置10は、メイン制御基板70からリール11,12,13の回転や停止に関する制御信号を受けるリール基板40によって3つのリール11,12,13の回転や回転停止が制御される。回胴装置10は、筐体3の内部に付設された台座に対して引き出し及び押し戻し自在に載置されている。3つのリール11,12,13は軸心を左右方向に水平に向けて並設され、それらリール11,12,13の周面の前部を遊技者から視認可能になっている。   In the spinning device 10, the rotation and rotation stop of the three reels 11, 12, and 13 are controlled by the reel substrate 40 that receives a control signal related to the rotation and stop of the reels 11, 12, and 13 from the main control substrate 70. The rotating device 10 is placed so that it can be pulled out and pushed back with respect to a pedestal provided inside the housing 3. The three reels 11, 12, and 13 are arranged side by side with their axes centered horizontally in the left-right direction, and the front portions of the peripheral surfaces of the reels 11, 12, and 13 can be viewed from the player.

筐体3の内部には、電源装置、 配電盤に相当する電源装置基板50が装備されており、電源装置基板50には電源装置で発生する各種電源電圧を回胴装置10やホッパ装置51等の各所に配電する配電回路が設けられている。   A power supply device board 50 corresponding to a power supply device and a distribution board is installed inside the housing 3, and various power supply voltages generated by the power supply device are supplied to the power supply device substrate 50, such as the rotating device 10 and the hopper device 51. A power distribution circuit for power distribution is provided at various locations.

前面扉2は、筐体3の開口を閉塞する位置で、操作パネル部5に形成された鍵穴9を有する施錠装置によりロックされ、ホールスタッフ等がメダル補給作業やメンテナンス作業や設定値変更等に等に伴う出玉管理作業等を行う場合に専用鍵で施錠を解除してロック状態を解除し、前面扉2を開放可能になっている。   The front door 2 is locked by a locking device having a key hole 9 formed in the operation panel unit 5 at a position where the opening of the housing 3 is closed, so that hall staff or the like can perform medal replenishment work, maintenance work, setting value change, etc. For example, when performing a ball management operation associated with the above, the front door 2 can be opened by releasing the lock with a dedicated key to release the locked state.

前面扉2には、遊技に付随する演出を行う演出表示部が設けられ、この演出表示部は、動画等を表示する画像表示器7と、複数の演出用ランプ92a〜92dやサイドランプ93a,93bの発光により複数色に変化可能な複数の演出用発光部14a,14b,15a,15bやサイド発光部16a,16bと、複数のスピーカ94a〜94dからの音響を放音可能な複数の放音部31a,31b,32a,32bとを備えている。   The front door 2 is provided with an effect display unit for performing an effect associated with the game. The effect display unit includes an image display 7 for displaying moving images and the like, a plurality of effect lamps 92a to 92d, side lamps 93a, A plurality of sound emitting units 14a, 14b, 15a, 15b and side light emitting units 16a, 16b that can be changed into a plurality of colors by the light emission of 93b and a plurality of speakers 94a to 94d that can emit sound. Part 31a, 31b, 32a, 32b.

画像表示器7の画面7aと可動役物8は上部透明パネル(図示略)を通して視認可能であり、画像表示器7の画面7aには遊技に関する情報を表示可能になっている。画像表示器7は、3つのリール11,12,13の図柄を表示する表示窓4aの上方に離隔した位置に配設されている。   The screen 7a of the image display 7 and the movable accessory 8 are visible through an upper transparent panel (not shown), and information relating to the game can be displayed on the screen 7a of the image display 7. The image display 7 is disposed at a position spaced above the display window 4a for displaying the symbols of the three reels 11, 12, and 13.

前面扉2の上部の表示器役物ユニット100の背面側には、演出制御基板81と画像音響生成基板87とを有するサブ制御基板80が設けられ、メイン制御基板70からサブ制御基板80に演出開始を示唆する制御信号が供給されると、そのサブ制御基板80により画像表示器7による動画像等の表示と、複数の演出用発光部14a,14b,15 a,15bの点滅や点灯による演出と、複数の放音部16a,16b,17a,17bからの効果音による演出等が行われるようになっている。   A sub control board 80 having an effect control board 81 and an image sound generation board 87 is provided on the back side of the display instrument unit 100 above the front door 2. When a control signal indicating the start is supplied, the sub-control board 80 displays a moving image or the like on the image display 7 and effects by blinking or lighting of the plurality of effect light emitting units 14a, 14b, 15a, and 15b. And the production | presentation by the sound effect from the some sound emission part 16a, 16b, 17a, 17b is performed.

前面扉2の中段パネル部4には、回胴装置10の3つのリール11,12,13の図柄の確認を行える表示窓4aが設けられている。この表示窓4aには3つのリール11,12,13に表記された複数の図柄のかちの一部の図柄を表示するようになっている。前記表示窓4aの下方には、貯留枚数表示器18、遊技進行表示器19、払出枚数表示器20等が設けられている。これらの表示器18〜20は、7セグメントLEDで構成され、0〜9までの10通りの数字で複数桁の数字を表示可能になっている。前記中段パネル部4と、貯留枚数表示器18、遊技進行表示器19、払出枚数表示器20等の前面は透明パネル(図示略)で覆われている。   The middle panel 4 of the front door 2 is provided with a display window 4a for confirming the symbols of the three reels 11, 12, and 13 of the rotating device 10. In this display window 4a, a part of the symbols of the plurality of symbols written on the three reels 11, 12, 13 is displayed. Below the display window 4a, a stored number display 18, a game progress display 19, a payout number display 20, and the like are provided. These indicators 18-20 are comprised by 7 segment LED, and can display a several-digit number with ten numbers from 0-9. Front surfaces of the middle panel 4, the stored number indicator 18, the game progress indicator 19, the payout number indicator 20 and the like are covered with a transparent panel (not shown).

貯留枚数表示器18には、クレジットされているメダルの枚数(最大50枚)が表示され、その貯留枚数は、遊技停止中にメダル投入部21から最大ベット数を超えて投入されたメダルの枚数や遊技で獲得したメダルの枚数を加算して表示される。遊技進行表示器19には、遊技者に有利な特別遊技状態(ビッグボーナス、レギュラーボーナス等)が発生した際、その特別遊技状態の残りゲーム数等が数字で表示される。   The stored number display 18 displays the number of credited medals (up to 50), and the stored number is the number of medals inserted exceeding the maximum bet number from the medal insertion unit 21 during the game stop. And the number of medals won in the game are added and displayed. When a special game state (big bonus, regular bonus, etc.) advantageous to the player occurs, the game progress indicator 19 displays the number of remaining games in the special game state in numbers.

払出枚数表示器20には、3つのリール11,12,13の停止に伴い、その有効ライン上に揃った図柄に応じたメダル払い出し枚数が数字で表示される。尚、払出枚数表示器20は、スロットマシン1における出球率(メダルの払出率)を決定する際の設定値を表示可能である。   As the three reels 11, 12, and 13 are stopped, the number-of-payout display 20 displays the number of medals to be paid out according to the symbols arranged on the effective line. The payout number display unit 20 can display a set value for determining a ball payout rate (medal payout rate) in the slot machine 1.

中段パネル部4の両側には高輝度発光ダイオードを内蔵したサイド発光部16a,16bが装備され、これらサイド発光部16a,16bは、リーチや大当たり等の際に点灯又は点滅して遊技者の視覚に訴える演出を行う。   Side light emitting portions 16a and 16b incorporating high-intensity light emitting diodes are provided on both sides of the middle panel portion 4, and these side light emitting portions 16a and 16b are lit or blinked in the event of a reach or a big hit, and are visually recognized by the player. Directing to appeal to.

前面扉2の操作パネル部5には、メダル投入部21と、清算スイッチ22(貯留払戻しスイッチ)と、ベットスイッチ23と、MAXベットスイッチ24と、スタートスイッチ27と、3つのリール11,12,13を夫々停止させる為の3つのストップスイッチ28,29,30等が設けられている。メダルがクレジットされているとき、ベットスイッチ23又はMAXベットスイッチ24を操作すると、クレジットされているメダルから1枚,2枚,3枚の何れかの枚数がベットされ、貯留枚数表示器18の表示枚数が減算されて表示される。   The operation panel 5 of the front door 2 includes a medal insertion part 21, a clearing switch 22 (storage / return switch), a bet switch 23, a MAX bet switch 24, a start switch 27, and three reels 11, 12, Three stop switches 28, 29, 30 and the like for stopping 13 are provided. When the bet switch 23 or the MAX bet switch 24 is operated when a medal is credited, one of the credited medals is one, two, or three, and the stored number display 18 displays The number of sheets is subtracted and displayed.

前面扉2の操作パネル部5の背面には、操作パネル部5のベットスイッチ23、MAXベットスイッチ24、清算スイッチ22、スタートスイッチ27、3つのストップスイッチ28〜30等の各種操作スイッチが電気的に接続された中央表示基板60が設けられており、これらのスイッチの出力信号が中央表示基板60からメイン制御基板70に転送されるようになっている。また、操作パネル部5には、遊技者が操作可能な演出ボタン25が設けられ、演出ボタン25にはその操作を検出する演出ボタン検出スイッチ96が設けられている。   Various operation switches such as a bet switch 23, a MAX bet switch 24, a settlement switch 22, a start switch 27, and three stop switches 28 to 30 are electrically connected to the rear surface of the operation panel unit 5 of the front door 2. A central display board 60 connected to the central display board 60 is provided, and output signals of these switches are transferred from the central display board 60 to the main control board 70. The operation panel 5 is provided with an effect button 25 that can be operated by the player, and the effect button 25 is provided with an effect button detection switch 96 that detects the operation.

操作パネル部5には、遊技者による選択操作を受け付ける十字キー26が設けられ、この十字キー26は上下左右の4つの操作キーを有し、画像表示器7に表示された表示画像の選択操作等が可能である。上記の4つの操作キーの操作を検出する4つの操作キー検出スイッチ97が設けられ、これら操作キー検出スイッチ97が遊技者の操作を検出するとその選択に応じた選択が実行される。   The operation panel unit 5 is provided with a cross key 26 for accepting a selection operation by a player. The cross key 26 has four operation keys, upper, lower, left, and right, and a selection operation of a display image displayed on the image display 7. Etc. are possible. Four operation key detection switches 97 for detecting the operation of the above four operation keys are provided. When these operation key detection switches 97 detect the player's operation, selection corresponding to the selection is executed.

中央表示基板60には、スロットマシン1の出球率を設定する設定値(1〜6の6段階)を変更する場合に操作される設定スイッチ61が設けられ、この設定スイッチ61の操作に応じて払出枚数表示器20に設定値が表示される。   The central display board 60 is provided with a setting switch 61 that is operated when changing setting values (six levels of 1 to 6) for setting the pitching rate of the slot machine 1, and according to the operation of the setting switch 61. The set value is displayed on the payout number display 20.

前面扉2の下部パネル部6には、スロットマシン1のモデルタイプ等を遊技者へ認識させる為、登場キャラクタの絵柄を印刷したパネルも設けられている。
下部パネル部6の下方には、入賞時にメダルを排出するメダル排出口34を有する受皿ユニット35と、下部スピーカを内蔵しゲームの進行に応じた演出効果音を発生させる下部放音部17a,17bとが設けられている。
The lower panel portion 6 of the front door 2 is also provided with a panel on which a picture of an appearance character is printed so that the player can recognize the model type of the slot machine 1 and the like.
Below the lower panel portion 6, a tray unit 35 having a medal discharge port 34 for discharging medals at the time of winning a prize, and lower sound emitting portions 17 a and 17 b that incorporate a lower speaker and generate stage effect sounds according to the progress of the game. And are provided. Below the lower panel portion 6, a tray unit 35 having a medal discharge port 34 for similarly medals at the time of winning a prize, and lower sound emitting portions 17 a and 17 b that incorporate a lower speaker and generate stage effect sounds according to the progress of the game. And are provided.

前面扉2の下部パネル部6の背面側には、メダル投入部21から投入された物がメダルか異物かを判別して振り分けるセレクタ62と、このセレクタ62で振り分けられたメダルを筐体3内のホッパ装置51へ案内するホッパガイド部材と、セレクタ62で振り分けられた異物をメダル排出口34へ案内するガイド部材と、ホッパ装置51から排出されたメダルを受皿ユニット35のメダル排出口34側にガイドする払出ガイド部材とが設けられている。   On the back side of the lower panel portion 6 of the front door 2, a selector 62 for determining whether or not a thing inserted from the medal insertion portion 21 is a medal or a foreign object, and a medal distributed by the selector 62 in the housing 3. A hopper guide member for guiding the hopper device 51, a guide member for guiding the foreign matter distributed by the selector 62 to the medal discharge port 34, and a medal discharged from the hopper device 51 to the medal discharge port 34 side of the tray unit 35. A payout guide member for guiding is provided.

次に、図2に基づいて、スロットマシンの制御システムについて説明する。
制御システムは、主としてメイン制御基板70、サブ制御基板80、中央表示基板60、リール基板40、電源装置基板50を備え、それぞれが配線ケーブルによって接続されている。
Next, a slot machine control system will be described with reference to FIG.
The control system mainly includes a main control board 70, a sub control board 80, a central display board 60, a reel board 40, and a power supply board 50, which are connected by a wiring cable.

メイン制御基板70には、I/F回路71(インタフェース回路)、メインCPU72、乱数発生器73、メインROM74、メインRAM75等が設けられている。
メインCPU72は、メインROM74に予め記憶されているシステムプログラムやスロットマシンゲーム用のプログラム等を読み込み、ゲームの進行に応じた所定の演算処理を実行して、サブ制御基板80、リール基板40、中央表示基板60、電源装置基板50等に対する分散制御を行う為の所定のコマンドを出力する。
The main control board 70 is provided with an I / F circuit 71 (interface circuit), a main CPU 72, a random number generator 73, a main ROM 74, a main RAM 75, and the like.
The main CPU 72 reads a system program, a slot machine game program, and the like stored in advance in the main ROM 74, executes predetermined arithmetic processing according to the progress of the game, and executes the sub-control board 80, the reel board 40, the center board A predetermined command for performing distributed control on the display substrate 60, the power supply device substrate 50, and the like is output. The main CPU 72 reads a system program, a slot machine game program, and the like stored in advance in the main ROM 74, executes predetermined arithmetic processing according to the progress of the game, and executes the sub-control board 80, the reel board 40, the center board A predetermined command for performing distributed control on the display substrate 60, the power supply device substrate 50, and the like is output.

メインCPU72は、スタートスイッチ27の検出(始動条件の成立)により表示窓4aに表示される図柄を変動させ、その後、スタートスイッチ27の検出に基づいて決定した所定の条件およびリールストップスイッチ28〜30の検出に従って図柄の変動を停止させる。乱数発生器73は、役抽選の為の乱数を発生させる為のカウンタを有し、電源が投入されている間、常時0〜65535の数値を発生させ、所定の契機(遊技者の操作)に基づいて1つの数値が乱数値として出力される。   The main CPU 72 varies the symbol displayed on the display window 4a by the detection of the start switch 27 (establishment of the start condition), and then the predetermined condition determined based on the detection of the start switch 27 and the reel stop switches 28-30. The fluctuation of the symbol is stopped according to the detection of. The random number generator 73 has a counter for generating random numbers for the lottery drawing, and always generates a numerical value of 0 to 65535 while the power is turned on, at a predetermined trigger (player operation). Based on this, one numerical value is output as a random value.

メインROM74は、システムプログラムやスロットマシンゲーム用のプログラム等を記憶しているものであり、役の抽選処理に用いる役抽選テーブルや、回転リール11,12,13の停止制御に用いる停止位置決定テーブル等を記憶している。メインRAM75は、メインCPU72によって実行されるシステムプログラム、スロットマシンゲーム用のプログラムや、メインCPU72による演算結果等を一時的に記憶する。I/F回路71は、サブ制御基板80、中央表示基板60、リール基板40、電源装置基板50、中央表示基板60間でのコマンドの送受信を行う。   The main ROM 74 stores a system program, a slot machine game program, and the like, and a combination lottery table used for a combination lottery process and a stop position determination table used for stop control of the rotary reels 11, 12, and 13. Etc. are remembered. The main RAM 75 temporarily stores a system program executed by the main CPU 72, a program for a slot machine game, a calculation result by the main CPU 72, and the like. The I / F circuit 71 transmits and receives commands among the sub control board 80, the central display board 60, the reel board 40, the power supply board 50, and the central display board 60.

サブ制御基板80は、主として演出を制御するものであり、演出制御基板81と画像音響生成基板87とを備えている。サブ制御基板80には、演出ボタン検出スイッチ96、選択ボタン検出スイッチ97、演出用発光部14a,14b,15a,15bの演出用ランプ94a〜94d、サイド発光部16a,16bのサイドランプ93a,93b、案内駆動機構部100A、可動役物8が接続されている。
サブ制御基板80は、演出ボタン検出スイッチ96、選択ボタン検出スイッチ97から検出信号を入力すると共に演出用ランプ94a,94b、サイドランプ95a,95bへ操作信号(制御コマンド、データ等)を出力するものである。 The sub-control board 80 inputs detection signals from the effect button detection switch 96 and the selection button detection switch 97, and outputs operation signals (control commands, data, etc.) to the effect lamps 94a, 94b and side lamps 95a, 95b. Is. The sub control board 80 mainly controls the effect, and includes an effect control board 81 and an image sound generation board 87. On the sub control board 80, an effect button detection switch 96, a selection button detection switch 97, effect light emitting units 14a, 14b, 15a and 15b, effect lamps 94a to 94d, and side light emitting units 16a and 16b side lamps 93a and 93b. The guide drive mechanism 100A and the movable accessory 8 are connected. The sub control board 80 mainly controls the effect, and includes an effect control board 81 and an image sound generation board 87. On the sub control board 80, an effect button detection switch 96, a selection button detection switch 97, effect light emitting units 14a, 14b, 15a and 15b, effect lamps 94a to 94d, and side light emitting units 16a and 16b side lamps 93a and 93b. The guide drive mechanism 100A and the movable accessory 8 are connected.
The sub-control board 80 inputs detection signals from the effect button detection switch 96 and the selection button detection switch 97 and outputs operation signals (control commands, data, etc.) to the effect lamps 94a and 94b and the side lamps 95a and 95b. It is. The sub-control board 80 inputs detection signals from the effect button detection switch 96 and the selection button detection switch 97 and outputs operation signals (control commands, data, etc.) to the effect lamps 94a and 94b and the side lamps 95a and 95b . It is.

演出制御基板81は、主として演出時にサイドランプ93a,93b、演出用ランプ94a〜94dを点灯させる制御を行うものであり、I/F回路82、サブCPU83、乱数発生器84、サブROM85、サブRAM86を備えている。I/F回路82は、メイン制御基板70のI/F回路71からのコマンドの受信を行う。サブCPU83は、サブROM85に予め記憶されている演出用のプログラム等を読み込み、メイン制御基板70からの演出開始を示すコマンド、又は、演出ボタン検出スイッチ96や操作キー検出スイッチ97等の入力信号に基づいて所定の演算を行い、その演算結果を画像制御IC87aや音源IC87bに与える。   The effect control board 81 performs control to turn on the side lamps 93a and 93b and the effect lamps 94a to 94d mainly during the effect. The I / F circuit 82, the sub CPU 83, the random number generator 84, the sub ROM 85, and the sub RAM 86. It has. The I / F circuit 82 receives a command from the I / F circuit 71 of the main control board 70. The sub CPU 83 reads an effect program or the like stored in advance in the sub ROM 85, and receives a command indicating the start of the effect from the main control board 70 or an input signal such as the effect button detection switch 96 or the operation key detection switch 97. Based on the predetermined calculation, the calculation result is given to the image control IC 87a and the sound source IC 87b.

乱数発生器84は、乱数抽選の為の乱数を発生させるカウンタからなり、電源が投入されている間、常時0〜65535の数値を発生させ、メイン制御基板70からのコマンドに基づいて1つの数値が乱数値として出力される。サブROM85は、演算用のプログラムや演算の抽選処理に用いる演出抽選テーブル等を記憶している。サブRAM86はサブCPU83によって実行される演出用プログラムやサブCPU83による演算結果等を一時的に記憶する。   The random number generator 84 includes a counter that generates a random number for random number lottery. The random number generator 84 always generates a numerical value of 0 to 65535 while the power is turned on, and a single numerical value based on a command from the main control board 70. Is output as a random value. The sub ROM 85 stores a calculation program, an effect lottery table used for calculation lottery processing, and the like. The sub RAM 86 temporarily stores an effect program executed by the sub CPU 83, a calculation result by the sub CPU 83, and the like.

画像音響生成基板87は、主として演出時に表示画像や音響を制御するものであり、画像制御IC87a、画像ROM88、ビデオRAM89、音源IC87b、音源ROM90、アンプ91等を備えている。
画像制御IC87aは、画像ROM88から画像に関するプログラムやデータを読み込み、画像表示器7に画像を表示させる為の画像データ等を生成する。 The image control IC 87a reads a program or data related to an image from the image ROM 88, and generates image data or the like for displaying the image on the image display 7. 画像ROM88は、演出で用いる画像に関するプログラムやデータ(主としてキャラクタ等の画像のデータ)を記憶している。 The image ROM 88 stores programs and data (mainly image data such as characters) related to images used in the production. ビデオRAM89は、演出用のプログラムやデータを一時的に記憶するものであり、主に画像データを合成して生成させる為の作業エリアとされる。 The video RAM 89 temporarily stores programs and data for production, and is mainly used as a work area for synthesizing and generating image data. The image sound generation board 87 mainly controls a display image and sound during production, and includes an image control IC 87a, an image ROM 88, a video RAM 89, a sound source IC 87b, a sound source ROM 90, an amplifier 91, and the like. The image sound generation board 87 mainly controls a display image and sound during production, and includes an image control IC 87a, an image ROM 88, a video RAM 89, a sound source IC 87b, a sound source ROM 90, an amplifier 91, and the like.
The image control IC 87a reads an image program and data from the image ROM 88, and generates image data for displaying an image on the image display 7. The image ROM 88 stores programs and data (mainly image data such as characters) relating to images used for production. The video RAM 89 temporarily stores a program and data for production, and is a work area for mainly generating and synthesizing image data. The image control IC 87a reads an image program and data from the image ROM 88, and generates image data for displaying an image on the image display 7. The image ROM 88 stores programs and data (mainly image data such as characters) relating to images used for production. The video RAM 89 temporarily stores a program and data for production, and is a work area for mainly generating and synthesizing image data.

音源IC87bは、音源ROM90から音声に関するプログラムやデータを読み込み、スピーカ94a〜94dを駆動させる音声信号を生成する。音源ROM90は、演出を実行する為のプログラムやデータ(主に音声に関するプログラムやデータ)を記憶している。アンプ91は音源IC87bからの音声信号を増幅してスピーカ94a〜94dに出力する。   The sound source IC 87b reads a program and data related to sound from the sound source ROM 90 and generates sound signals for driving the speakers 94a to 94d. The sound source ROM 90 stores programs and data (mainly programs and data related to sound) for executing effects. The amplifier 91 amplifies the audio signal from the sound source IC 87b and outputs it to the speakers 94a to 94d.

中央表示基板60には、ベットスイッチ23、MAXベットスイッチ24、清算スイッチ22、スタートスイッチ27、3つのストップスイッチ28,29,30、設定スイッチ61、セレクタ62が接続されている。
ベットスイッチ23は、メダルを1枚ずつベットする為のスイッチであり、MAXベットスイッチ24はメダルを一度に3枚ベットする為のスイッチである。 The bet switch 23 is a switch for betting one medal at a time, and the MAX bet switch 24 is a switch for betting three medals at a time. 清算スイッチ22は、メダルの投入や小役等の入賞により獲得したメダルをスロットマシン1内で貯留し、その貯留されたメダルをスロットマシン1外へ払い出す為のスイッチである。 The clearing switch 22 is a switch for storing medals obtained by inserting medals or winning a small role in the slot machine 1 and paying out the stored medals to the outside of the slot machine 1. Connected to the central display board 60 are a bet switch 23, a MAX bet switch 24, a settlement switch 22, a start switch 27, three stop switches 28, 29 and 30, a setting switch 61 and a selector 62. Connected to the central display board 60 are a bet switch 23, a MAX bet switch 24, a settlement switch 22, a start switch 27, three stop switches 28, 29 and 30, a setting switch 61 and a selector 62.
The bet switch 23 is a switch for betting medals one by one, and the MAX bet switch 24 is a switch for betting three medals at a time. The clearing switch 22 is a switch for storing medals acquired by inserting medals or winning a small role in the slot machine 1 and paying out the stored medals out of the slot machine 1. The bet switch 23 is a switch for betting medals one by one, and the MAX bet switch 24 is a switch for betting three medals at a time. The clearing switch 22 is a switch for storing medals acquired by inserting medals or winning a small role in the slot machine 1 and paying out the stored medals out of the slot machine 1.

スタートスイッチ27は3つのリール11,12,13を一斉に回転させる指示をする為のレバースイッチである。左中右の3つのストップスイッチ28,29,30は、左中右の3つのリール11,12,13を夫々停止させる為のスイッチである。設定スイッチ61は、スロットマシン1の出球率(メダルの払出率)を設定する設定値を変更する場合に操作されるものである。   The start switch 27 is a lever switch for instructing to rotate the three reels 11, 12, and 13 simultaneously. The left middle right three stop switches 28, 29, 30 are switches for stopping the left middle right three reels 11, 12, 13 respectively. The setting switch 61 is operated when changing a setting value for setting the ball throwing rate (medal payout rate) of the slot machine 1.

セレクタ62は、メダル投入部21より投入される投入物に対し正規のメダルか異物かを判別して振り分けると共に、遊技待機中等でのメダル受付時(受付許可状態のとき)メダルの検出に合せてメダルの受け付けを行うものである。リール基板40には、左中右の3つのリールモータ41,42,43、左中右の3つのリールセンサ41a,42a,43a、外部集中端子板44、ドアスイッチ45が接続されている。   The selector 62 determines whether the medal is inserted from the medal insertion unit 21 as a regular medal or a foreign object, and distributes it, and also when a medal is received during a game standby or the like (when the admission is permitted), according to the detection of the medal. It accepts medals. Connected to the reel board 40 are three left and right reel motors 41, 42 and 43, three left and right reel sensors 41a, 42a and 43a, an external concentrated terminal plate 44, and a door switch 45.

左中右の3つのリールモータ41,42,43は、夫々、左中右の3つのリール11,12,13の加速と減速と停止を行うステッピングモータである。左中右の3つのリールセンサ41a,42a,43aは、夫々、左中右の3つのリール11,12,13の回転角度位置を検出するものである。外部集中端子板44は、メダル払出やメダル投入等の遊技情報に関する信号と、ドア開放、設定変更、投入エラー、払出エラー等のセキュリティに関する信号とを受信し、ホールコンピュータに出力するものである。ドアスイッチ45はドア開閉スイッチ信号を送信するものである。   The left middle right three reel motors 41, 42, 43 are stepping motors for accelerating, decelerating and stopping the left middle right three reels 11, 12, 13, respectively. The three reel sensors 41a, 42a, 43a on the left middle right detect the rotational angle positions of the three reels 11, 12, 13 on the left middle right. The external concentration terminal board 44 receives signals related to game information such as medal payout and medal insertion, and signals related to security such as door opening, setting change, insertion error, and payout error, and outputs them to the hall computer. The door switch 45 transmits a door opening / closing switch signal.

電源装置基板50には、ホッパ装置51、電源スイッチ52、リセットスイッチ53、設定変更有効化スイッチ54が接続されている。ホッパ装置51は、ゲームの入賞に応じてメダルの払い出しを行うものである。リセットスイッチ53は、エラー信号等の出力を停止させ、エラー状態から復旧させる為のリセットスイッチ信号を出力する。設定変更有効化スイッチ54は、設定スイッチ61の操作を有効化する設定変更有効化信号を送信する。   A hopper device 51, a power switch 52, a reset switch 53, and a setting change enable switch 54 are connected to the power supply device substrate 50. The hopper device 51 pays out medals in accordance with winning a game. The reset switch 53 stops outputting the error signal and outputs a reset switch signal for recovering from the error state. The setting change validation switch 54 transmits a setting change validation signal that validates the operation of the setting switch 61.

以上説明したスロットマシン1によるゲームにおいては遊技者がゲームのベット数を決定した状態でスタートスイッチ27を操作すると、左中右の3つのリール11,12,13が回転し、その後、遊技者が左中右の3つのリールストップスイッチ28,29,30を順に操作すると、左中右の3つのリール11,12,13が順に停止制御され、全てのリール11,12,13の停止後、有効ライン上での図柄の組み合わせ態様からゲーム結果を判断し、入賞した場合には該当する当選役に対応する規定数のメダルが付与される。   In the game by the slot machine 1 described above, when the player operates the start switch 27 in a state where the bet number of the game is determined, the three reels 11, 12, 13 on the left middle right rotate, and then the player When the three reel stop switches 28, 29, 30 on the left middle right are operated in order, the three reels 11, 12, 13 on the left middle right are controlled to be stopped in order, and are effective after all the reels 11, 12, 13 are stopped. When a game result is determined from the combination of symbols on the line and a prize is won, a prescribed number of medals corresponding to the corresponding winning combination is awarded.

◇[画像表示器役物ユニット]
次に、画像表示器役物ユニット100について、図3〜図23に基づいて説明する。
画像表示器役物ユニット100は、画像表示器7と、可動役物8と、案内駆動機構部100Aとをユニット化したものであり、この画像表示器役物ユニット100は前面扉2の上部に取り付けられている。画像表示器7は、前面扉2の上部の大部分を占めるサイズの矩形状の液晶表示器からなり、遊技に関する情報を表示するものである。
◇ [Image display unit]
Next, the image display instrument unit 100 will be described with reference to FIGS.
The image display accessory unit 100 is obtained by unitizing the image display 7, the movable accessory 8, and the guide drive mechanism unit 100 </ b> A. The image display accessory unit 100 is provided above the front door 2. It is attached. The image display 7 is a rectangular liquid crystal display having a size that occupies most of the upper portion of the front door 2, and displays information related to the game. The image display accessory unit 100 is obtained by unitizing the image display 7, the movable accessory 8, and the guide drive mechanism unit 100 </ b> A. The image display accessory unit 100 is provided above the front door 2. It is attached The image display 7 is a rectangular liquid crystal display having a size that occupies most of the upper portion of the front door 2, and displays information related to the game.

この画像表示器7は、その画面7aが鉛直面に対して上方ほど前方へ移行する前傾状に(画面一端縁となる上端縁が画面他端縁となる下端縁よりも前方へ位置するように)傾斜させて配置されている。この傾斜角度は、例えば10°〜20°、好ましくは15,16°である。このように画面7aを前傾状態にするのは、遊技者から画面7aを見易くする為であると同時に、画面7aの前側の空間に可動役物8をコンパクトに配置可能にする為であると共に可動役物8により画面7aの視認性が低下しないようにする為である。   The image display device 7 has a forward inclined shape in which the screen 7a moves forward toward the upper side with respect to the vertical plane (the upper end edge serving as one end edge of the screen is positioned more forward than the lower end edge serving as the other end edge of the screen). To be inclined. This inclination angle is, for example, 10 ° to 20 °, preferably 15, 16 °. The reason why the screen 7a is tilted forward is to make it easier for the player to see the screen 7a, and at the same time, to enable the movable accessory 8 to be placed in a compact space in the space on the front side of the screen 7a. This is to prevent the visibility of the screen 7 a from being lowered by the movable accessory 8.

可動役物8は左右に細長く前後厚さが例えば2〜3cm程度の直方体状に形成され、可動役物8の前面は画面7aから数cm前方に位置している。この可動役物8の内部構造の詳細については後述する。可動役物8は、その左右両端部に連結された左右1対のアーム部材101で支持され、1対のアーム部材101は、後述する第2案内機構105で支持されている。可動役物8の上下幅は例えば画面の上下幅の約1/4〜1/3であるが、この上下幅に限定されるものではない。   The movable accessory 8 is formed in a rectangular parallelepiped shape that is elongated to the left and right and has a front and rear thickness of, for example, about 2 to 3 cm, and the front surface of the movable accessory 8 is located several cm forward from the screen 7a. Details of the internal structure of the movable accessory 8 will be described later. The movable accessory 8 is supported by a pair of left and right arm members 101 connected to both left and right ends thereof, and the pair of arm members 101 is supported by a second guide mechanism 105 described later. The vertical width of the movable accessory 8 is, for example, about ¼ to 3 of the vertical width of the screen, but is not limited to this vertical width.

可動役物8は画面7aと平行方向へ昇降可能に案内されるが、図1、図3は可動役物8が最下位置の状態を示しており、この最下位置の可動役物8の大部分は画面7aの前側に位置しているが、可動役物8の下端部は画面7aの下端よりも下方へはみ出している。但し、可動役物8は画面7aの下端から下方へはみ出さないように配置してもよい。   The movable accessory 8 is guided so as to be movable up and down in a direction parallel to the screen 7a. FIGS. 1 and 3 show the state of the movable accessory 8 in the lowest position. Most of them are located on the front side of the screen 7a, but the lower end portion of the movable accessory 8 protrudes below the lower end of the screen 7a. However, the movable accessory 8 may be arranged so as not to protrude downward from the lower end of the screen 7a.

図3〜図7に示すように、画像表示器役物ユニット100は、画像表示器7と、画像表示器7の前側の可動役物8と、画像表示器7の背面側の案内駆動機構部100Aとを備えている。この案内駆動機構部100Aは、この案内駆動機構部100Aを構成する諸部材や諸機器を取り付ける為のベース部材102と、画像表示器7を昇降可能に案内する第1案内機構103と、画像表示器7を昇降駆動する為の第1昇降駆動手段104と、可動役物8を昇降可能に案内する第2案内機構105と、可動役物8を昇降駆動する為の第2昇降駆動手段106と、左右1対のカバー部材107a,107bとを備えている。   As shown in FIGS. 3 to 7, the image display accessory unit 100 includes an image display 7, a movable accessory 8 on the front side of the image display 7, and a guide drive mechanism unit on the back side of the image display 7. 100A. The guide drive mechanism 100A includes a base member 102 for attaching various members and devices constituting the guide drive mechanism 100A, a first guide mechanism 103 that guides the image display 7 so as to be movable up and down, and an image display. A first raising / lowering driving means 104 for driving the device 7 up and down, a second guide mechanism 105 for guiding the movable accessory 8 to be movable up and down, and a second raising / lowering driving means 106 for driving the movable accessory 8 up and down. And a pair of cover members 107a and 107b.

次に、ベース部材102について説明する。
図4、図5に示すように、ベース部材102は合成樹脂製の部材であり、ベース部材102は、前面ベース部材110と、この前面ベース部材110の左右両端部の背面側に固定されて後方へ延びる左右1対の側面ベース部材111a,111bと、これら側面ベース部材111a,111bの左右方向内面(左右方向中心の側)に夫々固定された左右1対の側面内側ベース部材112a,112bとを備えている。
Next, the base member 102 will be described.
As shown in FIGS. 4 and 5, the base member 102 is a member made of synthetic resin, and the base member 102 is fixed to the rear side of the front base member 110 and the left and right ends of the front base member 110 and rearward. A pair of left and right side base members 111a and 111b extending to the left and right and a pair of left and right side inner base members 112a and 112b fixed to the inner surfaces in the left and right direction (side in the left and right direction) of these side surface base members 111a and 111b, respectively. I have. As shown in FIGS. 4 and 5, the base member 102 is a member made of synthetic resin, and the base member 102 is fixed to the rear side of the front base member 110 and the left and right ends of the front base member 110 and rearward. A pair of left and right side base members 111a and 111b extending to the left and right and a pair of left and right side inner base members 112a and 112b fixed to the inner surfaces in the left and right direction (side in the) left and right direction) of these side surface base members 111a and 111b, respectively. I have.

前面ベース部材110は鉛直面に対してやや前傾姿勢に配設され、前面ベース部材110には、左右1対の突出部110a,110bと、画像表示器7をその画面7aと平行方向(画面7aと平行な方向であって、鉛直方向に対して上方ほど前方へ位置するように前後に10度〜20度傾斜させた所定方向)へ昇降可能に案内する第1案内機構103を支持する中央部の第1案内機構支持部103aとを有する。前面ベース部材110の左右の突出部110a,110bの背面部には、側面ベース部材111a,111bの前端部の係合凸部114a,114bを係合させる為の係合凹部115であって左右方向の外側面のみが開放状の係合凹部115が形成されている。   The front base member 110 is disposed in a slightly forward inclined posture with respect to the vertical plane. The front base member 110 has a pair of left and right protrusions 110a and 110b and an image display 7 in a direction parallel to the screen 7a (screen 7a is a center that supports the first guide mechanism 103 that is capable of moving up and down in a direction that is parallel to 7a and that is inclined forward and backward by 10 to 20 degrees so as to be positioned forward in the vertical direction. First guide mechanism support part 103a. Engaging recesses 115 for engaging the engaging protrusions 114a and 114b at the front ends of the side surface base members 111a and 111b are provided on the back surfaces of the left and right projecting portions 110a and 110b of the front base member 110, and the left and right directions. An engaging recess 115 is formed only on the outer surface of the opening.

前面ベース部材110の左右の突出部110a,110bの前端部には、画像表示器7が昇降する際に画像表示器7の背面に当接する遊転ローラ113a,113bが夫々装備され、遊転ローラ113a,113bは左右方向向きの水平な支軸に回転自在に支持されている。   The front end portions of the left and right projecting portions 110a and 110b of the front base member 110 are respectively equipped with idle rollers 113a and 113b that come into contact with the back surface of the image display 7 when the image display 7 moves up and down. 113a and 113b are rotatably supported on a horizontal support shaft in the left-right direction.

前面ベース部材110は、複数のフランジ部や複数の凹部及び凸部を介して高剛性の一体部材に構成されている。前面ベース部材110は、複数のビス等により前面扉2の上部の背面側に固定されている。例えば、前面ベース部材110の上端部には、固定用のビスを挿通させる為の左右1対のビス挿通穴116a,116bが形成され、前面ベース部材110の下端部には固定用のビスを挿通させる為の3つのビス挿通穴116c〜116eが形成されている。尚、側面ベース部材111a,111bや側面内側ベース部材112a,112bについては必要に応じて適宜後述する。   The front base member 110 is configured as a highly rigid integral member via a plurality of flange portions, a plurality of concave portions, and convex portions. The front base member 110 is fixed to the back side of the upper part of the front door 2 with a plurality of screws or the like. For example, a pair of left and right screw insertion holes 116 a and 116 b for inserting fixing screws are formed in the upper end portion of the front base member 110, and fixing screws are inserted in the lower end portion of the front base member 110. Three screw insertion holes 116c to 116e are formed for this purpose. The side surface base members 111a and 111b and the side surface inner base members 112a and 112b will be described later as appropriate.

次に、第1案内機構103について図4、図7、図9〜図13に基づいて説明する。
この第1案内機構103は、画像表示器7をその画面7aと平行方向へ昇降可能に案内するものである。第1案内機構103は、第1案内機構支持部103aと、画像表示器7の背面側に設けられた第1ガイドロッド117と、前面ベース部材110側に形成された第1リニアガイド118e付きの案内孔118とを備えている。第1ガイドロッド117は、画像表示器7の背面側の左右方向中間部に画面と平行に縦向きに配設され、第1ガイドロッド117は案内孔118を低摩擦で摺動自在に挿通している。
Next, the first guide mechanism 103 will be described based on FIGS. 4, 7, and 9 to 13.
The first guide mechanism 103 guides the image display 7 so as to be movable up and down in a direction parallel to the screen 7a. The first guide mechanism 103 includes a first guide mechanism support portion 103a, a first guide rod 117 provided on the back side of the image display 7, and a first linear guide 118e formed on the front base member 110 side. And a guide hole 118. The first guide rod 117 is disposed vertically in the left-right intermediate portion on the back side of the image display device 7 in parallel with the screen, and the first guide rod 117 is slidably inserted through the guide hole 118 with low friction. ing. The first guide mechanism 103 guides the image display 7 so as to be movable up and down in a direction parallel to the screen 7a. The first guide mechanism 103 includes a first guide mechanism support portion 103a, a first guide rod 117 provided on the back side of the image display 7, and a first linear guide 118e formed on the front base member 110 side. And a guide hole 118. The first guide rod 117 is disposed vertically in the left-right intermediate portion on the back side of the image display device 7 in parallel with the screen, and the first guide rod 117 is slidably inserted through the guide hole 118 with low friction. Ing.

第1案内機構支持部103aは、前面ベース部材110の中央側部分に縦向きに形成された左右1対の膨出部118a,118bと、これら膨出部118a,118bと一体形成され且つこれら膨出部118a,118bの中段部を架橋状に連結する架橋部118cと、この架橋部118cの前面にビスにて固定された案内部材118dであって架橋部118cと協働して第1案内機構103の円筒状の案内孔118を形成する案内部材118dとを有する。この案内孔118の内周部には、画像表示器7の背面に装備された第1ガイドロッド117を低摩擦で摺動自在に案内する第1リニアガイド118e(ベアリング機構)が組み込まれている。   The first guide mechanism support portion 103a is integrally formed with a pair of left and right bulged portions 118a and 118b formed in the center portion of the front base member 110, and these bulged portions 118a and 118b. A bridging portion 118c that connects the middle portions of the protruding portions 118a and 118b in a bridging manner, and a guide member 118d that is fixed to the front surface of the bridging portion 118c with a screw, in cooperation with the bridging portion 118c, a first guide mechanism And a guide member 118 d for forming 103 cylindrical guide holes 118. A first linear guide 118e (bearing mechanism) that slidably guides the first guide rod 117 provided on the back surface of the image display device 7 with low friction is incorporated in the inner peripheral portion of the guide hole 118. .

第1ガイドロッド117の上端部と下端部を夫々支持する合成樹脂製の1対の支持片117a,117bが設けられ、各支持片117a,117bは1対のビスで画像表示器7の背面ケース部材7bに固定されている。尚、前記左右1対の遊転ローラ113a,113bは、第1案内機構103に含まれるものである。   A pair of support pieces 117a and 117b made of synthetic resin for supporting the upper end portion and the lower end portion of the first guide rod 117, respectively, are provided, and each support piece 117a and 117b is a pair of screws and the rear case of the image display 7 It is fixed to the member 7b. The pair of left and right idle rollers 113 a and 113 b are included in the first guide mechanism 103.

前記第1案内機構103の変更例として、第1案内機構支持部103aを画像表示器7の背面部に形成し、第1ガイドロッド117を前面ベース部材110に装備し、画像表示器7をその画面7aと平行方向に昇降可能に案内するように構成してもよい。   As a modified example of the first guide mechanism 103, the first guide mechanism support portion 103a is formed on the back surface portion of the image display device 7, the first guide rod 117 is mounted on the front base member 110, and the image display device 7 is mounted on the back surface portion thereof. You may comprise so that it can guide in the direction parallel to the screen 7a so that raising / lowering is possible.

次に、第1昇降駆動手段104について図9〜図17に基づいて説明する。
第1昇降駆動手段104は、画像表示器7をその画面7aと平行方向へ昇降駆動するものであり、この第1昇降駆動手段104は、左右1対の第1昇降駆動ユニット104A,104Bに組み込まれている。左右1対の第1昇降駆動ユニット104A,104Bは、 左右対称(図7のXIII−XIII線を含む鉛直面に対して左右対称)のものであるので、左側の第1昇降駆動ユニット104Aについて説明し、右側の第1昇降駆動ユニット104Bの説明は省略する。
Next, the 1st raising / lowering drive means 104 is demonstrated based on FIGS. 9-17.
The first lifting / lowering driving means 104 drives the image display 7 to move up and down in a direction parallel to the screen 7a. The first lifting / lowering driving means 104 is incorporated in a pair of first lifting / lowering driving units 104A and 104B. It is. Since the pair of left and right first lifting / lowering drive units 104A and 104B is symmetrical (left and right symmetrical with respect to the vertical plane including the line XIII-XIII in FIG. 7), the left first lifting / lowering driving unit 104A will be described. The description of the right first elevating drive unit 104B is omitted. The first lifting / lowering driving means 104 drives the image display 7 to move up and down in a direction parallel to the screen 7a. The first lifting / lowering driving means 104 is incorporated in a pair of first lifting / lowering driving units 104A and 104B . It is. Since the pair of left and right first lifting / lowering drive units 104A and 104B is symmetrical (left and right symmetrical with respect to the vertical plane including the line XIII-XIII in FIG. 7), the left first lifting / lowering driving unit 104A will be described. The description of the right first elevating drive unit 104B is omitted.

左側の第1昇降駆動ユニット104Aは、揺動アーム部材120と、主ケース部材121と、副ケース部材122と、駆動モータ123と、減速ギヤ列124と、ウォームギヤ機構125と、アシスト機構126と、上限スイッチ127及び下限スイッチ128等を備えている。   The left first elevating drive unit 104A includes a swing arm member 120, a main case member 121, a sub case member 122, a drive motor 123, a reduction gear train 124, a worm gear mechanism 125, an assist mechanism 126, An upper limit switch 127 and a lower limit switch 128 are provided.

第1昇降駆動ユニット104Aは、 主ケース部材121と副ケース部材122の内部や側部や底部に、駆動モータ123と、減速ギヤ列124と、ウォームギヤ機構125と、アシスト機構126と、上限スイッチ127及び下限スイッチ128等を組み付けたユニットとして構成され、この第1昇降駆動ユニット104Aは、その主ケース部材121と副ケース部材122を前面ベース部材110の背面に複数のビス129で固定することにより前面ベース部材110に固定されている。   The first elevating drive unit 104A includes a drive motor 123, a reduction gear train 124, a worm gear mechanism 125, an assist mechanism 126, and an upper limit switch 127 in the main case member 121 and the sub case member 122, on the side and bottom thereof. The first elevating drive unit 104A is configured by fixing the main case member 121 and the sub case member 122 to the back surface of the front base member 110 with a plurality of screws 129. It is fixed to the base member 110.

このように、第1昇降駆動ユニット104Aは、前面ベース部材110の背面に複数のビスで固定されるユニットに構成してあるため、全体としてコンパクト化し、組み付け作業が簡単化し、遊技機1を廃棄する際には第1昇降駆動ユニット104Aを回収して再利用可能である。   Thus, since the first elevating drive unit 104A is configured as a unit that is fixed to the back surface of the front base member 110 with a plurality of screws, the first elevating drive unit 104A is made compact as a whole, the assembly work is simplified, and the gaming machine 1 is discarded. In this case, the first elevating drive unit 104A can be collected and reused.

画像表示器7の背面ケース部材7bの左部の上部には、揺動アーム部材120の先端部分にピン部材131を介して連結されるピン支持部材130が固定されている。ピン支持部材130は、基部130aとこの基部130aから後方へ延びる左右1対の腕部130bであってピン部材131の両端部を支持する1対の腕部130bとを備えている。   A pin support member 130 connected to the tip end portion of the swing arm member 120 via a pin member 131 is fixed to the upper portion of the left portion of the rear case member 7b of the image display 7. The pin support member 130 includes a base portion 130 a and a pair of left and right arm portions 130 b extending rearward from the base portion 130 a and supporting a pair of arm portions 130 b that support both end portions of the pin member 131.

前記揺動アーム部材120は、アーム部120aと、このアーム部120aの後端部に一体形成された後端連結部120bと、この後端連結部120bに固定されたギヤ形成部120cとを備えている。尚、アーム部120aの後端が後端連結部120bの左端部に連なるように一体形成されている。アーム部120aは所定の上下幅と所定の左右幅を有し、このアーム部120aの前端部分には前後方向(アーム部120aの長さ方向)に細長い長穴132が形成され、この長穴132に前記ピン部材131を挿通させ、このピン部材131を介してアーム部120aから1対の腕部130bへ昇降駆動力を伝達可能に連動連結してある。   The swing arm member 120 includes an arm part 120a, a rear end connecting part 120b formed integrally with a rear end part of the arm part 120a, and a gear forming part 120c fixed to the rear end connecting part 120b. ing. The rear end of the arm portion 120a is integrally formed so as to be continuous with the left end portion of the rear end connecting portion 120b. The arm portion 120a has a predetermined vertical width and a predetermined left-right width. An elongated slot 132 is formed in the front end portion of the arm portion 120a in the front-rear direction (the length direction of the arm portion 120a). The pin member 131 is inserted through the pin member 131, and the pin member 131 is interlocked and connected to the arm portion 120 a through the pin member 131 so as to be able to transmit a lifting drive force.

前記後端連結部120bには、円弧形左側板部134と、環状の右側板部135とが一体形成されている。これら側板部134,135の間にギヤ形成部120cの前部が係合され、ギヤ形成部120cが複数のビス136で側板部134,135に固定されている。ギヤ形成部120cと右側板部135の中心部には左右方向向きで水平な軸孔137が形成されている。このギヤ形成部120cは軸孔137と同心の部分円筒状の外周部を有し、この外周部の後半部にはウォームギヤ機構125のウォームホイールとして機能するギヤ部138が形成されている。   An arcuate left side plate portion 134 and an annular right side plate portion 135 are integrally formed with the rear end connecting portion 120b. A front portion of the gear forming portion 120 c is engaged between the side plate portions 134 and 135, and the gear forming portion 120 c is fixed to the side plate portions 134 and 135 with a plurality of screws 136. A shaft hole 137 is formed in the center of the gear forming portion 120c and the right side plate portion 135 in the horizontal direction. The gear forming portion 120c has a partially cylindrical outer peripheral portion concentric with the shaft hole 137, and a gear portion 138 that functions as a worm wheel of the worm gear mechanism 125 is formed in the rear half portion of the outer peripheral portion.

ギヤ形成部120cを回転自在に支持する軸部材139が軸孔137に挿通され、この軸部材139の左端部は主ケース部材121に形成した軸穴に支持されている。軸部材139の右端側部分は、副ケース部材122に一体形成された円筒部140に挿入されて支持されている。   A shaft member 139 that rotatably supports the gear forming portion 120 c is inserted into the shaft hole 137, and the left end portion of the shaft member 139 is supported by a shaft hole formed in the main case member 121. A right end portion of the shaft member 139 is inserted into and supported by a cylindrical portion 140 formed integrally with the sub case member 122.

前記駆動モータ123はその軸心を鉛直方向向きに配設したステッピングモータからなり、この駆動モータ123は主ケース部材121の底部壁121aの外側から底部壁121aに固定されている。減速ギヤ列124は、底部壁121aの上側において駆動モータ123の出力軸に固定されたピニオン123aと、このピニオン123aよりも大径でピニオン123aに噛合した第1ギヤ142と、この第1ギヤ142の上面側同軸一体の第2ギヤ143であって第1ギヤ142よりも小径の第2ギヤ143と、この第2ギヤ143よりも大径で第2ギヤ143に噛合した第3ギヤ144とを備え、駆動モータ123の回転駆動力は減速して第3ギヤ144に伝達される。   The drive motor 123 is a stepping motor whose axis is arranged in the vertical direction. The drive motor 123 is fixed to the bottom wall 121a from the outside of the bottom wall 121a of the main case member 121. The reduction gear train 124 includes a pinion 123a fixed to the output shaft of the drive motor 123 above the bottom wall 121a, a first gear 142 having a larger diameter than the pinion 123a and meshing with the pinion 123a, and the first gear 142. A second gear 143 that is coaxial with the upper surface of the first gear 142 and has a smaller diameter than the first gear 142, and a third gear 144 that has a larger diameter than the second gear 143 and meshes with the second gear 143. The rotational driving force of the drive motor 123 is decelerated and transmitted to the third gear 144.

第1,第2ギヤ142,143のギヤ軸は副ケース部材122とギヤカバー121bとで支持され、第3ギヤ144の下側ギヤ軸は主ケース部材121の底部壁121aで支持されている。尚、駆動モータ123はサブ制御基板80に電気的に接続され、サブ制御基板80で制御される。   The gear shafts of the first and second gears 142 and 143 are supported by the sub case member 122 and the gear cover 121b, and the lower gear shaft of the third gear 144 is supported by the bottom wall 121a of the main case member 121. The drive motor 123 is electrically connected to the sub control board 80 and controlled by the sub control board 80.

ウォームギヤ機構125は、第3ギヤ144と同心に鉛直向きに配置されたウォームギヤ145と、このウォームギヤ145に噛合した揺動アーム部材120のギヤ形成部120cに形成されたギヤ部138とを備えている。ウォームギヤ145の下端軸部の下端部がカプラー145aにより第3ギヤ144のギヤ軸に連結され、この下端軸部は軸受145bを介して主ケース部材121に支持されている。ウォームギヤ145の上端軸部は軸受145cを介して主ケース部材121に支持されている。   The worm gear mechanism 125 is provided with a worm gear 145 that is disposed concentrically with the third gear 144 in a vertical direction, and a gear portion 138 that is formed on the gear forming portion 120 c of the swing arm member 120 that meshes with the worm gear 145. . The lower end portion of the lower end shaft portion of the worm gear 145 is connected to the gear shaft of the third gear 144 by a coupler 145a, and the lower end shaft portion is supported by the main case member 121 via a bearing 145b. The upper end shaft portion of the worm gear 145 is supported by the main case member 121 via a bearing 145c.

こうして、駆動モータ123の駆動力で減速ギヤ列124とウォームギヤ機構125を介してギヤ部138を回転させて、揺動アーム部材120のアーム部120aをギヤ形成部120cを回転中心として上下に揺動させることで、画像表示器7をその画面7aと平行方向へ昇降駆動可能に構成してある。尚、ウォームギヤ145の上端軸部の上端には、スクリュードライバを係合可能な操作部145dが形成され、主ケース部材121の上面壁の開口から外界に臨んでいる。それ故、スクリュードライバによりウォームギヤ145の回転位相を調整可能になっている。   Thus, the gear portion 138 is rotated by the driving force of the drive motor 123 via the reduction gear train 124 and the worm gear mechanism 125, and the arm portion 120a of the swing arm member 120 swings up and down around the gear forming portion 120c. By doing so, the image display 7 can be driven up and down in a direction parallel to the screen 7a. An operation portion 145d that can engage a screw driver is formed at the upper end of the upper end shaft portion of the worm gear 145, and faces the outside from the opening of the upper surface wall of the main case member 121. Therefore, the rotational phase of the worm gear 145 can be adjusted by the screw driver.

次に、アシスト機構126について説明する。
このアシスト機構126は、駆動モータ123の負荷を軽減する為に揺動アーム部材120を上方へ揺動する側へ付勢するものである。 The assist mechanism 126 urges the swing arm member 120 to swing upward in order to reduce the load on the drive motor 123. このアシスト機構126は、円筒部140に複数巻き巻いた捩じりバネ146と、バネ保持部材147等を備えている。 The assist mechanism 126 includes a torsion spring 146 wound around the cylindrical portion 140 in a plurality of turns, a spring holding member 147, and the like. 捩じりバネ146は、主ケース部材121のバネ受部148に係止される一端側の静止側レバー部146aと、後端連結部120bに形成された係止部149に下側から係合した他端側の可動側レバー部146bとを備えている。 The torsion spring 146 engages with the stationary lever portion 146a on one end side locked to the spring receiving portion 148 of the main case member 121 and the locking portion 149 formed on the rear end connecting portion 120b from below. It is provided with a movable lever portion 146b on the other end side. この捩じりバネ146は、可動側レバー部146bにより係止部149を上方へ、つまり揺動アーム部材120を上方揺動側へ付勢するアシスト力を発生するように構成されている。 The torsion spring 146 is configured to generate an assist force for urging the locking portion 149 upward, that is, the swing arm member 120 upward swing side by the movable lever portion 146b. Next, the assist mechanism 126 will be described. Next, the assist mechanism 126 will be described.
The assist mechanism 126 urges the swing arm member 120 to swing upward in order to reduce the load on the drive motor 123. The assist mechanism 126 includes a torsion spring 146 wound around the cylindrical portion 140, a spring holding member 147, and the like. The torsion spring 146 is engaged from the lower side with a stationary lever portion 146a on one end side that is locked to the spring receiving portion 148 of the main case member 121 and a locking portion 149 formed on the rear end connecting portion 120b. And a movable lever portion 146b on the other end side. The torsion spring 146 is configured to generate an assisting force that urges the locking portion 149 upward, that is, the swinging arm member 120 upward swinging by the movable lever portion 146b. The assist mechanism 126 urges the swing arm member 120 to swing upward in order to reduce the load on the drive motor 123. The assist mechanism 126 includes a torsion spring 146 wound around the cylindrical portion 140, a spring holding member 147, and the like The torsion spring 146 is engaged from the lower side with a stationary lever portion 146a on one end side that is locked to the spring receiving portion 148 of the main case member 121 and a locking portion 149 formed on the rear end connecting portion 120b. And a movable lever portion 146b on the other end side. The torsion spring 146 is configured to generate an assisting force that urges the locking portion 149 upward, that is, the swinging arm member 120 upward swinging by the movable lever portion 146b.

前記係止部149は副ケース部材122に形成した円弧穴150を貫通して円弧穴150の右側へ突出している。バネ保持部材147は、捩じりバネ146が円筒部140から脱落しないように、円筒部140の右端に当接され、その1対の固定部147aを副ケース部材122に突設した1対のボス部140aにビスで固定されている。   The locking portion 149 passes through an arc hole 150 formed in the sub case member 122 and protrudes to the right side of the arc hole 150. The spring holding member 147 is in contact with the right end of the cylindrical portion 140 so that the torsion spring 146 does not fall off from the cylindrical portion 140, and a pair of fixing portions 147a projecting from the sub case member 122. It is fixed to the boss 140a with screws.

次に、上限スイッチ127と下限スイッチ128について説明する。
揺動アーム部材120の後端連結部120bの上端部には、揺動アーム部材120が上限位置まで揺動した際に上限スイッチ127(例えばフォトインタラプタ)を作動させる上限作動片127aが一体形成され、後端連結部120bの下端近傍部には揺動アーム部材120が下限位置まで揺動した際に下限スイッチ128(例えばフォトインタラプタ)を作動させる下限作動片128aが一体形成されている。上限スイッチ127と下限スイッチ128は、サブ制御基板80に検出信号を出力する。
Next, the upper limit switch 127 and the lower limit switch 128 will be described.
An upper limit operation piece 127a that operates an upper limit switch 127 (for example, a photo interrupter) when the swing arm member 120 swings to the upper limit position is integrally formed at the upper end portion of the rear end connecting portion 120b of the swing arm member 120. A lower limit operating piece 128a for operating a lower limit switch 128 (for example, a photo interrupter) when the swing arm member 120 swings to the lower limit position is integrally formed in the vicinity of the lower end of the rear end connecting portion 120b. The upper limit switch 127 and the lower limit switch 128 output detection signals to the sub control board 80. An upper limit operation piece 127a that operates an upper limit switch 127 (for example, a photo interrupter) when the swing arm member 120 swings to the upper limit position is formed at the upper end portion of the rear end connecting portion 120b of the swing arm member 120. A lower limit operating piece 128a for operating a lower limit switch 128 (for example, a photo interrupter) when the swing arm member 120 swings to the lower limit position is formed in the vicinity of the lower end of the rear end connecting portion 120b. The upper limit switch 127 and the lower limit switch 128 output detection signals to the sub control board 80.

次に、第2案内機構105及び第2昇降駆動手段106について、図14、図18〜図23に基づいて説明する。第2案内機構105は可動役物8を画像表示器7の画面7aと平行方向(画像表示器7が昇降する所定方向と平行な方向)へ昇降可能に案内するものであり、第2昇降駆動手段106は、可動役物8を画面7aと平行方向へ昇降駆動するものである。   Next, the 2nd guide mechanism 105 and the 2nd raising / lowering drive means 106 are demonstrated based on FIG. 14, FIG. 18-FIG. The second guide mechanism 105 guides the movable accessory 8 so as to be movable up and down in a direction parallel to the screen 7a of the image display 7 (a direction parallel to a predetermined direction in which the image display 7 moves up and down). The means 106 drives the movable accessory 8 up and down in a direction parallel to the screen 7a.

第2案内機構105の大部分と第2昇降駆動手段106は、左右1対の第2案内駆動ユニット105A,105Bに組み込んで構成されている。左右1対の第2案内駆動ユニット105A,105Bは、左右対称(図7のXIII−XIII線を含む鉛直面に対して左右対称)のものであるので、左側の第2案内駆動ユニット105Aについて説明し、右側の第2案内駆動ユニット105Bの説明は省略する。   Most of the second guide mechanism 105 and the second raising / lowering driving means 106 are configured to be incorporated in a pair of left and right second guide drive units 105A and 105B. Since the pair of left and right second guide drive units 105A and 105B are symmetrical (with respect to the vertical plane including the line XIII-XIII in FIG. 7), the left second guide drive unit 105A will be described. The description of the right second guide drive unit 105B is omitted.

第2案内駆動ユニット105Aは、側面ベース部材111aと、側面内側ベース部材112aと、案内機構150と、昇降駆動手段151と、上限スイッチ152及び下限スイッチ153等を備えている。側面ベース部材111aと側面内側ベース部材112aとで所定の左右幅を有し且つ側面視にてほぼ台形状の箱状体となっている。昇降駆動手段151は、その駆動モータ164を除き、側面ベース部材111aと側面内側ベース部材112aの内部に装備され、案内機構150は側面ベース部材111aの左外側に装備されている。   The second guide drive unit 105A includes a side surface base member 111a, a side surface inner base member 112a, a guide mechanism 150, an elevating drive unit 151, an upper limit switch 152, a lower limit switch 153, and the like. The side surface base member 111a and the side surface inner base member 112a have a predetermined left-right width and are substantially trapezoidal box-like bodies in side view. Except for the drive motor 164, the elevating drive means 151 is installed inside the side base member 111a and the side inner base member 112a, and the guide mechanism 150 is installed on the left outer side of the side base member 111a.

側面ベース部材111aの前端部には、前面ベース部材110の背面の係合凹部115に緊密に係合する係合凸部114aが形成され、この側面ベース部材111aの少なくとも上端部と下端部とが前面ベース部材110の背面にビスにて固定されている。側面内側ベース部材112aは側面ベース部材111aに複数のビスにて固定されている。側面ベース部材111aは、駆動モータ164、上限スイッチ152、下限スイッチ153等の左側外面を覆う透明な外面カバー部材(図示略)であって複数のビスで固定される外面カバーを備えている。   At the front end portion of the side surface base member 111a, an engagement convex portion 114a that closely engages with the engagement concave portion 115 on the back surface of the front surface base member 110 is formed. At least an upper end portion and a lower end portion of the side surface base member 111a are formed. The back surface of the front base member 110 is fixed with screws. The side inner base member 112a is fixed to the side base member 111a with a plurality of screws. The side base member 111a is a transparent outer surface cover member (not shown) that covers the left outer surface of the drive motor 164, the upper limit switch 152, the lower limit switch 153, and the like, and includes an outer surface cover that is fixed with a plurality of screws.

案内機構150は、側面ベース部材111aの外側に、鉛直面内において画像表示器7の画面7aと平行に配設された第2ガイドロッド154と、この第2ガイドロッド154に沿って昇降可能に案内されるアーム部材101とを備えている。アーム部材101は、後端部の被案内部155と、この被案内部155から前方へ延びるアーム本体部156と、このアーム本体部156の前端から延びるL形連結部157とを備えている。   The guide mechanism 150 is disposed outside the side surface base member 111a in a vertical plane in parallel with the screen 7a of the image display 7, and can be moved up and down along the second guide rod 154. And an arm member 101 to be guided. The arm member 101 includes a guided portion 155 at the rear end portion, an arm main body portion 156 extending forward from the guided portion 155, and an L-shaped connecting portion 157 extending from the front end of the arm main body portion 156.

第2ガイドロッド154の上端部は、側面ベース部材111aの左側面の上端部に1対のビス158aで固定された支持片158で支持され、第2ガイドロッド154の下端部は、側面ベース部材111aの左側面の下端部に1対のビス159aで固定された支持片159で支持されている。   The upper end portion of the second guide rod 154 is supported by a support piece 158 fixed to the upper end portion of the left side surface of the side surface base member 111a with a pair of screws 158a, and the lower end portion of the second guide rod 154 is the side surface base member. It is supported by a support piece 159 fixed to a lower end portion of the left side surface of 111a with a pair of screws 159a.

アーム本体部156は被案内部155から前方下り緩傾斜状に延び、被案内部155とアーム本体部156は画像表示器7の左端部の後方に配設され、L形連結部157はアーム本体部156の前端から画像表示器7の左端部より左方へ延びてから前方へ延び、L形連結部157の前端が可動役物8の左端部の背面に固定されている。アーム部材101の外面側には内部のリード線収容溝の外面を塞ぐ帯状部材101aが設けられている。   The arm main body 156 extends from the guided portion 155 in a forward and downward inclined manner, the guided portion 155 and the arm main body 156 are disposed behind the left end of the image display 7, and the L-shaped connecting portion 157 is the arm main body. The front end of the L-shaped connecting portion 157 is fixed to the back surface of the left end portion of the movable accessory 8, extending from the front end of the portion 156 leftward from the left end portion of the image display 7. On the outer surface side of the arm member 101, a belt-like member 101a that closes the outer surface of the internal lead wire receiving groove is provided.

アーム部材101の被案内部155の右側面側には、分割部材155cが固定され、被案内部155には分割部材155cを介して第2リニアガイド(ベアリング機構)(図示略)付きの被案内孔155aが形成され、第2ガイドロッド154はその被案内孔155aを摺動自在に挿通している。そのため、アーム部材101の被案内部155は第2ガイドロッド154に沿って低摩擦で昇降可能に案内され、アーム部材101が鉛直面内で第2ガイドロッド154に沿って画面7aと平行方向に移動可能になっている。   A split member 155c is fixed to the right side surface of the guided portion 155 of the arm member 101, and the guided portion 155 is guided by a second linear guide (bearing mechanism) (not shown) via the split member 155c. A hole 155a is formed, and the second guide rod 154 is slidably inserted through the guided hole 155a. Therefore, the guided portion 155 of the arm member 101 is guided along the second guide rod 154 so as to move up and down with low friction, and the arm member 101 is parallel to the screen 7a along the second guide rod 154 in the vertical plane. It can be moved.

アーム部材101の被案内部155の上端と下端には1対の緩衝材155bが夫々付設され、アーム部材101が上限位置に達した際に、上端の緩衝材155bが上側の支持片158に当接して衝撃を緩和し、アーム部材101が下限位置に達した際に、下端の緩衝材155bが下側の支持片155bに当接して衝撃を緩和する。側面ベース部材111aの前部には、第2ガイドロッド154と平行なスリット状のガイド穴160が形成され、側面内側ベース部材112aにはガイド穴160の右側に平行に位置するガイド溝161が形状されている。   A pair of cushioning materials 155b are respectively attached to the upper and lower ends of the guided portion 155 of the arm member 101. When the arm member 101 reaches the upper limit position, the upper cushioning material 155b contacts the upper support piece 158. When the arm member 101 reaches the lower limit position, the shock absorbing material 155b at the lower end comes into contact with the lower support piece 155b to reduce the impact. A slit-shaped guide hole 160 parallel to the second guide rod 154 is formed in the front portion of the side surface base member 111a, and a guide groove 161 positioned in parallel to the right side of the guide hole 160 is formed in the side surface inner base member 112a. Has been.

次に、昇降駆動手段151について説明する。
昇降駆動手段151は可動役物8を支持するアーム部材101を第2ガイドロッド154に沿って昇降駆動するものであり、昇降駆動手段151は、枢支軸162と、この枢支軸162に支持されて枢支軸162を中心として揺動可能な揺動部材163と、駆動モータ164(ステッピングモータ)と、ギヤ機構165、アシスト機構166等を備えている。
Next, the raising / lowering drive means 151 is demonstrated.
The elevating drive means 151 is for elevating and driving the arm member 101 supporting the movable accessory 8 along the second guide rod 154. The elevating drive means 151 is supported by the pivot shaft 162 and the pivot shaft 162. A swing member 163 that can swing about the pivot shaft 162, a drive motor 164 (stepping motor), a gear mechanism 165, an assist mechanism 166, and the like are provided. The elevating drive means 151 is for elevating and driving the arm member 101 supporting the movable accessory 8 along the second guide rod 154. The elevating drive means 151 is supported by the pivot shaft 162 and the pivot shaft 162. A swing member 163 that can swing about the pivot shaft 162, a drive motor 164 (stepping motor), a gear mechanism 165, an assist mechanism 166, and the like are provided.

ここで、図18は側面ベース部材111aを取り外した状態の第2案内駆動ユニット105Aの左側面図、図19は第2案内駆動ユニット105Aの分解斜視図、図20は側面ベース部材111aを取り外した状態の第2案内駆動ユニット105Aの左下方から視た斜視図、図21はアーム部材101を取り外した状態の第2案内駆動ユニット105Aを左前方から視た斜視図、図22は側面内側ベース部材112aと昇降駆動手段151を右下方から視た斜視図、図23は同第2案内駆動ユニット105Aを右後方から視た斜視図である。   Here, FIG. 18 is a left side view of the second guide drive unit 105A with the side base member 111a removed, FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective view of the second guide drive unit 105A, and FIG. 20 is a side base member 111a removed. FIG. 21 is a perspective view of the second guide drive unit 105A in a state viewed from the left front, and FIG. 22 is a perspective view of the second guide drive unit 105A in a state in which the arm member 101 is removed. FIG. 23 is a perspective view of 112a and the lifting drive means 151 as viewed from the lower right, and FIG. 23 is a perspective view of the second guide drive unit 105A as viewed from the rear right.

揺動部材163は、側面ベース部材111aと側面内側ベース部材112aの内部に枢支軸162を中心として揺動可能に配設されている。枢支軸162は、側面ベース部材111aと側面内側ベース部材112aの後部の上部に配設され、枢支軸162の左端部は側面ベース部材111aで支持され、枢支軸162の右端部分は側面内側ベース部材112aに突設された円筒部179に挿入されて支持されている。   The swing member 163 is disposed inside the side surface base member 111a and the side surface inner base member 112a so as to be swingable about the pivot shaft 162. The pivot shaft 162 is disposed at the upper part of the rear portion of the side surface base member 111a and the side surface inner base member 112a, the left end portion of the pivot shaft 162 is supported by the side surface base member 111a, and the right end portion of the pivot shaft 162 is the side surface. It is inserted into and supported by a cylindrical portion 179 protruding from the inner base member 112a.

揺動部材163は、扇形に近い形状のセクター部167と、セクター部167の先端から前方へ延びるアーム部169とを有する。セクター部167の先端部には左方へ突出状の三日月形状部168が形成され、この三日月形状部168の径方向小径側には円弧状の内歯ギヤ168aが形成されている。   The swing member 163 includes a sector portion 167 having a shape similar to a sector and an arm portion 169 extending forward from the tip of the sector portion 167. A crescent-shaped portion 168 protruding leftward is formed at the tip of the sector portion 167, and an arc-shaped internal gear 168a is formed on the small-diameter side of the crescent-shaped portion 168.

アーム部169は、三日月形状部168の下端側部分から径方向外側へ第2ガイドロッド154の方へ延びており、このアーム部169にはその長さ方向に細長い長穴169aが形成されている。アーム部材101の被案内部155の分割部材155cには、金属製のピン部材170の左端部を支持するボス部170aと、ボス部170aの上下両側に形成された1対の小径ボス部170b(ボス部170aよりも小径で且つボス部170aよりも長い)とが形成され、ボス部170aはガイド孔160に摺動自在に嵌入され、1対の小径ボス部170bはガイド孔160に遊動自在に嵌入されている。   The arm portion 169 extends from the lower end side portion of the crescent shaped portion 168 outward in the radial direction toward the second guide rod 154, and an elongated slot 169a is formed in the arm portion 169 in the length direction. . The split member 155c of the guided portion 155 of the arm member 101 includes a boss portion 170a that supports the left end portion of the metal pin member 170, and a pair of small-diameter boss portions 170b formed on both upper and lower sides of the boss portion 170a ( The boss portion 170a is smaller in diameter and longer than the boss portion 170a), the boss portion 170a is slidably fitted into the guide hole 160, and the pair of small diameter boss portions 170b are freely movable in the guide hole 160. It is inserted.

ガイド孔160よりも右側に位置する長円部材171の中段部には、ピン部材170を挿通させるピン穴171aと、このピン穴171aの両側に位置する1対のビス穴171bが形成されている。長円部材171は、その右方から1対のビス穴171bに挿通させた1対のビス(図示略)を1対の小径ボス部170bに螺合することで分割部材155cに固定されている。   A pin hole 171a for inserting the pin member 170 and a pair of screw holes 171b positioned on both sides of the pin hole 171a are formed in the middle portion of the oval member 171 located on the right side of the guide hole 160. . The oval member 171 is fixed to the split member 155c by screwing a pair of screws (not shown) inserted into the pair of screw holes 171b from the right side into the pair of small-diameter boss portions 170b. .

ピン部材170はピン穴171aに摺動自在に挿通させて、その左端部がボス部170aの軸穴に挿入され、ピン部材170はアーム部169の長穴169aを貫通し、長穴169aの両側においてピン部材170には1対の鍔付きローラ172が回転自在に外嵌され、1対の鍔付きローラ172の1対の当接状のローラ部172aが長穴169aに摺動自在に嵌入され、1対の鍔付きローラ172の鍔部172bは長穴169aの両側でアーム部169の側面に当接し、ピン部材170の右端部に回転自在に外嵌された合成樹脂製のローラ部材170cがガイド溝161に摺動自在に嵌入されている。   The pin member 170 is slidably inserted into the pin hole 171a, and the left end portion thereof is inserted into the shaft hole of the boss portion 170a. The pin member 170 penetrates the elongated hole 169a of the arm portion 169, and both sides of the elongated hole 169a. A pair of hooked rollers 172 are rotatably fitted on the pin member 170, and a pair of abutting roller portions 172a of the pair of hooked rollers 172 are slidably fitted into the elongated holes 169a. The flange portions 172b of the pair of flanged rollers 172 are in contact with the side surfaces of the arm portion 169 on both sides of the elongated hole 169a, and a synthetic resin roller member 170c that is rotatably fitted to the right end portion of the pin member 170 is provided. The guide groove 161 is slidably fitted.

駆動モータ164は側面ベース部材111aの左側面に軸心を左右方向向きに付設されている。ギヤ機構165は、駆動モータ164の出力軸に固定されたピニオン164aと、このピニオン164aと内歯ギヤ部168aに噛合して駆動モータ164の回転駆動力を内歯ギヤ部168aに伝達するギヤ173とを備えている。ギヤ173のギヤ軸は側面ベース部材111aに片持ち状に支持されている。こうして、駆動モータ164によりピニオン164aとギヤ173を介して内歯ギヤ部168aに回転駆動力を伝達し、揺動部材163とそのアーム部169を揺動させることでピン部材170をガイド穴160とガイド溝161内で昇降させ、ピン部材170を介してアーム部材101を昇降駆動することができる。尚、上記の駆動モータ164はサブ制御基板80に電気的に接続され、サブ制御基板80で制御される。   The drive motor 164 has a shaft center attached to the left side surface of the side base member 111a in the left-right direction. The gear mechanism 165 includes a pinion 164a fixed to the output shaft of the drive motor 164, and a gear 173 that meshes with the pinion 164a and the internal gear portion 168a to transmit the rotational driving force of the drive motor 164 to the internal gear portion 168a. And. The gear shaft of the gear 173 is supported in a cantilever manner on the side surface base member 111a. Thus, the driving motor 164 transmits the rotational driving force to the internal gear portion 168a via the pinion 164a and the gear 173, and the swinging member 163 and its arm portion 169 are swung so that the pin member 170 and the guide hole 160 are swung. The arm member 101 can be moved up and down through the pin member 170 by being moved up and down in the guide groove 161. The drive motor 164 is electrically connected to the sub control board 80 and controlled by the sub control board 80.

次に、アシスト機構166について説明する。
このアシスト機構166は、駆動モータ164の負荷を軽減する為に揺動部材163を上方揺動側へ付勢するものである。アシスト機構166は、枢支軸162の右端部分を挿入可能に側面内側ベース部材112aの左側面に突出させた円筒部179に複数巻き巻いた捩じりバネ174と、バネ保持部材175を備えている。
Next, the assist mechanism 166 will be described.
The assist mechanism 166 biases the swinging member 163 upwardly to reduce the load on the drive motor 164. The assist mechanism 166 includes a torsion spring 174 wound around a cylindrical portion 179 that protrudes from the left side surface of the side inner base member 112a so that the right end portion of the pivot shaft 162 can be inserted, and a spring holding member 175. Yes. The assist mechanism 166 biases the swinging member 163 upwardly to reduce the load on the drive motor 164. The assist mechanism 166 includes a torsion spring 174 wound around a cylindrical portion 179 that utilizings from the left side surface of the side inner base member 112a so that the right end portion of the pivot shaft 162 can be inserted, and a spring holding member 175. Yes.

この捩じりバネ174は、側面内側ベース部材112aのバネ受部176に係止された静止側レバー部174aと、揺動部材163のセクター部167の右側面の下部に突設された係止部177に下側から係合した可動側レバー部174bとを備えている。側面内側ベース部材112aには、揺動部材163が揺動する際の上記係止部177の移動を許す為の円弧形開口178が形成され、上記係止部177は円弧形開口178を貫通して側面内側ベース部材112aの右側へ突出している。それ故、上記のアシスト機構166により、揺動部材163を上方揺動側へ付勢することにより、駆動モータ164の小型化を図っている。   The torsion spring 174 includes a stationary lever portion 174a locked to the spring receiving portion 176 of the side inner base member 112a, and a locking projection protruding from the lower right side of the sector portion 167 of the swing member 163. A movable lever portion 174b engaged with the portion 177 from below is provided. The side inner base member 112a is formed with an arc-shaped opening 178 for allowing the locking portion 177 to move when the swinging member 163 swings. The locking portion 177 has an arc-shaped opening 178. It penetrates and protrudes to the right side of the side inner base member 112a. Therefore, the driving motor 164 is reduced in size by biasing the swinging member 163 upward by the assist mechanism 166 described above.

次に、上限スイッチ152と下限スイッチ153について説明する。
上限スイッチ152はアーム部材101が上限位置に達したことを検出するものであり、下限スイッチ153はアーム部材101が下限位置に達したことを検出するものである。アーム部材101の被案内部155には、上記のスイッチ作動用の作動片155eが設けられ、側面内側ベース部材112aの左側面には、アーム部材101が上限位置に達した時に作動片155eで作動させられる上限スイッチ152と、アーム部材101が下限位置に達した時に作動片155eで作動させられる下限スイッチ153とが設けられている。
Next, the upper limit switch 152 and the lower limit switch 153 will be described.
The upper limit switch 152 detects that the arm member 101 has reached the upper limit position, and the lower limit switch 153 detects that the arm member 101 has reached the lower limit position. The guided portion 155 of the arm member 101 is provided with an operating piece 155e for operating the switch, and the left side surface of the side inner base member 112a is operated by the operating piece 155e when the arm member 101 reaches the upper limit position. An upper limit switch 152 to be actuated and a lower limit switch 153 to be actuated by the actuating piece 155e when the arm member 101 reaches the lower limit position are provided. The upper limit switch 152 detects that the arm member 101 has reached the upper limit position, and the lower limit switch 153 detects that the arm member 101 has reached the lower limit position. The guided portion 155 of the arm member 101 is provided with an operating piece 155e for operating the switch, and the left side surface of the side inner base member 112a is operated by the operating piece 155e when the arm member 101 reaches the upper limit position. An upper limit switch 152 to be actuated and a lower limit switch 153 to be actuated by the actuating piece 155e when the arm member 101 reaches the lower limit position are provided.

これらスイッチ152,153は例えばフォトインタラプタからなるが、その他近接スイッチ又はその他のスイッチで構成してもよい。上限スイッチ152と下限スイッチ153はサブ制御基板80に検出信号を出力する。
尚、側面ベース部材112aの右側面には、互いに離隔した位置において、第1昇降駆動ユニット104Aの主ケース部材121の左側面に当接してそれを受け止めるボス状の1対の受止部180が水平方向向きに突設されている。 On the right side surface of the side surface base member 112a, a pair of boss-shaped receiving portions 180 that abut and receive the left side surface of the main case member 121 of the first elevating drive unit 104A at positions separated from each other. It is projected in the horizontal direction. この1対の受止部180により、第1昇降駆動ユニット104A,104Bと第2案内駆動ユニット105A,105Bの一体性を高め、それらの振動を抑制することができる。 The pair of receiving portions 180 can enhance the integrity of the first elevating drive units 104A and 104B and the second guide drive units 105A and 105B and suppress their vibrations. These switches 152 and 153 are made of photo interrupters, for example, but may be composed of other proximity switches or other switches. The upper limit switch 152 and the lower limit switch 153 output detection signals to the sub control board 80. These switches 152 and 153 are made of photo interrupters, for example, but may be composed of other proximity switches or other switches. The upper limit switch 152 and the lower limit switch 153 output detection signals to the sub control board 80.
Incidentally, a pair of boss-shaped receiving portions 180 that come into contact with and receive the left side surface of the main case member 121 of the first elevating drive unit 104A at positions separated from each other on the right side surface of the side surface base member 112a. Projected horizontally. By this pair of receiving portions 180, the unity between the first elevating drive units 104A and 104B and the second guide drive units 105A and 105B can be enhanced and their vibrations can be suppressed. A pair of boss-shaped receiving portions 180 that come into contact with and receive the left side surface of the main case member 121 of the first elevating drive unit 104A at positions separated from each other on the right side surface of the side surface base member 112a. Projected horizontally. By this pair of receiving portions 180, the unity between the first elevating drive units 104A and 104B and the second guide drive units 105A and 105B can be enhanced and their vibrations can be suppressed.

次に、前記画像表示器役物ユニット100を想到するに至った経緯について説明する。
特開2014−8122号公報の遊技機においては、画像表示器の画面の鉛直面に対する傾斜方向と傾斜角を任意に変更可能に構成する関係上、画像表示器の前面側の近傍部位に役物類を配置することが難しい。 In the gaming machine of JP-A-2014-8122, since the tilt direction and tilt angle of the screen of the image display with respect to the vertical plane can be arbitrarily changed, an accessory is provided in the vicinity of the front side of the image display. Difficult to place kind. しかも、画像表示器の上下方向位置が一定であるため、画像表示器の上下移動(昇降移動)を利用して演出効果を得ることはできない。 Moreover, since the vertical position of the image display is constant, it is not possible to obtain an effect by using the vertical movement (up and down movement) of the image display. また、画像表示器を昇降させる場合に低摩擦で迅速に昇降可能にすることは難しい。 Further, when raising and lowering the image display, it is difficult to raise and lower the image display quickly with low friction. Next, how the image display accessory unit 100 has been conceived will be described. Next, how the image display accessory unit 100 has been conceived will be described.
In the gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-8122, there is a role in the vicinity of the front side of the image display unit because the inclination direction and the inclination angle with respect to the vertical plane of the screen of the image display unit can be arbitrarily changed. It is difficult to place a kind. In addition, since the vertical position of the image display device is constant, it is not possible to obtain an effect by using the vertical movement (up and down movement) of the image display device. In addition, when the image display is moved up and down, it is difficult to quickly move up and down with low friction. In the gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-8122, there is a role in the vicinity of the front side of the image display unit because the approach direction and the approach angle with respect to the vertical plane of the It is difficult to place a kind. In addition, since the vertical position of the image display device is constant, it is not possible to obtain an effect by using the vertical movement (up and in addition, when the image display is moved up and down, it is difficult to quickly move up and down with low friction.

次に、上記の画像表示器役物ユニット100の作用、効果について説明する。
画像表示器7の画面7aを上方ほど前方に移行する前傾状に傾斜させたため画面が見易くなる。 Since the screen 7a of the image display 7 is tilted forward so as to move forward, the screen becomes easier to see. しかも、画面の見易さを殆ど低下させることなく、画像表示器7の前側に可動役物8を配置可能になる。 Moreover, the movable accessory 8 can be arranged on the front side of the image display 7 without reducing the visibility of the screen. また、画像表示器7の上下移動(昇降移動)可能にしたのでその上下移動を利用して顕著な演出効果を得ることができる。 Further, since the image display 7 can be moved up and down (up and down movement), a remarkable effect can be obtained by utilizing the up and down movement. そして、画像表示器7をその画面7aと平行に上下移動させるため、画面7aの見易さが損なわれることもない。 Since the image display 7 is moved up and down in parallel with the screen 7a, the visibility of the screen 7a is not impaired. Next, operations and effects of the image display accessory unit 100 will be described. Next, operations and effects of the image display accessory unit 100 will be described.
Since the screen 7a of the image display 7 is tilted forward so as to move forward, the screen becomes easy to see. In addition, the movable accessory 8 can be arranged on the front side of the image display 7 without substantially reducing the visibility of the screen. Further, since the image display 7 can be moved up and down (moved up and down), a significant effect can be obtained using the up and down movement. Since the image display 7 is moved up and down in parallel with the screen 7a, the visibility of the screen 7a is not impaired. Since the screen 7a of the image display 7 is tilted forward so as to move forward, the screen becomes easy to see. In addition, the movable accessory 8 can be arranged on the front side of the image display 7 without substantially reducing the visibility of Since the image display 7 is moved up and down in parallel with the screen. Further, since the image display 7 can be moved up and down (moved up and down), a significant effect can be obtained using the up and down movement. screen 7a, the visibility of the screen 7a is not impaired.

しかも、画像表示器7の画面7aの前側に配置した可動役物8を画像表示器7の画面7aと平行方向へ上下移動(昇降移動)可能にしたため、可動役物8が上下移動する際に画像表示器7と可動役物8との干渉が生じることがなく、また、可動役物8の上下移動を利用して演出効果を得ることができる。   In addition, since the movable accessory 8 arranged on the front side of the screen 7a of the image display 7 can be moved up and down (moved up and down) in a direction parallel to the screen 7a of the image display 7, the movable accessory 8 moves up and down. Interference between the image display 7 and the movable accessory 8 does not occur, and an effect can be obtained by using the vertical movement of the movable accessory 8.

画像表示器7を昇降可能に案内する第1案内機構103は、第1リニアガイド118eを備えているため、画像表示器7を低摩擦で昇降可能になり、駆動モータ123の小型化を図ることもできる。第1案内機構103に、画像表示器7の背面ケース7bに当接する左右1対の遊転ローラ113a,113bを設けたため、1つの第1案内機構支持部103aと1本のガイドロッド117の数を1組だけ設ければよくなり、第1案内機構103の構造が簡単になった。   Since the first guide mechanism 103 that guides the image display device 7 so as to be movable up and down includes the first linear guide 118e, the image display device 7 can be moved up and down with low friction, and the drive motor 123 can be downsized. You can also. Since the first guide mechanism 103 is provided with a pair of left and right idle rollers 113a and 113b that contact the back case 7b of the image display device 7, the number of one first guide mechanism support portion 103a and one guide rod 117 is provided. Only one set is required, and the structure of the first guide mechanism 103 is simplified.

画像表示器7を昇降駆動する第1昇降駆動手段104を左右1対の第1昇降駆動ユニット104A,104Bで構成し、第1昇降駆動ユニット104A,104Bの各々を主ケース部材121と副ケース部材122とに組み付けたユニットに構成したため、第1昇降駆動ユニット104A,104Bの画像表示器役物ユニット100への組み付け性を高め、製作費の低減を図ることができる。尚、別機種の遊技機の可動役物の駆動等に適用することも可能で汎用性に優れた役物駆動ユニットとして利用可能である。   The first elevating drive means 104 for elevating and driving the image display 7 is composed of a pair of left and right first elevating drive units 104A and 104B, and each of the first elevating drive units 104A and 104B includes a main case member 121 and a sub case member. Since the unit is assembled to the unit 122, the assembling property of the first elevating drive units 104A and 104B to the image display accessory unit 100 can be improved, and the production cost can be reduced. In addition, it can be applied to the driving of a movable accessory of another type of gaming machine, and can be used as an accessory driving unit having excellent versatility.

また、第1昇降駆動ユニット104A,104Bにセルフロック機能のあるウォームギヤ機構125を組み込んでいるため、画像表示器7の停止位置が安定する。第1昇降駆動ユニット104A,104Bにアシスト機構126を設けたため、駆動モータ123を著しく小型化することができる。   Further, since the worm gear mechanism 125 having a self-locking function is incorporated in the first elevating drive units 104A and 104B, the stop position of the image display 7 is stabilized. Since the assist mechanism 126 is provided in the first elevating drive units 104A and 104B, the drive motor 123 can be remarkably reduced in size.

可動役物8を昇降可能に案内する第2案内機構105は、可動役物8を支持する左右1対のアーム部材101に装備された左右1対の第2リニアガイドを左右1対の第2ガイドロッド154で案内するように構成してあるため、可動役物8を低摩擦で迅速に昇降可能になり、駆動モータ164の小型化を図ることができる。   The second guide mechanism 105 that guides the movable accessory 8 to be movable up and down includes a pair of left and right second linear guides mounted on a pair of left and right arm members 101 that support the movable accessory 8 and a pair of left and right second guides. Since it is configured to be guided by the guide rod 154, the movable accessory 8 can be moved up and down quickly with low friction, and the drive motor 164 can be reduced in size.

第2案内機構105の大部分(左右1対のアーム部材101を除いた大部分)と第2昇降駆動手段106を、左右1対の第2案内駆動ユニット105A,105Bで構成し、第2案内駆動ユニット105A,105Bの各々を側面ベース部材111a,111bと、側面内側ベース部材112a,112bとに組み付けたユニットに構成したため、第2案内駆動ユニット105A,105Bの画像表示器役物ユニット100への組み付け性を高め、製作費の低減を図ることができる。尚、別機種の遊技機の可動役物の案内駆動等に適用することも可能で汎用性に優れた役物案内駆動ユニットとして利用可能である。   Most of the second guide mechanism 105 (most except for the pair of left and right arm members 101) and the second elevating drive means 106 are constituted by a pair of left and right second guide drive units 105A and 105B, and the second guide Since each of the drive units 105A and 105B is configured as a unit assembled to the side surface base members 111a and 111b and the side surface inner base members 112a and 112b, the second guide drive units 105A and 105B are connected to the image display accessory unit 100. Assembling performance can be improved and production costs can be reduced. In addition, it can be applied to a guide driving of a movable accessory of another type of gaming machine, and can be used as an accessory guide driving unit having excellent versatility.

第2案内駆動ユニット105A,105Bにもアシスト機構166を設けるため、駆動モータ164を著しく小型化することができる。第2案内駆動ユニット105A,105Bのギヤ機構165は、揺動部材163の三日月形状部168に形成した内歯ギヤ部168aと、この内歯ギヤ部168aに噛合したギヤ173を有するため、ギヤ機構165をコンパクトに形成することができる。   Since the second guide drive units 105A and 105B are also provided with the assist mechanism 166, the drive motor 164 can be significantly reduced in size. The gear mechanism 165 of the second guide drive units 105A and 105B has an internal gear portion 168a formed on the crescent-shaped portion 168 of the swing member 163 and a gear 173 meshed with the internal gear portion 168a. 165 can be formed compactly.

次に、前記実施例を部分的に変更する例について説明する。
1)第1案内機構103に左右に離隔して配置した2組の第1案内機構支持部103aと第1ガイドロッド117とを設け、遊転ローラ113a,113bを省略してもよい。
2)第1昇降駆動ユニット104A,104bは、揺動アーム部材120で駆動する代わりに、ラック・ピニオン機構により画像表示器7を昇降駆動するように構成することも可能である。
3)その他当業者ならば、本発明の趣旨を逸脱することなく、前記実施例を部分的な変更を付加した形態で実施可能である。
Next, an example in which the above embodiment is partially changed will be described.
1) The first guide mechanism 103 may be provided with two sets of first guide mechanism support portions 103a and a first guide rod 117 that are spaced apart from each other on the left and right sides, and the idle rollers 113a and 113b may be omitted. 1) The first guide mechanism 103 may be provided with two sets of first guide mechanism support portions 103a and a first guide rod 117 that are spaced apart from each other on the left and right sides, and the idle coil 113a and 113b may be omitted ..
2) The first elevating drive units 104A and 104b can be configured to drive the image display 7 up and down by a rack and pinion mechanism instead of being driven by the swing arm member 120. 2) The first elevating drive units 104A and 104b can be configured to drive the image display 7 up and down by a rack and pinion mechanism instead of being driven by the swing arm member 120.
3) Other persons skilled in the art can implement the embodiment in a form with partial modifications without departing from the gist of the present invention. 3) Other persons skilled in the art can implement the embodiment in a form with partial modifications without departing from the gist of the present invention.

◆[演出役物装置]
演出役物装置200について説明する。

演出役物装置200は、前記(図4、図18〜図20等参照)のように、可動バー役物8(可動役物8)と、可動バー役物8を鉛直方向に対して上方ほど前方へ移行するように少し(10〜20度程度)傾く傾斜方向へ移動自在に案内する案内機構105(第2案内機構105)と、可動バー役物8を支持して下待機位置(第1位置)と上作動位置(第2位置)とにわたって前記案内機構105による案内方向(前記傾斜方向)へ昇降移動させる第1駆動手段106(第2昇降駆動手段106)とを備えている。 As described above (see FIGS. 4, 18 to 20, etc.), the effect accessory device 200 moves the movable bar accessory 8 (movable accessory 8) and the movable bar accessory 8 upward in the vertical direction. A guide mechanism 105 (second guide mechanism 105) that tilts slightly (about 10 to 20 degrees) so as to move forward and guides the movable bar in an inclined direction, and a lower standby position (first) that supports the movable bar accessory 8. It is provided with a first driving means 106 (second lifting driving means 106) that moves up and down in a guiding direction (the tilting direction) by the guiding mechanism 105 over a position) and an upper operating position (second position). ◆ [Director equipment] ◆ [Director equipment]
The stage effect device 200 will be described. The stage effect device 200 will be described.
As described above (see FIGS. 4, 18 to 20, etc.), the stage effect device 200 is configured so that the movable bar accessory 8 (movable accessory 8) and the movable bar accessory 8 move upward in the vertical direction. A guide mechanism 105 (second guide mechanism 105) that guides movably in a tilting direction that is slightly inclined (about 10 to 20 degrees) so as to move forward, and a lower standby position (first position) that supports the movable bar accessory 8 1st drive means 106 (2nd raising / lowering drive means 106) moved up and down in the guide direction (the said inclination direction) by the said guide mechanism 105 over a position and an upper operation position (2nd position). As described above (see FIGS. 4, 18 to 20, etc.), the stage effect device 200 is configured so that the movable bar accessory 8 (movable accessory 8) and the movable bar accessory 8 move upward in the vertical direction. A guide mechanism 105 (second guide mechanism 105) that guides movably in a tilting direction that is slightly inclined (about 10 to 20 degrees) so as to move forward, and a lower standby position (first position) that supports the movable bar accessory 8 1st drive means 106 (2nd raising / lowering drive means 106) moved up and down in the guide direction (the said approach direction) by the said guide mechanism 105 over a position and an upper operation position (2nd position).

尚、以下の演出役物装置200の説明では、前記傾斜方向を上下方向とし、水平方向に対して前方ほど下方へ移行するように少し(10〜20度程度)傾く(前記傾斜方向と直交する)傾斜方向を前後方向とする。   In the following description of the stage effect device 200, the tilt direction is the vertical direction, and is tilted slightly (about 10 to 20 degrees) so as to move downward toward the front with respect to the horizontal direction (perpendicular to the tilt direction). ) The inclination direction is the front-rear direction.

図24〜図54に示すように、可動バー役物8は、可動役物部材201(可動ベース部材201)を有し、この可動役物部材201に、中央電飾器202、左電飾器203、右電飾器204、第1,第2左固定導光板205,206(第1導光板205,206)、及び右固定導光板207(第1導光板207)が固定的に設けられ、左右1対の上側の第1可動導光板208(第1可動役物208/第2導光板208)、及び左右1対の下側の第2可動導光板209(第2可動役物209/第2導光板209)が上下方向へ可動(つまり、第1,第2左固定導光板205,206、及び右固定導光板207に対して相対移動可能)に設けられている。   As shown in FIGS. 24 to 54, the movable bar accessory 8 has a movable accessory member 201 (movable base member 201). The movable accessory member 201 includes a central electric ornament 202 and a left electric ornament. 203, a right illumination device 204, first and second left fixed light guide plates 205 and 206 (first light guide plates 205 and 206), and a right fixed light guide plate 207 (first light guide plate 207) are fixedly provided, A pair of left and right upper movable first light guide plates 208 (first movable combination 208 / second light guide plate 208) and a pair of left and right lower movable light guide plates 209 (second movable combination 209 / second). 2 light guide plates 209) are provided to be movable in the vertical direction (that is, movable relative to the first and second left fixed light guide plates 205 and 206 and the right fixed light guide plate 207).

可動役物部材201には、中央電飾器202の複数のLED211a、左電飾器203の複数のLED212a,212b,212c,212d、右電飾器204の複数のLED213a,213b,213c、1対の第1可動導光板208に用いる複数のLED214a,214b、及び1対の第2可動導光板209に用いる複数のLED215a,215bを実装してなる第1LED基板210が取付けられ、また、第1,第2左固定導光板205,206に用いる複数のLED216a,216bを実装してなる第2LED基板216と、右固定導光板207に用いる複数のLED217aを実装してなる第3LED基板217が取付けられている。尚、各LEDはカラー発光可能なものである。   The movable accessory member 201 includes a plurality of LEDs 211a of the central decorator 202, a plurality of LEDs 212a, 212b, 212c, and 212d of the left decorator 203, and a plurality of LEDs 213a, 213b, and 213c of the right decorator 204. A plurality of LEDs 214a and 214b used for the first movable light guide plate 208 and a first LED substrate 210 mounted with a plurality of LEDs 215a and 215b used for the pair of second movable light guide plates 209 are attached. A second LED substrate 216 mounted with a plurality of LEDs 216a, 216b used for the second left fixed light guide plate 205, 206 and a third LED substrate 217 mounted with a plurality of LEDs 217a used for the right fixed light guide plate 207 are attached. Yes. Each LED can emit color light.

更に、可動役物部材201には、可動役物部材201(つまり固定導光板205,206,207)に対して1対の第1可動導光板208を一体的に第1退避位置(図46)と第1進出位置(図47)とにわたって上下方向へ進退移動(昇降)させ、1対の第2可動導光板209を一体的に第2退避位置(図47)と第2進出位置(図48)とにわたって上下方向へ進退移動(昇降)させる第2駆動手段218が設けられている。   Further, a pair of first movable light guide plates 208 is integrated with the movable accessory member 201 with respect to the movable accessory member 201 (that is, the fixed light guide plates 205, 206, and 207) in a first retracted position (FIG. 46). And the first advancing position (FIG. 47) are moved forward and backward (lifted) in the vertical direction, and the pair of second movable light guide plates 209 are integrated into the second retracted position (FIG. 47) and the second advanced position (FIG. 48). ), A second driving means 218 is provided for moving back and forth (up and down) in the vertical direction.

このように、可動役物部材201に装備された中央,左,右電飾器202,203,204、第1,第2左固定導光板205,206、右固定導光板207、1対の第1可動導光板208、1対の第2導光板209、第1,第2,第3LED基板210,216,217、及び第2駆動手段218が、第1駆動手段106によって可動役物部材201と一体的に下待機位置と上作動位置とにわたって上下方向へ移動駆動される。   As described above, the center, left and right lighting devices 202, 203, and 204, the first and second left fixed light guide plates 205 and 206, the right fixed light guide plate 207, and the pair of first fixed light guide plates 207 provided on the movable accessory member 201 One movable light guide plate 208, a pair of second light guide plates 209, first, second, and third LED substrates 210, 216, 217, and second drive means 218 are connected to the movable accessory member 201 by the first drive means 106. It is integrally driven to move up and down over the lower standby position and the upper operation position.

次に、可動役物部材201、中央,左,右電飾器202,203,204、第1,第2左固定導光板205,206、右固定導光板207、1対の第1可動導光板208、1対の第2可動導光板209、第2駆動手段218について詳しく説明する。 Next, the movable accessory member 201, the center, left and right lighting devices 202, 203, and 204, the first and second left fixed light guide plates 205 and 206, the right fixed light guide plate 207, and a pair of first movable light guide plates 208 and the pair of second movable light guide plates 209 and the second driving means 218 will be described in detail.

「可動役物部材」
図24〜図32、図41〜図48に示すように、可動役物部材201は、正面視にて左右方向に長い略矩形状に形成され、前記(図4、図18〜図20等参照)のように、可動役物部材201の左右両端部に、そこから後方へ延びる左右1対のアーム部材101が固定され、これらアーム部材101の後部が、案内機構105と第1駆動手段106により案内支持されて移動駆動される。 As shown in FIGS. 24 to 32 and 41 to 48, the movable accessory member 201 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape that is long in the left-right direction in the front view, and is described above (see FIGS. 4, 18 to 20, etc.). ), A pair of left and right arm members 101 extending rearward from the left and right ends of the movable accessory member 201 are fixed, and the rear portion of these arm members 101 is connected by the guide mechanism 105 and the first driving means 106. It is guided and supported and moved. "Moving parts" "Moving parts"
As shown in FIGS. 24 to 32 and FIGS. 41 to 48, the movable accessory member 201 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape that is long in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, as described above (see FIGS. 4, 18 to 20, etc.). ), A pair of left and right arm members 101 extending rearward therefrom are fixed to the left and right ends of the movable accessory member 201, and the rear portions of these arm members 101 are fixed by the guide mechanism 105 and the first driving means 106. The guide is supported and moved. As shown in FIGS. 24 to 32 and FIGS. 41 to 48, the movable accessory member 201 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape that is long in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, as described above (see FIGS. 4) , 18 to 20, etc.).), A pair of left and right arm members 101 extending rearward figs are fixed to the left and right ends of the movable accessory member 201, and the rear portions of these arm members 101 are fixed by the guide mechanism 105 and the first driving means 106. The guide is supported and moved.

可動役物部材201は、正面視にて略同形状(左右方向に長い略矩形状)の第1,第2可動ベース220,221、及びベースカバー222を有し、第1可動ベース220の後側に第2可動ベース221が取付けられ、第2可動ベース221の後側にベースカバー222が取付けられている。   The movable accessory member 201 includes first and second movable bases 220 and 221 and a base cover 222 having substantially the same shape (substantially rectangular shape extending in the left-right direction) in a front view. A second movable base 221 is attached to the side, and a base cover 222 is attached to the rear side of the second movable base 221.

第1可動ベース220に、中央,左,右電飾器202,203,204、第1,第2左固定導光板205,206、右固定導光板207、及び第1,第2,第3LED基板210,216,217が装着され、第2可動ベース221に、1対の第1可動導光板208、1対の第2可動導光板209、及び第2駆動手段218が装着され、ベースカバー222により、第2駆動手段218がカバーされている。   The first movable base 220 includes the center, left and right lighting devices 202, 203, and 204, the first and second left fixed light guide plates 205 and 206, the right fixed light guide plate 207, and the first, second, and third LED substrates. 210, 216, 217 are mounted, and a pair of first movable light guide plates 208, a pair of second movable light guide plates 209, and second drive means 218 are mounted on the second movable base 221, and the base cover 222 The second driving means 218 is covered.

第1LED基板210は、正面視にて第1可動ベース220よりも少しだけ小さな矩形状に形成されて、前後方向に向く略鉛直姿勢で配置され、この第1LED基板210の前側に中央,左,右電飾器202,203,204が配置されている。左電飾器203の前側に第1,第2左固定導光板205,206が配置され、第1,第2左固定導光板205,206の下側に左右方向に長い帯板状の第2LED基板216が略水平姿勢で配置されている。右電飾器204の前側に右固定導光板207が配置され、右固定導光板207の下側に左右方向に長い帯板状の第3LED基板217が略水平姿勢で配置されている。   The first LED substrate 210 is formed in a rectangular shape that is slightly smaller than the first movable base 220 in a front view, and is disposed in a substantially vertical posture facing the front-rear direction. Right illumination devices 202, 203, and 204 are disposed. The first and second left fixed light guide plates 205 and 206 are disposed on the front side of the left electrical decorator 203, and the second LED in the form of a strip that is long in the left-right direction below the first and second left fixed light guide plates 205 and 206. The substrate 216 is arranged in a substantially horizontal posture. A right fixed light guide plate 207 is disposed on the front side of the right electrical ornament 204, and a strip-shaped third LED substrate 217 that is long in the left-right direction is disposed below the right fixed light guide plate 207 in a substantially horizontal posture.

第1LED基板210の後側において、第1,第2可動ベース220,221の上部間に形成された左右1対の第1収容空間201aに、1対の第1可動導光板208が夫々上下方向へ移動自在に収容され、第1,第2可動ベース220,221の下部間に形成された左右1対の第2収容空間201bに、1対の第2可動導光板209が夫々上下方向へ移動自在に収容され、1対の第1可動導光板208、及び1対の第2可動導光板209の後側に第2駆動手段218が配設されている。   On the rear side of the first LED substrate 210, a pair of first movable light guide plates 208 are vertically arranged in a pair of left and right first housing spaces 201a formed between the upper portions of the first and second movable bases 220 and 221, respectively. A pair of second movable light guide plates 209 move vertically in a pair of left and right second storage spaces 201b formed between the lower portions of the first and second movable bases 220 and 221. The second drive means 218 is disposed behind the pair of first movable light guide plates 208 and the pair of second movable light guide plates 209.

「中央電飾器」
図24、図28、図30、図31、図33〜図35に示すように、中央電飾器202は、比較的強力に発光することが可能なものであり、第1LED基板210の中央部前面に実装された5個のLED211aと、第1LED基板210の中央部前側に配置された中央レンズ部材225と、中央レンズ部材225の前側に配置された光透過部を有する中央電飾部材226とを有する。
"Central Lighting Equipment"
As shown in FIGS. 24, 28, 30, 31, and 33 to 35, the central decorator 202 can emit light relatively strongly, and the central portion of the first LED substrate 210. Five LEDs 211a mounted on the front surface, a central lens member 225 disposed on the front side of the central portion of the first LED substrate 210, and a central illumination member 226 having a light transmission portion disposed on the front side of the central lens member 225, Have As shown in FIGS. 24, 28, 30, 31, and 33 to 35, the central decorator 202 can emit light relatively strongly, and the central portion of the first LED substrate 210. Five LEDs 211a mounted on the front surface, a central lens member 225 disposed on the front side of the central portion of the first LED substrate 210, and a central illumination member 226 having a light transmission portion disposed on the front side of the central lens member 225, Have

5個のLED211aは、全て前方へ発光可能に設けられ、上下方向に間隔を空けて一列状に配列されている。中央レンズ部材225には、5個のLED211aに夫々対応する5つのレンズ部225aが設けられ、各レンズ部225aは、その中央部分に設けられた前方凸の凸レンズ部225bと、凸レンズ部225bの周囲に後方へ凹むように設けられた皿状レンズ部225cとを有する。   All of the five LEDs 211a are provided so as to be able to emit light forward, and are arranged in a line at intervals in the vertical direction. The central lens member 225 is provided with five lens portions 225a corresponding to the five LEDs 211a, and each lens portion 225a has a front convex convex lens portion 225b provided at the central portion thereof and a periphery of the convex lens portion 225b. And a dish-shaped lens portion 225c provided so as to be recessed backward.

「左電飾器」
図30、図31、図33、図34、図36に示すように、左電飾器203は、縦縞模様(左)と稲妻模様を可変に発光させ表示させることが可能なものであり、第1LED基板210の左部前面に実装された縦縞模様(左)用の10個のLED212a、及び稲妻模様用の11個のLED212b,212c,212dと、第1LED基板210の左部前側に前後方向に向く略鉛直姿勢で配置された左導光板230と、左導光板230の前側に同じく前後方向に向く略鉛直姿勢で配置された左発光表示板231とを有する。
"Left decoration"
As shown in FIGS. 30, 31, 33, 34, and 36, the left electrical ornament 203 is capable of variably emitting and displaying a vertical stripe pattern (left) and a lightning pattern. 10 LEDs 212a for vertical stripe pattern (left) mounted on the left front surface of 1 LED board 210, 11 LEDs 212b, 212c, and 212d for lightning pattern, and in the front-rear direction on the left front side of the first LED board 210 It has a left light guide plate 230 arranged in a substantially vertical posture facing, and a left light emitting display plate 231 arranged in a substantially vertical posture which is also oriented in the front-rear direction on the front side of the left light guide plate 230. As shown in FIGS. 30, 31, 33, 34, and 36, the left electrical ornament 203 is capable of variably emitting and displaying a vertical stripe pattern (left) and a lightning pattern. 10 LEDs 212a for vertical stripe pattern (left) mounted on the left front surface of 1 LED board 210, 11 LEDs 212b, 212c, and 212d for lightning pattern, and in the front-rear direction on the left front side of the first LED board 210 It has a left light guide plate 230 arranged in a substantially vertical posture facing, and a left light emitting display plate 231 arranged in a substantially vertical posture which is also oriented in the front-rear direction on the front side of the left light guide plate 230.

縦縞模様(左)用の10個のLED212aは、全て前方へ発光可能に設けられ、左右方向に7パートに分けて、右側(中央電飾器202側)から左側へ1番目,2番目・・・,7番目となるように配列され、1〜3番目の各々のLED212aの数は上下2個であり、4〜7番目の各々のLED212aの数は1個である。左導光板230には、縦縞模様(左)用の3〜7番目のLED212aに夫々対応する5つの上下方向に細長いスリット230aが前後貫通状に形成されている。   The ten LEDs 212a for the vertical stripe pattern (left) are all provided so as to be able to emit light forward, and are divided into seven parts in the left-right direction, from the right side (central lighting 202 side) to the left side, the second,. The number of the first to third LEDs 212a is two at the top and the bottom, and the number of the fourth to seventh LEDs 212a is one. In the left light guide plate 230, five vertically elongated slits 230a corresponding to the third to seventh LEDs 212a for the vertical stripe pattern (left) are formed to penetrate in the front-rear direction.

縦縞模様(左)用の3〜7番目のLED212aは、5つのスリット230aに夫々収容され、これらLED212aからの光を、殆ど左導光板230に導入させないで、前方へ向かわせることができる。また、縦縞模様(左)用の1,2番目のLED212aは、左導光板230の右側に位置し、これらLED212aからの光も、殆ど左導光板230に導入させないで、前方へ向かわせることができる。   The third to seventh LEDs 212a for the vertical stripe pattern (left) are accommodated in the five slits 230a, respectively, and light from these LEDs 212a can be directed to the front without almost introducing the light into the left light guide plate 230. Further, the first and second LEDs 212a for the vertical stripe pattern (left) are located on the right side of the left light guide plate 230, and light from these LEDs 212a can be directed to the front without being almost introduced into the left light guide plate 230. it can.

稲妻模様用の上側1個のLED212bは、下方へ発光可能に設けられ、稲妻模様用の上側4個のLED212cは、全て斜め下方へ発光可能に設けられ、これらLED212b,212cは、左導光板230の上端近傍において、左右方向に間隔を空けて一列状に配列されている。稲妻模様用の下側6個のLED212dは、全て斜め上方へ発光可能に設けられ、左導光板230の下端近傍において、左右方向に間隔を空けて一列状に配列されている。左導光板230には、稲妻模様用の9個のLED212b,212c,212dに夫々対応する9つの光導入穴230b,230c,230dが前後貫通状に形成されている。   The upper one LED 212b for the lightning pattern is provided so as to be able to emit light downward, and the upper four LEDs 212c for the lightning pattern are all provided so as to be able to emit light obliquely downward, and these LEDs 212b and 212c are provided on the left light guide plate 230. Are arranged in a line at intervals in the left-right direction. The lower six LEDs 212d for the lightning pattern are all provided so as to emit light obliquely upward, and are arranged in a line at intervals in the left-right direction in the vicinity of the lower end of the left light guide plate 230. In the left light guide plate 230, nine light introduction holes 230b, 230c, and 230d corresponding to the nine LEDs 212b, 212c, and 212d for the lightning pattern are formed in the front-rear direction.

稲妻模様用の9個のLED212b,212c,212dは、9つの光導入穴230b,230c,230dに夫々収容され、これらLED212b,212c,212dからの光を、左導光板230にその光導入穴230b,230c,230dに臨む面から導入させることができる。また、稲妻模様用の下側且つ右側の2個のLED212dは、左導光板230の右側に位置し、これらLED212dからの光も、左導光板230にその右端面から導入させることができる。   The nine LEDs 212b, 212c, and 212d for the lightning pattern are accommodated in the nine light introduction holes 230b, 230c, and 230d, respectively, and the light from the LEDs 212b, 212c, and 212d is transmitted to the left light guide plate 230 in the light introduction hole 230b. , 230c, 230d can be introduced from the face. Further, the lower and right two LEDs 212d for the lightning pattern are located on the right side of the left light guide plate 230, and the light from these LEDs 212d can also be introduced into the left light guide plate 230 from its right end surface.

左導光板230には5つのスリット230aが形成されているが、稲妻模様用の11個のLED212b,212c,212dの図示配置により、これらLED212b,212c,212dからの光を左導光板230内の略全域に行き届かせることができ、この左導光板230は、稲妻模様を発光表示させる為のバックライトとして機能する。   Five slits 230a are formed in the left light guide plate 230, but the light from these LEDs 212b, 212c, and 212d is transmitted in the left light guide plate 230 by the illustrated arrangement of the eleven LEDs 212b, 212c, and 212d for the lightning pattern. The left light guide plate 230 functions as a backlight for displaying a lightning pattern.

左発光表示板231には、その右端部に縦縞模様(左)用の1番目のLED212aに対応する縦発光部231aが設けられ、縦縞模様(左)用の2〜7番目のLED212aに夫々対応する上下方向に細長い6つの縦発光溝部231bが形成されている。各縦発光溝部231bは、その後端部分に形成されたレンズ部によって、LED212aから受けた光を上下方向に伸ばして前方へ発光させる。   The left light-emitting display board 231 is provided with a vertical light-emitting portion 231a corresponding to the first LED 212a for the vertical stripe pattern (left) at the right end, and corresponds to the second to seventh LEDs 212a for the vertical stripe pattern (left), respectively. Six vertical light emitting grooves 231b that are elongated in the vertical direction are formed. Each vertical light emitting groove portion 231b causes light received from the LED 212a to extend in the vertical direction and to emit light forward by a lens portion formed at the rear end portion thereof.

また、左発光表示板231の前面部には、ジグザグ部分を含む稲妻発光溝部231cが形成されている。左発光表示板231において、主に縦発光部231a、縦発光溝部231b、及び稲妻発光溝部231cを形成している部分が光透過領域となり、それ以外の前面に光遮蔽領域となる黒色のマスク層が形成されている。   Further, a lightning light emitting groove portion 231c including a zigzag portion is formed on the front surface portion of the left light emitting display panel 231. In the left light emitting display panel 231, a black mask layer that mainly forms a vertical light emitting portion 231a, a vertical light emitting groove portion 231b, and a lightning light emitting groove portion 231c is a light transmission region, and a light shielding region on the other front surface. Is formed.

縦縞模様(左)用の10個全てのLED212aを一斉に点灯させると、縦縞模様(左)全体を発光表示させ、縦縞模様(左)用の10個のLED212aを、1番目→2番目・・・→7番目(又は7番目→6番目・・・→1番目)の順番で点灯→消灯させ、それらの切換えを比較的短時間で行うと、光が右側から左側(又は左側から右側)へ走るように、縦縞模様(左)を可変に発光表示させることができる。   When all 10 LEDs 212a for the vertical stripe pattern (left) are turned on at the same time, the entire vertical stripe pattern (left) is displayed in a light-emitting manner, and the 10 LEDs 212a for the vertical stripe pattern (left) are displayed in the first → second order.・ → 7th (or 7th → 6th ... → 1st) turn on → turn off and switch between them in a relatively short time, then light changes from right to left (or from left to right) A vertical stripe pattern (left) can be variably emitted and displayed so as to run.

稲妻模様用の11個全てのLED212b,212c,212dを一斉に点灯させると、稲妻模様全体を発光表示させ、稲妻模様用の11個のLED212b,212c,212dを、右側から左側(又は左側から右側)へ並ぶ順番で点灯→消灯させ、それらの切換えを比較的短時間で行うと、光が右側から左側(又は左側から右側)へ流れるように、稲妻模様を可変に発光表示させることができる。   When all 11 LEDs 212b, 212c, and 212d for the lightning pattern are turned on all at once, the entire lightning pattern is lit and displayed, and the 11 LEDs 212b, 212c, and 212d for the lightning pattern are displayed from the right side to the left side (or from the left side to the right side). When the light is turned on and turned off in the order in which they are arranged, and they are switched in a relatively short time, the lightning pattern can be variably emitted and displayed so that the light flows from the right side to the left side (or from the left side to the right side).

尚、図34に示すように、左発光表示板231の最も右側の231bの縦発光溝部231の右側部分には、稲妻模様に続く稲妻補助模様を形取る多数の微小孔231fが密集状に形成されており、そこに、左発光表示板231の最も右側の231bの縦発光溝部231を介して光が側方から導入されると、多数の微小孔231fによって稲妻補助模様を発光表示させることができる。   As shown in FIG. 34, in the right portion of the vertical light emitting groove portion 231 of the rightmost 231b of the left light emitting display plate 231, a large number of minute holes 231f that form a lightning assist pattern following the lightning pattern are formed in a dense manner. When the light is introduced from the side through the vertical light emitting groove 231 of the rightmost 231b of the left light emitting display plate 231, the lightning assisting pattern can be displayed by light emission by the large number of micro holes 231f. it can.

「右電飾器」
図30、図31、図33、図34、図37に示すように、右電飾器204は、縦縞模様(右)と稲妻エフェクトを可変に発光させ表示させることが可能なものであり、更に、最大で4桁の数字を可変に発光させ表示させることが可能な4つの7セグメント表示器235(以下、「7セグメント」を「7セグ」という)を備えている。
"Right lighting device"
As shown in FIG. 30, FIG. 31, FIG. 33, FIG. 34 and FIG. 37, the right electrical decorator 204 can variably emit and display a vertical stripe pattern (right) and a lightning effect, , Four 7-segment indicators 235 (hereinafter, “7 segments” are referred to as “7 segments”) capable of variably emitting and displaying numbers of up to 4 digits are provided.

右電飾器204は、第1LED基板210の右部前面に実装された縦縞模様(右)用の10個のLED213a、稲妻エフェクト用の2個のLED213b、及び4つの7セグ表示器235の4組(1組が7個)の合計28個のLED213cと、第1LED基板210の右部前側に前後方向に向く略鉛直姿勢で配置された右導光板236、及びその右導光板236の右側に位置する7セグレンズ部材237と、右導光板及236及び7セグレンズ部材237の前側に前後方向に向く略鉛直姿勢で配置された右発光表示板238とを有する。   The right electrical decorator 204 includes 10 LEDs 213a for a vertical stripe pattern (right) mounted on the right front surface of the first LED substrate 210, 2 LEDs 213b for lightning effect, and 4 of 4 7-segment indicators 235. A total of 28 LEDs 213c in a set (7 sets), a right light guide plate 236 arranged in a substantially vertical posture in the front-rear direction on the right front side of the first LED substrate 210, and on the right side of the right light guide plate 236 The 7-segment lens member 237 is positioned, and the right light guide plate 236 and the right light-emitting display plate 238 are disposed on the front side of the 7-segment lens member 237 in a substantially vertical posture in the front-rear direction.

縦縞模様(右)用の10個のLED213aは、全て前方へ発光可能に設けられ、左右方向に7パートに分けて、左側(中央電飾器202側)から右側へ1番目,2番目・・・,7番目となるように配列され、1〜3番目の各々のLED213aの数は上下2個であり、4〜7番目の各々のLED213aの数は1個である。右導光板236には、縦縞模様(右)用の2番目のLED213aに対応する1つの上下方向に細長いスリット236aが前後貫通状に形成され、7セグレンズ部材237には、4〜6番目のLED213aに夫々対応する3つの上下方向に細長いスリット237aが前後貫通状に形成されている。   The 10 LEDs 213a for the vertical stripe pattern (right) are all provided so as to be able to emit light forward, and are divided into 7 parts in the left-right direction, from the left side (the central lighting device 202 side) to the right side. The number of the first to third LEDs 213a is two at the top and the bottom, and the number of the fourth to seventh LEDs 213a is one. The right light guide plate 236 is formed with a vertically elongated slit 236a corresponding to the second LED 213a for the vertical stripe pattern (right) in a front-rear direction, and the fourth to sixth LEDs 213a are formed in the 7-segment lens member 237. Three slits 237a which are elongated in the vertical direction are formed in the front-rear direction.

縦縞模様(右)用の2,4〜6番目のLED213aは4つのスリット236a,237aに夫々収容され、これらLED213aからの光を、殆ど右導光板236や7セグレンズ部材237に導入させないで、前方へ向かわせることができる。また、縦縞模様(右)用の1番目のLED213aは右導光板236の左側に位置し、縦縞模様(右)用の3番目のLED213aは右導光板236と7セグレンズ部材237の間に位置し、縦縞模様(右)用の7番目のLED213aは7セグレンズ部材237の右側に位置し、これらLED213aからの光も、殆ど右導光板236や7セグレンズ部材237に導入させないで、前方へ向かわせることができる。   The second, fourth to sixth LEDs 213a for the vertical stripe pattern (right) are accommodated in the four slits 236a and 237a, respectively, and the light from these LEDs 213a is hardly introduced into the right light guide plate 236 and the 7-segment lens member 237, and forward. Can be headed to. The first LED 213a for the vertical stripe pattern (right) is located on the left side of the right light guide plate 236, and the third LED 213a for the vertical stripe pattern (right) is located between the right light guide plate 236 and the 7-segment lens member 237. The seventh LED 213a for the vertical stripe pattern (right) is located on the right side of the 7-segment lens member 237, and the light from the LED 213a is hardly introduced into the right light guide plate 236 or the 7-segment lens member 237 and is directed forward. Can do.

稲妻エフェクト用の2個のLED213bは、全て上方へ発光可能に設けられ、右導光板236の下端近傍において、左右方向に間隔を空けて配列されている。右導光板236には、稲妻エフェクト用の2個のLED213bに夫々対応する2つの光導入穴236bが前後貫通状に形成されている。稲妻エフェクト用の2個のLED213bは、2つの光導入穴236bに夫々収容され、これらLED213bからの光を、右導光板236にその光導入穴236bに臨む面から導入させることができる。この右導光板236は、稲妻エフェクトを発光表示させる為のバックライトとして機能する。   The two LEDs 213b for the lightning effect are all provided so as to be able to emit light upward, and are arranged at intervals in the left-right direction in the vicinity of the lower end of the right light guide plate 236. In the right light guide plate 236, two light introduction holes 236b respectively corresponding to the two LEDs 213b for the lightning effect are formed to penetrate in the front-rear direction. The two LEDs 213b for the lightning effect are respectively accommodated in the two light introduction holes 236b, and the light from these LEDs 213b can be introduced into the right light guide plate 236 from the surface facing the light introduction hole 236b. The right light guide plate 236 functions as a backlight for displaying the lightning effect by light emission.

右発光表示板238には、その左端部に縦縞模様(右)用の1番目のLED213aに対応する縦発光部238aが設けられ、縦縞模様(右)用の2〜7番目のLED213aに夫々対応する上下方向に細長い6つの縦発光溝部238bが形成されている。各縦発光溝部238bは、その後端部に形成されたレンズ部によって、LED213aから受ける光を上下方向に伸ばして前方へ発光させる。右発光表示板238には、縦発光部238aと左端の縦発光溝部238aとの間に、稲妻エフェクト用の発光板部238cが設けられ、左端の縦発光溝部238bとその右側の縦発光溝部238bとの間に、稲妻エフェクト用の発光開口部238dが形成されている。   The right light emitting display board 238 is provided with a vertical light emitting portion 238a corresponding to the first LED 213a for the vertical stripe pattern (right) at the left end thereof, and corresponds to the second to seventh LEDs 213a for the vertical stripe pattern (right), respectively. Six vertical light emitting grooves 238b that are elongated in the vertical direction are formed. Each vertical light emitting groove 238b extends the light received from the LED 213a in the vertical direction and emits it forward by a lens portion formed at the rear end thereof. The right light emitting display plate 238 is provided with a light emitting plate portion 238c for lightning effect between the vertical light emitting portion 238a and the leftmost vertical light emitting groove portion 238a, and the left end vertical light emitting groove portion 238b and the right vertical light emitting groove portion 238b. , A light emitting opening 238d for lightning effect is formed.

縦縞模様(右)用の10個全てのLED213aを一斉に点灯させると、縦縞模様(右)全体を発光表示させ、縦縞模様(右)用の10個のLED213aを、1番目→2番目・・・→7番目(又は7番目→6番目・・・→1番目)の順番で点灯→消灯させ、それらの切換えを比較的短時間で行うと、光が左側から右側(又は右側から左側)へ走るように、縦縞模様(右)を可変に発光表示させることができる。   When all the ten LEDs 213a for the vertical stripe pattern (right) are turned on all at once, the entire vertical stripe pattern (right) is displayed in a light-emitting manner, and the ten LEDs 213a for the vertical stripe pattern (right) are changed from the first to the second.・ → 7th (or 7th → 6th ... → 1st) turn on → turn off and switch between them in a relatively short time, then the light changes from left to right (or from right to left) A vertical stripe pattern (right) can be variably displayed so as to run.

稲妻エフェクト用の2個全てのLED213bを一斉に点灯させると、稲妻エフェクトを発光表示させ、稲妻エフェクト用の2個のLED213bを、左側から右側(又は右側から左側)へ並ぶ順番で点灯→消灯させ、それらの切換えを比較的短時間で行うと、光が左側から右側(又は右側から左側)へ流れるように、稲妻エフェクトを可変に発光表示させることができる。   When all two LEDs 213b for the lightning effect are turned on at the same time, the lightning effect is displayed in a flashing manner, and the two LEDs 213b for the lightning effect are turned on and off in order from the left side to the right side (or from the right side to the left side). When the switching is performed in a relatively short time, the lightning effect can be variably displayed so that the light flows from the left side to the right side (or from the right side to the left side).

4つの7セグ表示器235は、前記4組(1組が7個)の合計28個のLED213cと、7セグレンズ部材237に形成された4組(1組が7個)の合計28個の7セグレンズ部237bと、右発光表示板238に形成された4組(1組が7個)の合計28個の7セグ発光溝部238eとを有する。尚、7セグレンズ部材237において、縦縞模様(右)用の4〜6番目のLED213aからの光を前方へ向かわせるために、隣合う2組の7セグレンズ部237bの間に1つのスリット237aが形成され、また、右発光表示板238において、各組の7セグ発光溝部238eの左右両側に2つの縦発光溝部238bが形成されている。   The four 7-segment indicators 235 include a total of 28 LEDs 213c of the four groups (one group is seven) and a total of 28 seven of the four groups (one group is seven) formed on the 7-segment lens member 237. It has a segment lens portion 237b and a total of 28 7-segment light emitting groove portions 238e of 4 groups (one set is 7) formed on the right light-emitting display panel 238. In the 7-segment lens member 237, one slit 237a is formed between two adjacent 7-segment lens portions 237b in order to direct the light from the fourth to sixth LEDs 213a for the vertical stripe pattern (right) forward. In the right light emitting display panel 238, two vertical light emitting groove portions 238b are formed on the left and right sides of each set of 7-segment light emitting groove portions 238e.

各7セグ表示器235においては、1組7個のLED213cうちの幾つかのLED213cからの光が、その前側の7セグレンズ部237bによってセグメント毎に拡散透過され、その前側の7セグ発光溝部238bに照射される。その7セグ発光溝部238bは、7セグレンズ部237bから照射されて受ける光をセグメント毎に上下方向又は左右方向に伸ばして前方へ発光させる。   In each 7-segment display 235, light from several LEDs 213c out of a set of 7 LEDs 213c is diffused and transmitted for each segment by the front 7-segment lens portion 237b, and is transmitted to the front 7-segment light emitting groove 238b. Irradiated. The 7-segment light emitting groove 238b extends the light received from the 7-segment lens 237b in the vertical direction or the horizontal direction for each segment and emits light forward.

以上のように構成された4つの7セグ表示器235によって、最大で4桁の任意の数字を発光表示させることができるが、数字以外に、例えば、左側から右側(又は右側から左側)へ動く波動等、種々の形態の表示を行わせることもできる。   The four 7-segment indicators 235 configured as described above can display any number of up to four digits in a light-emitting manner. However, in addition to the numbers, for example, it moves from the left side to the right side (or from the right side to the left side). It is also possible to display various forms such as waves.

尚、右発光表示板238において、主に縦発光部238a、縦発光溝部238b、発光板部238c、発光開口部238d、7セグ発光溝部238eを形成している部分が光透過領域となり、それ以外の前面に光遮蔽領域となる黒色のマスク層が形成されている。   In the right light emitting display plate 238, the portions where the vertical light emitting portion 238a, the vertical light emitting groove portion 238b, the light emitting plate portion 238c, the light emitting opening portion 238d, and the 7-segment light emitting groove portion 238e are mainly formed as a light transmission region. A black mask layer serving as a light shielding region is formed on the front surface of the substrate.

「第1,第2左固定導光板(第1の導光板)」
図24、図25、図28、図33、図34、図38、図39に示すように、第1,第2左固定導光板205,206は、夫々が前後方向に向く略鉛直姿勢で、且つ前後に積層された状態で、左電飾器203の前側に配置されている。
“First and second left fixed light guide plates (first light guide plates)”
As shown in FIGS. 24, 25, 28, 33, 34, 38, and 39, the first and second left fixed light guide plates 205 and 206 are in a substantially vertical posture in which each faces in the front-rear direction. And it is arrange | positioned in the front side of the left electrical ornament 203 in the state laminated | stacked forward and backward.

第1左固定導光板205は、その第1左固定導光板205上に、図38に示す文字模様(第1模様)である「PSYCHO」を9個のLED216a(第1光源216a)により発光させ表示させることが可能なものであり、これら9個のLED216aは、第2LED基板216の上面に実装され、全て上方へ発光可能に設けられ、左右方向に間隔を空けて一列状に配列されている。   The first left fixed light guide plate 205 causes the nine LED 216a (first light source 216a) to emit “PSYCHO” which is the character pattern (first pattern) shown in FIG. 38 on the first left fixed light guide plate 205. These nine LEDs 216a are mounted on the upper surface of the second LED substrate 216, are provided so as to be able to emit light upward, and are arranged in a line at intervals in the left-right direction. .

第1左固定導光板205には、文字模様;「PSYCHO」を形成するレンズカットが施され、9個のLED216aが消灯された状態では、第1左固定導光板205は、単に光を前後に透過可能な透明板となるが、9個のLED216aが点灯されると、それら9個のLED216aからの光が第1左固定導光板205にその下端面から導入され、その光によって文字模様;「PSYCHO」が発光表示される。   The first left fixed light guide plate 205 is subjected to a lens cut to form a character pattern; “PSYCHO”, and the nine left LEDs 216a are turned off. When the nine LEDs 216a are turned on, the light from the nine LEDs 216a is introduced into the first left fixed light guide plate 205 from the lower end surface thereof, and the letter pattern by the light; “PSYCHO” is displayed in a flashing manner.

第2左固定導光板206は、その第2左固定導光板206上に、図39に示す文字模様(第1模様)である「犯罪係数」を9個のLED216b(第1光源216b)により発光させ表示させることが可能なものであり、これら9個のLED216bは、第2LED基板216の上面に9個のLED216aの後側において実装され、全て上方へ発光可能に設けられ、左右方向に間隔を空けて一列状に配列されている。   The second left fixed light guide plate 206 emits “crime coefficient”, which is the character pattern (first pattern) shown in FIG. 39, on the second left fixed light guide plate 206 by nine LEDs 216b (first light source 216b). These nine LEDs 216b are mounted on the upper surface of the second LED substrate 216 on the rear side of the nine LEDs 216a, are all provided to be able to emit light upward, and are spaced apart in the left-right direction. It is arranged in a row with a gap.

第2左固定導光板206には、文字模様;「犯罪係数」を形成するレンズカットが施され、9個のLED216bが消灯された状態では、第2左固定導光板206は、単に光を前後に透過可能な透明板となるが、9個のLED216bが点灯されると、それら9個のLED216bからの光が第2左固定導光板206にその下端面から導入され、その光によって文字模様;「犯罪係数」が発光表示される。   When the second left fixed light guide plate 206 is cut with a lens to form a character pattern; “criminal coefficient” and the nine LEDs 216b are turned off, the second left fixed light guide plate 206 simply passes light back and forth. However, when the nine LEDs 216b are turned on, the light from the nine LEDs 216b is introduced into the second left fixed light guide plate 206 from the lower end surface, and the letter pattern by the light; The “criminal coefficient” is displayed in a flashing manner.

左電飾器203により縦縞模様(左)と稲妻模様が発光表示されていない状態で、第1,第2左固定導光板205,206の文字模様;「PSYCHO」「犯罪係数」を択一的に発光させて鮮明に表示させることができ、第1,第2左固定導光板205,206の文字模様;「PSYCHO」「犯罪係数」が発光表示されていない状態で、左電飾器203により縦縞模様(左)や稲妻模様を発光させて鮮明に表示させることができる。   The character pattern of the first and second left fixed light guide plates 205 and 206; “PSYCHO” and “criminal coefficient” are alternatively selected in a state where the vertical stripe pattern (left) and the lightning pattern are not lit and displayed by the left electrical decorator 203. In the state where the character patterns of the first and second left fixed light guide plates 205 and 206; “PSYCHO” and “criminal coefficient” are not displayed by light emission, Vertical stripes (left) and lightning patterns can be emitted and displayed clearly.

ここで、第1左固定導光板205の下端面には9つの凹部205aが形成され、これら9つの凹部205aに9個のLED216aが夫々近接状に臨むように配置され、また、第2左固定導光板206の下端面には9つの凹部206aが形成され、これら9つの凹部206aに9個のLED216bが夫々近接状に臨むように配置されている。   Here, nine concave portions 205a are formed on the lower end surface of the first left fixed light guide plate 205, and nine LEDs 216a are arranged so as to face each other in the nine concave portions 205a, and the second left fixed light guide plate 205 is also fixed. Nine recesses 206a are formed on the lower end surface of the light guide plate 206, and nine LEDs 216b are arranged so as to face each other in the nine recesses 206a.

つまり、これら凹部205a,206aによって、第1,第2左固定導光板205,206に対して第2LED基板216を接近させた位置に配置することが可能になり、また、第1左固定導光板205に9個のLED216aからの光を効率良く導入して文字模様;「PSYCHO」へ分散させ導くこと、即ち文字模様;「PSYCHO」の発光輝度を高めることが可能になり、第2左固定導光板206に9個のLED216bからの光を効率良く導入して文字模様;「犯罪係数」へ分散させ導くこと、即ち文字模様;「犯罪係数」の発光輝度を高めることが可能になる。   That is, the recesses 205a and 206a allow the second LED substrate 216 to be disposed close to the first and second left fixed light guide plates 205 and 206, and the first left fixed light guide plate. It is possible to efficiently introduce light from nine LEDs 216a into 205 and disperse and guide it to the character pattern; “PSYCHO”, that is, to increase the light emission luminance of the character pattern; “PSYCHO”. The light from the nine LEDs 216b can be efficiently introduced into the light plate 206 to be dispersed and guided to the character pattern; “crime coefficient”, that is, the light emission luminance of the character pattern; “crime coefficient” can be increased.

「右固定導光板(第1の導光板)」
図24、図25、図28、図33、図34、図40に示すように、右固定導光板207は、前後方向に向く略鉛直姿勢で、右電飾器の前側に配置されている。右固定導光板207は、その右固定導光板207上に、図40に示す文字模様(第1模様)である「−PASS」を9個のLED217a(第1光源217a)により発光させ表示させることが可能なものであり、これら9個のLED217aは、第3LED基板217の上面に実装され、全て上方へ発光可能に設けられ、左右方向に間隔を空けて一列状に配列されている。
"Right fixed light guide plate (first light guide plate)"
As shown in FIGS. 24, 25, 28, 33, 34, and 40, the right fixed light guide plate 207 is disposed on the front side of the right electrical ornament in a substantially vertical posture facing the front-rear direction. The right fixed light guide plate 207 causes the nine LED 217a (first light source 217a) to emit light and display the character pattern (first pattern) shown in FIG. 40 on the right fixed light guide plate 207. These nine LEDs 217a are mounted on the upper surface of the third LED substrate 217, are all provided so as to be able to emit light upward, and are arranged in a line at intervals in the left-right direction. As shown in FIGS. 24, 25, 28, 33, 34, and 40, the right fixed light guide plate 207 is disposed on the front side of the right electrical ornament in a substantially vertical posture facing the front-rear direction. The right fixed light guide plate 207 causes the nine LEDs 217a (first light source 217a) to emit light and display the character pattern (first pattern) shown in FIG. 40 on the right fixed light guide plate 207. These nine LEDs 217a are mounted on the upper surface of the third LED substrate 217, are all provided so as to be able to emit light upward, and are arranged in a line at intervals in the left-right direction.

右固定導光板207には、文字模様;「−PASS」を形成するレンズカットが施され、9個のLED217aが消灯された状態では、右固定導光板207は、単に光を前後に透過可能な透明板となるが、9個のLED217aが点灯されると、それら9個のLED217aからの光が右固定導光板207にその下端面から導入され、その光によって文字模様;「−PASS」が発光表示される。   When the right fixed light guide plate 207 is cut with a lens to form a character pattern; “-PASS” and the nine LEDs 217a are turned off, the right fixed light guide plate 207 can simply transmit light back and forth. When the nine LEDs 217a are turned on, the light from the nine LEDs 217a is introduced into the right fixed light guide plate 207 from the lower end surface, and the light pattern “-PASS” is emitted by the light. Is displayed.

右電飾器204により縦縞模様(右)と稲妻エフェクト、及び4つの7セグ表示器235が発光表示されていない状態で、右固定導光板207の文字模様;「−PASS」を発光させて鮮明に表示させることができ、右固定導光板207の文字模様;「−PASS」が発光表示されていない状態で、右電飾器204により縦縞模様(右)と稲妻エフェクトを、また7セグ表示器235を発光させて鮮明に発光させることができる。   With the right electrical decorator 204, the vertical stripe pattern (right), lightning effect, and the four 7-segment display 235 are not lit and displayed, and the character pattern of the right fixed light guide plate 207; The right fixed light guide plate 207; the character pattern of the right fixed light guide plate 207; “-PASS” is not light-emitting and displayed, and the right lighting device 204 displays the vertical stripe pattern (right) and the lightning effect, and also the 7-segment display. 235 can emit light and emit light clearly.

ここで、右固定導光板207の下端面には9つの凹部207aが形成され、これら9つの凹部207aに9個のLED217aが夫々近接状に臨むように配置されている。つまり、これら凹部207aによって、右固定導光板207に対して第3LED基板217を接近させた位置に配置することが可能になり、また、右固定導光板207に9個のLED217aからの光を効率良く導入して文字模様;「−PASS」へ分散させ導くこと、即ち文字模様;「−PASS」の発光輝度を高めることが可能になる。   Here, nine concave portions 207a are formed on the lower end surface of the right fixed light guide plate 207, and nine LEDs 217a are arranged in the nine concave portions 207a so as to face each other. That is, it is possible to arrange the third LED substrate 217 closer to the right fixed light guide plate 207 by these concave portions 207a, and efficiently transmit the light from the nine LEDs 217a to the right fixed light guide plate 207. It is possible to increase the light emission luminance of the character pattern “-PASS” by introducing it well and dispersing it into the character pattern “-PASS”.

「1対の第1可動導光板」
図24、図25、図27〜図32、図41〜図51に示すように、1対の第1可動導光板208は、前後方向に向く略鉛直姿勢で左右対称に形成され且つ配置され、前記のように、第2駆動手段218により、一体的に第1退避位置(図46)と第1進出位置(図47)とにわたって上下方向へ移動駆動されるとともに、夫々の第1可動導光板208上に文字模様(第2模様)である「WARNING」を20個のLED214a,214b(第2光源214a,214b)により発光させ表示させることが可能なものである。
"A pair of first movable light guide plates"
As shown in FIGS. 24, 25, 27 to 32, and 41 to 51, the pair of first movable light guide plates 208 are formed and arranged symmetrically in a substantially vertical posture in the front-rear direction, As described above, the second drive means 218 is integrally driven to move up and down across the first retracted position (FIG. 46) and the first advanced position (FIG. 47), and each first movable light guide plate. “WARNING” which is a character pattern (second pattern) on 208 can be emitted and displayed by 20 LEDs 214a and 214b (second light sources 214a and 214b). As shown in FIGS. 24, 25, 27 to 32, and 41 to 51, the pair of first movable light guide plates 208 are formed and arranged symmetrically in a substantially vertical posture in the front-rear direction, As described above, the second drive means 218 is driven to move up and down across the first retracted position (FIG. 46) and the first advanced position (FIG. 47), and each first movable light guide plate. “WARNING” which is a character pattern (second) pattern) on 208 can be emitted and displayed by 20 LEDs 214a and 214b (second light sources 214a and 214b).

1対の第1可動導光板208は、第1退避位置にあるときに、それらの大部分が可動役物部材201の1対の第1収容空間201aに収容され、つまり可動役物部材201に隠れた状態になり、左側の第1可動導光板208と第1,第2左固定導光板205,206が、また、右側の第1可動導光板208と右固定導光板207が、夫々第1LED基板110を挟んで前後に位置する状態になる。1対の第1可動導光板208は、第1進出位置にあるときに、その大部分が可動役物部材201の1対の第1収容空間201aから上方へ突出し、つまり可動役物部材201から現れた状態になる。   When the pair of first movable light guide plates 208 are in the first retracted position, most of them are accommodated in the pair of first accommodation spaces 201 a of the movable accessory member 201, that is, in the movable accessory member 201. The left first movable light guide plate 208 and the first and second left fixed light guide plates 205 and 206, and the right first movable light guide plate 208 and the right fixed light guide plate 207 are the first LEDs. It will be in the state located in the front-back direction on both sides of the board | substrate 110. FIG. When the pair of first movable light guide plates 208 are in the first advanced position, most of the pair of first movable light guide plates 208 protrude upward from the pair of first accommodation spaces 201a of the movable accessory member 201, that is, from the movable accessory member 201. It will appear.

可動役物部材201には、第1LED基板210が取付けられ、つまり第1LED基板210に実装された20個のLED214a,214bが全て固定的に且つ後方へ発光可能に設けられ、1対の第1可動導光板208は第1LED基板210よりも後方に配置されて、第2駆動手段218により上下方向へ移動駆動されるが、その第2駆動手段218により移動駆動される1対の第1可動導光板208の文字模様;「WARNING」を発光可能に、1対の第1可動導光板208に20個のLED214a,214bからの光を導入する第1光導入構造240が設けられている。   The movable accessory member 201 is provided with the first LED board 210, that is, all the 20 LEDs 214a and 214b mounted on the first LED board 210 are fixedly provided so as to be able to emit light rearward. The movable light guide plate 208 is disposed behind the first LED substrate 210 and is moved up and down by the second driving means 218. The pair of first movable guides moved and driven by the second driving means 218. The first light introduction structure 240 for introducing the light from the 20 LEDs 214a and 214b into the pair of first movable light guide plates 208 is provided so that the character pattern of the light plate 208 can emit light “WARNING”.

第1光導入構造240は、各第1可動導光板208に対して5個のLED214a、及び5個のLED214bを設け、図49〜図51に示すように、各第1可動導光板208の下端部に、上方ほど後方へ移行するように上下方向から45度傾斜した傾斜面208aを形成し、第1可動導光板208が第1退避位置にあるときには5個のLED214aからの光を、また、第1進出位置にあるときには5個のLED214bからの光を、夫々各第1可動導光板208に導入して、文字模様;「WARNING」を発光可能に構成されている。   The first light introduction structure 240 is provided with five LEDs 214a and five LEDs 214b for each first movable light guide plate 208. As shown in FIGS. 49 to 51, the lower end of each first movable light guide plate 208 is provided. An inclined surface 208a that is inclined 45 degrees from the vertical direction so as to move backward as it moves upward is formed on the part, and when the first movable light guide plate 208 is in the first retracted position, the light from the five LEDs 214a When in the first advanced position, the light from the five LEDs 214b is introduced into each first movable light guide plate 208 to emit the character pattern “WARNING”.

つまり、5個のLED214a、及び5個のLED214bは、夫々上下方向の位置を異ならせて、左右方向に間隔を空けて一列状に配列され、図51(1)に示すように、第1可動導光板208が第1退避位置にあるときには、5個のLED214aから後方へ向かう光が、また、図51(2)に示すように、第1可動導光板208が第1進出位置にあるときには、5個のLED214bから後方へ向かう光が、夫々各第1可動導光板208にその下端部分の前面から垂直に入射されて、傾斜面208aにより上方(つまり、文字模様;「WARNING」へ向かう方向)へ反射される。   That is, the five LEDs 214a and the five LEDs 214b are arranged in a line at different positions in the vertical direction and spaced in the horizontal direction. As shown in FIG. 51 (1), the first movable When the light guide plate 208 is in the first retracted position, the light traveling backward from the five LEDs 214a, and as shown in FIG. 51 (2), when the first movable light guide plate 208 is in the first advanced position, Light directed backward from the five LEDs 214b is vertically incident on each first movable light guide plate 208 from the front surface of the lower end portion thereof, and is upward (that is, a character pattern; a direction toward “WARNING”) by the inclined surface 208a. Reflected to.

「1対の第2可動導光板」
図24、図26、図27、図41、図44〜図48、図52〜図54に示すように、1対の第2可動導光板209は、前後方向に向く略鉛直姿勢で左右対称に形成され且つ配置され、また1対の第1可動導光板208と上下対称に形成され且つ配置され、前記のように、第2駆動手段218により、一体的に第2退避位置(図47)と第2進出位置(図48)とにわたって上下方向へ移動駆動されるとともに、夫々の第2可動導光板209上に文字模様(第2模様)である「WARNING」を18個のLED215a,215b(第2光源215a,215b)により発光させ表示させることが可能なものである。 As shown in FIGS. 24, 26, 27, 41, 44 to 48, and 52 to 54, the pair of second movable light guide plates 209 are symmetrical in a substantially vertical posture facing in the front-rear direction. It is formed and arranged, and is formed and arranged vertically symmetrically with the pair of the first movable light guide plates 208, and as described above, is integrally with the second retracted position (FIG. 47) by the second driving means 218. 18 LEDs 215a, 215b (second pattern) have a character pattern (second pattern) "WARNING" on each of the second movable light guide plates 209 while being driven to move in the vertical direction over the second advance position (FIG. 48). The two light sources 215a and 215b) can be used to emit light and display. “A pair of second movable light guide plates” “A pair of second movable light guide plates”
As shown in FIGS. 24, 26, 27, 41, 44 to 48, and 52 to 54, the pair of second movable light guide plates 209 are symmetrical in a substantially vertical posture facing the front-rear direction. It is formed and arranged, and is formed and arranged symmetrically with the pair of first movable light guide plates 208. As described above, the second driving means 218 integrally forms the second retracted position (FIG. 47). It is driven to move in the vertical direction across the second advance position (FIG. 48), and “WARNING” which is a character pattern (second pattern) is placed on each of the second movable light guide plates 209 with 18 LEDs 215a, 215b (first Two light sources 215a and 215b) can emit light and display them. As shown in FIGS. 24, 26, 27, 41, 44 to 48, and 52 to 54, the pair of second movable light guide plates 209 are symmetrical in a substantially vertical posture facing the front-rear direction. It is formed and arranged. , and is formed and arranged symmetrically with the pair of first movable light guide plates 208. As described above, the second driving means 218 therefore forms the second retracted position (FIG. 47). It is driven to move in the vertical direction across the second advance position (FIG. 48), and “WARNING” which is a character pattern (second pattern) is placed on each of the second movable light guide plates 209 with 18 LEDs 215a, 215b (first Two light sources 215a and 215b) can emit light and display them.

1対の第2可動導光板209は、第2退避位置にあるときに、それらの大部分が可動役物部材201の1対の第2収容空間201bに収容され、つまり可動役物部材201に隠れた状態になり、左側の第2可動導光板209と第1,第2左固定導光板205,206が、また、右側の第2可動導光板209と右固定導光板207が、夫々第1基板110を挟んで前後に位置する状態になる。1対の第2可動導光板209は、第2進出位置にあるときに、その大部分が可動役物部材201の1対の第2収容空間201bから下方へ突出し、つまり可動役物部材201から現れた状態になる。   When the pair of second movable light guide plates 209 are in the second retracted position, most of them are accommodated in the pair of second accommodation spaces 201b of the movable accessory member 201, that is, in the movable accessory member 201. The left second movable light guide plate 209 and the first and second left fixed light guide plates 205 and 206, and the right second movable light guide plate 209 and the right fixed light guide plate 207, respectively, are hidden. It will be in the state located in the front-back direction on both sides of the board | substrate 110. FIG. When the pair of second movable light guide plates 209 is in the second advanced position, most of the pair of second movable light guide plates 209 protrudes downward from the pair of second accommodation spaces 201b of the movable accessory member 201, that is, from the movable accessory member 201. It will appear.

可動役物部材201には、第1LED基板210に実装された18個のLED215a,215bが全て固定的に且つ後方へ発光可能に設けられ、1対の第2可動導光板209は第1LED基板210よりも後方に配置されて、第2駆動手段218により上下方向へ移動駆動されるが、その第2駆動手段218により移動駆動される1対の第2可動導光板209の文字模様;「WARNING」を発光可能に、1対の第2可動導光板209に18個のLED215a,215bからの光を導入する第2光導入構造245が設けられている。   The movable accessory member 201 is provided with all of the 18 LEDs 215a and 215b mounted on the first LED substrate 210 so as to be fixed and capable of emitting light backward, and the pair of second movable light guide plates 209 includes the first LED substrate 210. The character pattern of the pair of second movable light guide plates 209, which are arranged rearward and driven to move up and down by the second driving means 218, but are driven to move by the second driving means 218; "WARNING" Is provided with a second light introduction structure 245 that introduces light from the 18 LEDs 215a and 215b into the pair of second movable light guide plates 209.

第2光導入構造245は、各第2可動導光板209に対して4個のLED215a、及び5個のLED215bを設け、図52〜図54に示すように、各第2可動導光板209の上端部に、下方ほど後方へ移行するように上下方向から45度傾斜した傾斜面209aを形成し、第2可動導光板209が第2退避位置にあるときには4個のLED215aからの光を、また、第2進出位置にあるときには5個のLED215bからの光を、夫々各第2可動導光板209に導入して、文字模様;「WARNING」を発光可能に構成されている。   The second light introduction structure 245 includes four LEDs 215a and five LEDs 215b for each second movable light guide plate 209, and as shown in FIGS. 52 to 54, the upper end of each second movable light guide plate 209. In the part, an inclined surface 209a inclined 45 degrees from the vertical direction is formed so as to move backward as it goes downward, and when the second movable light guide plate 209 is in the second retracted position, the light from the four LEDs 215a, When in the second advanced position, the light from the five LEDs 215b is introduced into each of the second movable light guide plates 209 so that the character pattern “WARNING” can be emitted.

つまり、4個のLED215a、及び5個のLED215bは、夫々上下方向の位置を異ならせて、左右方向に間隔を空けて一列状に配列され、図55(1)に示すように、第2可動導光板209が第2退避位置にあるときには、4個のLED215aから後方へ向かう光が、また、図55(2)に示すように、第2可動導光板209が第2進出位置にあるときには、5個のLED215bから後方へ向かう光が、夫々各第2可動導光板209にその上端部分の前面から垂直に入射されて、傾斜面209aにより上方(つまり、文字模様;「WARNING」へ向かう方向)へ反射される。   That is, the four LEDs 215a and the five LEDs 215b are arranged in a line at different positions in the vertical direction and spaced in the horizontal direction, as shown in FIG. 55 (1). When the light guide plate 209 is in the second retracted position, the light traveling backward from the four LEDs 215a, and as shown in FIG. 55 (2), when the second movable light guide plate 209 is in the second advanced position, Light directed backward from the five LEDs 215b is vertically incident on each second movable light guide plate 209 from the front surface of the upper end portion thereof, and is upward (that is, a character pattern; a direction toward “WARNING”) by the inclined surface 209a. Reflected to.

ここで、可動バー役物8、つまり可動役物部材201が下待機位置にあるときに、第2可動導光板209が第2退避位置から第2進出位置へ移動すると静止側部材249と干渉する位置にある(図46、図47)。   Here, when the movable bar accessory 8, that is, the movable accessory member 201 is in the lower standby position, if the second movable light guide plate 209 moves from the second retracted position to the second advanced position, it interferes with the stationary member 249. In position (FIGS. 46 and 47).

尚、第1,第2可動導光板208,209に夫々形成される文字模様;「WARNING」については、第1左固定導光板205の文字模様;「PSYCHO」等同様に、文字模様;「WARNING」を形成するレンズカットが施されているが、更に、その文字模様;「WARNING」の輪郭部分に深い溝が形成され、その輪郭内側に多数の凹凸線(横凹凸線)が形成されるとともに、その輪郭内側が半透明色(例えば、薄い赤色)に着色されている。   Note that the character pattern formed on each of the first and second movable light guide plates 208 and 209; “WARNING” is the same as the character pattern of the first left fixed light guide plate 205; “PSYCHO” and the like; “WARNING” In addition, a deep groove is formed in the outline portion of the character pattern; “WARNING”, and a number of uneven lines (lateral uneven lines) are formed inside the outline. The inner side of the outline is colored in a translucent color (for example, light red).

これにより、第1,第2可動導光板208,209が第1,第2進出位置にあるとき、第1,第2可動導光板208,209を通して、画像表示器7の画面7a(各種映像)が見える状態になるが、その状況下で、LED214b,215bを点灯させて、文字模様;「WARNING」を明瞭に発光表示させることができる。   Thus, when the first and second movable light guide plates 208 and 209 are in the first and second advanced positions, the screen 7a (various videos) of the image display 7 is passed through the first and second movable light guide plates 208 and 209. Under such circumstances, the LEDs 214b and 215b can be turned on to clearly display the character pattern “WARNING”.

「第2駆動手段」
図27、図29、図42〜図48に示すように、第2駆動手段218は、可動役物部材201の第2可動ベース221に装備されて、可動役物部材201に対して1対の第1可動導光板208を一体的に第1退避位置(図46)と第1進出位置(図47)とにわたって上下方向へ進退移動させ、1対の第2可動導光板209を一体的に第2退避位置(図47)と第2進出位置(図48)とにわたって上下方向へ進退移動させる。
"Second drive means"
As shown in FIGS. 27, 29, and 42 to 48, the second driving means 218 is mounted on the second movable base 221 of the movable accessory member 201 and is paired with the movable accessory member 201. The first movable light guide plate 208 is integrally moved forward and backward in the vertical direction across the first retracted position (FIG. 46) and the first advanced position (FIG. 47), and the pair of second movable light guide plates 209 are integrally formed. 2. Moves forward and backward in the vertical direction across the retracted position (FIG. 47) and the second advanced position (FIG. 48). As shown in FIGS. 27, 29, and 42 to 48, the second driving means 218 is mounted on the second movable base 221 of the movable accessory member 201 and is paired with the movable accessory member 201. The first movable light guide plate 208 2. Moves forward and backward in the vertical direction across the first retracted position (FIG. 46) and the first advanced position (FIG. 47), and the pair of second movable light guide plates 209 are formed. backward in the vertical direction across the retracted position (FIG. 47) and the second advanced position (FIG. 48).

ここで、1対の第1可動導光板208、及び1対の第2可動導光板209は、第2可動ベース221の前側に配置されているが、図43〜図45に示すように、第2可動ベース221に1対の第1可動導光板208を夫々上下方向へ移動自在にガイドする1対の第1ガイド機構250と、第2可動ベース221に1対の第2可動導光板209を夫々上下方向へ移動自在にガイドする1対の第2ガイド機構255が設けられている。   Here, the pair of first movable light guide plates 208 and the pair of second movable light guide plates 209 are disposed on the front side of the second movable base 221, but as shown in FIGS. Two pairs of first movable light guide plates 208 are guided on the two movable bases 221 so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and a pair of second movable light guide plates 209 are arranged on the second movable base 221. A pair of second guide mechanisms 255 are provided to guide each of them so as to be movable in the vertical direction.

各第1ガイド機構250は、第1可動導光板208の下端部に固定された第1連結バー251(図49、図50)と、第1連結バー251に後方突出状に設けられた左右1対の第1鍔付きコロ252と、第2可動ベース221に1対の第1鍔付きコロ252が移動自在に係合するように形成された左右1対の上下方向に長い第1ガイドスリット253とを有する。   Each first guide mechanism 250 includes a first connecting bar 251 (FIGS. 49 and 50) fixed to the lower end of the first movable light guide plate 208, and left and right 1 provided on the first connecting bar 251 so as to protrude rearward. A pair of first roller 252 with a pair of flanges, and a pair of left and right first guide slits 253 formed so that the pair of first roller 252 with the first flange is movably engaged with the second movable base 221. And have.

各第2ガイド機構255は、第2可動導光板209の上端部に固定された第2連結バー256(図52、図53)と、第2連結部材256に後方突出状に設けられた左右1対の第2鍔付きコロ257と、第2可動ベース221に1対の第2鍔付きコロ257が移動自在に係合するように形成された左右1対の上下方向に長い第2ガイドスリット258とを有する。   Each of the second guide mechanisms 255 includes a second connecting bar 256 (FIGS. 52 and 53) fixed to the upper end portion of the second movable light guide plate 209, and left and right 1 provided on the second connecting member 256 so as to protrude rearward. A pair of second flanges 257 and a pair of second flanges 257 formed so that the second movable roller 257 is movably engaged with the second movable base 221 and a pair of left and right second guide slits 258 that are long in the vertical direction. And have.

また、左側の第1,第2可動導光板208,209は、それらの左端部分が、第2可動ベース221の左部と、そこに前側から固定された挟持部材259aとの間にスライド自在に挟持され、右側の第1,第2可動導光板208,209は、それらの右端部分が、第2可動ベース221の右部と、そこに前側から固定された挟持部材259bとの間にスライド自在に挟持されている。   Further, the left and first movable light guide plates 208 and 209 on the left side are slidable between the left portion of the second movable base 221 and the clamping member 259a fixed to the front from the left side of the second movable base 221. The right and first movable light guide plates 208 and 209 on the right side are slidable between the right part of the second movable base 221 and the clamping member 259b fixed to the right side of the second movable base 221 from the front side. Is sandwiched between.

第2駆動手段218は、1の電動モータ261を有し、その1の電動モータ261により、1対の第2可動役物209を第2退避位置に停止させた状態で、1対の第1可動役物208を第1退避位置と第1進出位置とにわたって進退移動させ、1対の第1可動役物208を第1進出位置に停止させた状態で、1対の第2可動役物209を第2退避位置と第2進出位置とにわたって進退移動させる差動機構260を有する。   The second driving means 218 has one electric motor 261, and the pair of first movable motors 209 is stopped at the second retracted position by the one electric motor 261. The movable combination 208 is moved forward and backward between the first retracted position and the first advanced position, and the pair of first movable combinations 208 is stopped at the first advanced position. Has a differential mechanism 260 that moves forward and backward between the second retracted position and the second advanced position.

この第2駆動手段218は、第2可動ベース221に取付けられた電動モータ261と、第2可動ベース221に左右方向へ移動自在に装着されたスライド板262と、電動モータ261によりスライド板262を左右方向へ移動させるピニオン263a及びラック263bとを有し、差動機構260によって、1対の第2可動役物209を第2退避位置に停止させて、スライド板262の左右方向の移動を1対の第1可動役物208の上下方向の移動に変換し、1対の第1可動役物208を第1進出位置に停止させて、スライド板262の左右方向の移動を1対の第2可動役物209の上下方向の移動に変換する。   The second driving means 218 includes an electric motor 261 attached to the second movable base 221, a slide plate 262 mounted on the second movable base 221 so as to be movable in the left-right direction, and the electric motor 261 moving the slide plate 262. It has a pinion 263a and a rack 263b that move in the left-right direction, and the differential mechanism 260 stops the pair of second movable accessories 209 at the second retracted position, thereby moving the slide plate 262 in the left-right direction. The pair of first movable combination 208 is converted into a vertical movement, the pair of first movable combination 208 is stopped at the first advance position, and the movement of the slide plate 262 in the left-right direction is a pair of second movements. This is converted into a vertical movement of the movable accessory 209.

電動モータ261は、後向き姿勢で、第2可動ベース221の中央部分に形成された収容穴221aに収容された状態で、2つのモータ取付部材261a,261bによって第2可動ベース221に取付けられている。この電動モータ261の出力軸にピニオン263aが固着されている。   The electric motor 261 is attached to the second movable base 221 by the two motor attachment members 261a and 261b in a rearward posture and accommodated in the accommodation hole 221a formed in the central portion of the second movable base 221. . A pinion 263 a is fixed to the output shaft of the electric motor 261.

スライド板262は、第2可動ベース221よりも少しサイズが小さな左右方向に細長い略矩形状に形成され、第2可動ベース221の後側に配置されて、第2可動ベース221に左右方向へ移動自在にガイド支持されている。このスライド板262にピニオン263aが噛合するラック63bが形成されている。   The slide plate 262 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape that is slightly smaller in size in the left-right direction than the second movable base 221, and is disposed on the rear side of the second movable base 221, and moves to the second movable base 221 in the left-right direction. The guide is supported freely. A rack 63b with which the pinion 263a meshes with the slide plate 262 is formed.

スライド板262を第2可動ベース221にガイド支持するために、スライド板262には、3つ左右方向に長い係合スリット264a,265a,266aが形成され、第2可動ベース221には、3つの係合スリット264a,265a,266aが夫々移動自在に係合するガイドピン264b,265b,266bが後方突出状に設けられ、また、スライド板262が、ベースカバー222(図25〜図27、図29)により第2可動ベース221に移動可能に押えられている。   In order to guide and support the slide plate 262 on the second movable base 221, the slide plate 262 has three engagement slits 264a, 265a, 266a that are long in the left-right direction, and the second movable base 221 has three engagement slits. Guide pins 264b, 265b, 266b with which the engagement slits 264a, 265a, 266a are movably engaged are provided so as to protrude rearward, and the slide plate 262 is provided with the base cover 222 (FIGS. 25-27, 29). ) To the second movable base 221 so as to be movable.

差動機構260は、1対の第1可動導光板208の合計4つの第1鍔付きコロ252の後端側に夫々設けられた4つの第1被案内軸270と、これら4つの第1被案内軸270が夫々移動自在に係合するようにスライド板262に形成された4つの第1案内スリット271と、1対の第2可動導光板209の合計4つの第2鍔付きコロ257の後端側に夫々設けられた4つの第2被案内軸272と、これら4つの第2被案内軸272が夫々移動自在に係合するようにスライド板262に形成された4つの第2案内スリット273とを有する。   The differential mechanism 260 includes four first guided shafts 270 provided on the rear end side of a total of four first flanges 252 of the pair of first movable light guide plates 208, and the four first guided shafts 270. A total of four second flanged rollers 257 including four first guide slits 271 formed in the slide plate 262 so that the guide shafts 270 are movably engaged with each other and a pair of second movable light guide plates 209, respectively. Four second guided shafts 272 respectively provided on the end side, and four second guide slits 273 formed in the slide plate 262 so that these four second guided shafts 272 are movably engaged with each other. And have.

4つの第1案内スリット271は同形状に形成され、左側の第1可動導光板208の2つの第1被案内軸270に対応する2つの第1案内スリット271は、それら2つの第1被案内軸270の間隔と同間隔空けて配設され、また、右側の第1可動導光板208の2つの第1被案内軸270に対応する2つの第1案内スリット271は、それら2つの第1被案内軸270の間隔と同間隔空けて配設されている。   The four first guide slits 271 are formed in the same shape, and the two first guide slits 271 corresponding to the two first guided shafts 270 of the left first movable light guide plate 208 are the two first guided slits. The two first guide slits 271 corresponding to the two first guided shafts 270 of the first movable light guide plate 208 on the right side are arranged at the same interval as the interval between the shafts 270. The guide shafts 270 are arranged at the same interval as the guide shaft 270.

各第1案内スリット271は、その左端側から右方ほど上方へ移行するように傾斜状に延びる傾斜スリット271aと、傾斜スリット271aの右端側から右方へ水平に延びる水平スリット271bとを有する。   Each first guide slit 271 includes an inclined slit 271a extending in an inclined manner so as to move upward from the left end side to the right side, and a horizontal slit 271b extending horizontally from the right end side of the inclined slit 271a to the right side.

4つの第2案内スリット273は同形状に形成され、左側の第2可動導光板209の2つの第2被案内軸272に対応する2つの第2案内スリット273は、それら2つの第2被案内軸272の間隔と同間隔空けて配設され、また、右側の第2可動導光板209の2つの第2被案内軸272に対応する2つの第2案内スリット273は、それら2つの第2被案内軸272の間隔と同間隔空けて配設されている。   The four second guide slits 273 are formed in the same shape, and the two second guide slits 273 corresponding to the two second guided shafts 272 of the second movable light guide plate 209 on the left side are the two second guided slits. Two second guide slits 273 corresponding to the two second guided shafts 272 of the second movable light guide plate 209 on the right side are arranged at the same interval as the interval between the shafts 272, and the two second guided slits are provided. The guide shafts 272 are arranged at the same interval as that of the guide shaft 272.

各第2案内スリット273は、その左端側から右方へ水平に延びる水平スリット273aと、水平スリット273aの右端側から右方ほど下方へ移行するように傾斜状に延びる傾斜スリット273bとを有する。   Each second guide slit 273 has a horizontal slit 273a extending horizontally from the left end side to the right side, and an inclined slit 273b extending in an inclined manner so as to move downward from the right end side of the horizontal slit 273a toward the right side.

図46は、4つの第1被案内軸270が4つの第1案内スリット271の傾斜スリット271aの左端側に夫々係合し、4つの第2被案内軸272が4つの第2案内スリット273の水平スリット273aの左端に夫々係合している状態を示し、このとき、1対の第1可動導光板208が第1退避位置に、1対の第2可動導光板209が第2退避位置に位置し、スライド板262が原点位置(右限位置)になる。   46, the four first guided shafts 270 engage with the left end sides of the inclined slits 271a of the four first guide slits 271 respectively, and the four second guided shafts 272 have the four second guide slits 273. The state in which the left end of the horizontal slit 273a is engaged is shown. At this time, the pair of first movable light guide plates 208 is in the first retracted position, and the pair of second movable light guide plates 209 is in the second retracted position. The slide plate 262 becomes the origin position (right limit position).

図47は、4つの第1被案内軸270が4つの第1案内スリット271の水平スリット271bに夫々係合し、4つの第2被案内軸272が4つの第2案内スリット273の水平スリット273aと傾斜スリット273bとの境界に夫々係合している状態を示し、このとき、1対の第1可動導光板208が第1進出位置に、1対の第2可動導光板209が第2退避位置に位置し、スライド板262は動作切換位置になる。   47, the four first guided shafts 270 engage with the horizontal slits 271b of the four first guide slits 271, respectively, and the four second guided shafts 272 have the horizontal slits 273a of the four second guide slits 273. And a pair of first movable light guide plates 208 at the first advancing position, and a pair of second movable light guide plates 209 at the second retracted position. The slide plate 262 is in the operation switching position.

図48は、4つの第1被案内軸270が4つの第1案内スリット271の水平スリット271bの右端に夫々係合し、4つの第2被案内軸272が4つの第2案内スリット273の傾斜スリット273bの右端側に夫々係合している状態を示し、このとき、1対の第1可動導光板208が第1進出位置に、1対の第2可動導光板209が第2進出位置に位置し、スライド板262が左限位置になる。   48, the four first guided shafts 270 engage with the right ends of the horizontal slits 271b of the four first guide slits 271, respectively, and the four second guided shafts 272 are inclined by the four second guide slits 273. A state in which the slits 273b are respectively engaged with the right end side is shown. At this time, the pair of first movable light guide plates 208 is in the first advanced position, and the pair of second movable light guide plates 209 is in the second advanced position. And the slide plate 262 is in the left limit position.

スライド板262が図46に示す原点位置と図47に示す動作切換位置間を左右方向へ移動しているとき、第2被案内軸272が水平スリット273aに係合しているので、第2可動役物209が第2退避位置に停止し、第1被案内軸270が傾斜スリット271aに係合していると、その傾斜スリット271aの案内作用により第1可動役物208が上下方向へ移動する。   When the slide plate 262 moves in the left-right direction between the origin position shown in FIG. 46 and the operation switching position shown in FIG. 47, the second guided shaft 272 is engaged with the horizontal slit 273a. When the accessory 209 stops at the second retracted position and the first guided shaft 270 is engaged with the inclined slit 271a, the first movable accessory 208 moves up and down by the guide action of the inclined slit 271a. .

また、スライド板262が図47に示す動作切換位置と図48に示す左限位置間を左右方向へ移動しているとき、第1被案内軸270が水平スリット271aに係合しているので、第1可動役物208が第1進出位置に停止し、第2被案内軸272が傾斜スリット273bに係合していると、その傾斜スリット273bによる案内作用により第2可動役物209が上下方向へ移動する。   Further, when the slide plate 262 moves in the left-right direction between the operation switching position shown in FIG. 47 and the left limit position shown in FIG. 48, the first guided shaft 270 is engaged with the horizontal slit 271a. When the first movable accessory 208 stops at the first advance position and the second guided shaft 272 is engaged with the inclined slit 273b, the second movable accessory 209 is moved in the vertical direction by the guiding action of the inclined slit 273b. Move to.

ここで、1対の第1可動導光板208は、第1退避位置のときに可動役物部材201から上方へ少し突出した状態になり、また、1対の第2可動導光板209は、第2退避位置のときに可動役物部材201から下方へ少し突出した状態になるが、それらの突出量は、1対の第1可動導光板208よりも1対の第2可動導光板209の方が小さい。   Here, the pair of first movable light guide plates 208 is in a state of slightly protruding upward from the movable accessory member 201 when in the first retracted position, and the pair of second movable light guide plates 209 is Although it is in a state of slightly projecting downward from the movable accessory member 201 at the time of the two retracted positions, the amount of the projection is more for the pair of second movable light guide plates 209 than for the pair of first movable light guide plates 208. Is small.

そこで、第2案内スリット273の傾斜スリット273bの上下方向の長さ、つまり第2可動導光板209の上下ストロークを、第1案内スリット271の傾斜スリット271aの上下方向の長さ、つまり第1可動導光板208の上下ストロークよりも長くして、第1進出位置の1対の第1可動導光板208と、第2進出位置の1対の第2可動導光板209が、可動役物部材201から上下両側へ同程度突出するようにしている。   Therefore, the vertical length of the inclined slit 273b of the second guide slit 273, that is, the vertical stroke of the second movable light guide plate 209, is the vertical length of the inclined slit 271a of the first guide slit 271; A pair of first movable light guide plates 208 at a first advance position and a pair of second movable light guide plates 209 at a second advance position are made longer than the vertical stroke of the light guide plate 208 from the movable accessory member 201. It protrudes to the same extent on both the upper and lower sides.

図43〜図45に示すように、スライド板262の位置、即ち1対の第1可動導光板208、及び1対の第2可動導光板209の位置を検出するために、第1,第2光学センサ275,276が上下に配置されて基板277に実装され、その基板277が第2可動ベース221の中央より後面部に取付けられ、第1光学センサ275により検出可能な2つの第1遮蔽部275a,275bと、第2光学センサ276により検出可能な2つの第2遮蔽部276a,276bがスライド板262に形成されている。   43 to 45, in order to detect the position of the slide plate 262, that is, the position of the pair of first movable light guide plates 208 and the pair of second movable light guide plates 209, the first and second positions are detected. Optical sensors 275 and 276 are arranged vertically and mounted on a substrate 277, and the substrate 277 is attached to the rear surface portion from the center of the second movable base 221 and can be detected by the first optical sensor 275. 275 a and 275 b and two second shielding portions 276 a and 276 b that can be detected by the second optical sensor 276 are formed on the slide plate 262.

第1光学センサ275による第1遮蔽部275a,275bの検出状況(検出有無)、及び第2光学センサ276による第2遮蔽部276aの検出状況(検出有無)により、スライド板262の前記原点位置、右限界位置、動作切換位置を検出可能になる。   The origin position of the slide plate 262 depends on the detection status (detection presence / absence) of the first shielding portions 275a and 275b by the first optical sensor 275 and the detection status (detection presence / absence) of the second shielding portion 276a by the second optical sensor 276. The right limit position and the operation switching position can be detected.

ところで、従来の多くの遊技機には、遊技演出用の可動役物を有する演出役物装置が装備されているが、本発明のように、可動役物部材201及び第1,第2可動導光板208,209を有する演出役物装置200において、如何にそれら可動役物部材201及び第1,第2可動導光板208,209の斬新な動作を実現して、演出効果を高め得る遊技演出を行うことができるかが課題である。   By the way, although many conventional gaming machines are equipped with a stage effect device having a movable role for game effects, as in the present invention, the movable role member 201 and the first and second movable guides are provided. In the stage effect device 200 having the light plates 208 and 209, how to realize the game effects that can enhance the stage effect by realizing the novel operation of the movable part member 201 and the first and second movable light guide plates 208 and 209. The problem is whether it can be done.

そこで、この演出役物装置200によれば、第1駆動手段106により、可動役物部材201を下待機位置と上作動位置とにわたって移動させ、第2駆動手段218により、可動役物部材201に対して1対の1可動導光板208を第1退避位置と第1進出位置とにわたって進退移動させ、1対の第2可動導光板209を第2退避位置と第2進出位置とにわたって進退移動させるようにした。   Therefore, according to the stage effect device 200, the movable driving member 201 is moved between the lower standby position and the upper operating position by the first driving means 106, and the movable driving member 201 is moved by the second driving means 218. In contrast, the pair of one movable light guide plate 208 is moved forward and backward between the first retracted position and the first advanced position, and the pair of second movable light guide plates 209 is moved forward and backward between the second retracted position and the second advanced position. I did it.

更に、第2駆動手段218において、差動機構260により、1の電動モータ261により、1対の第2可動導光板209を第2退避位置に停止させた状態で、第1可動導光板208を第1退避位置と第1進出位置とにわたって進退移動させ、1対の第1可動導光板208を第1進出位置に停止させた状態で、1対の第2可動導光板209を第2退避位置と第2進出位置とにわたって進退移動させるようにした。   Further, in the second driving means 218, the first movable light guide plate 208 is moved in a state where the pair of second movable light guide plates 209 is stopped at the second retracted position by the differential mechanism 260 and by one electric motor 261. The pair of second movable light guide plates 209 is moved to the second retracted position in a state where the pair of first movable light guide plates 208 is stopped at the first advanced position by moving forward and backward between the first retracted position and the first advanced position. And moved forward and backward over the second advance position.

従って、例えば、第1の遊技演出において、可動役物部材201を下待機位置に停止させ、且つ1対の第2可動導光板209を第2退避位置に停止させた状態で、1対の第1可動導光板208を第1退避位置と第1進出位置との間で進退移動させたり、第2の遊技演出において、可動役物部材201を下待機位置から上作動位置に移動させると共に、1対の第1可動導光板208及び1対の第2可動導光板209を第1,第2退避位置から第1,第2進出位置へ夫々移動させたりすることができ、つまり、可動役物部材201、1対の第1可動導光板208、1対の第2可動導光板209の様々な斬新な動作を実現して、演出効果を高め得る遊技演出を行うことが可能になる。   Therefore, for example, in the first game effect, the movable accessory member 201 is stopped at the lower standby position and the pair of second movable light guide plates 209 is stopped at the second retracted position. 1 The movable light guide plate 208 is moved back and forth between the first retracted position and the first advanced position, or the movable accessory member 201 is moved from the lower standby position to the upper operating position in the second game effect. The pair of first movable light guide plates 208 and the pair of second movable light guide plates 209 can be moved from the first and second retracted positions to the first and second advanced positions, respectively, that is, the movable accessory member It is possible to realize a game effect that can enhance various effects by realizing various novel operations of the pair of first movable light guide plates 208 and the pair of second movable light guide plates 209.

可動役物部材201が下待機位置にあるときに、1対の第2可動導光板209が第2退避位置から第2進出位置へ移動すると静止側部材249と干渉する位置にあり、つまり、可動役物部材201を最大限下降させた位置を下待機位置として、画像表示器7の画面7aの前側を広く空けて、画面7aを見え易くするとともに、ここで、前記第1の遊技演出のように、可動役物部材201を下待機位置に停止させ、且つ1対の第2可動導光板209を第2退避位置に停止させた状態で、1対の第1可動導光板208を第1退避位置と第1進出位置との間で進退移動させる遊技演出を行うことが可能になる。   When the movable accessory member 201 is in the lower standby position, when the pair of second movable light guide plates 209 move from the second retracted position to the second advanced position, the movable accessory member 201 is in a position where it interferes with the stationary member 249. The position where the accessory member 201 is lowered to the maximum is set as the lower standby position, and the front side of the screen 7a of the image display 7 is widened to make the screen 7a easier to see. Here, as in the first game effect, In addition, the pair of first movable light guide plates 208 is first retracted with the movable accessory member 201 stopped at the lower standby position and the pair of second movable light guide plates 209 stopped at the second retracted position. It is possible to perform a game effect that moves forward and backward between the position and the first advance position.

また、従来の遊技機において、導光板を有する演出役物装置を装備した機種が存在するが、本発明のように、第1,第2左固定導光板205,206、右固定導光板207、第1,第2可動導光板208,209を有する演出役物装置200において、如何にそれら導光板205〜209の斬新な動作並びに発光表示(電飾)を実現して、演出効果を高め得る遊技演出を行うことができるかが課題である。   In addition, in conventional gaming machines, there are models equipped with a director device having a light guide plate. As in the present invention, the first and second left fixed light guide plates 205 and 206, the right fixed light guide plate 207, In the stage effect device 200 having the first and second movable light guide plates 208 and 209, a game that can realize a novel operation and light emission display (electric decoration) of the light guide plates 205 to 209 to enhance the effect The problem is whether or not it can be performed.

そこで、この演出役物装置200によれば、第1駆動手段106により、第1,第2左固定導光板205,206及び右固定導光板207を1対の第1可動導光板208及び1対の第2可動導光板209と一体的に下待機位置と上作動位置とにわたって移動させ、第2駆動手段218により、1対の第1可動導光板208及び1対の第2可動導光板209を第1,第2左固定導光板205,206及び右固定導光板207に対して第1,第2退避位置と第1,第2進出位置とにわたって移動させるようにした。   Therefore, according to the stage effect device 200, the first driving means 106 causes the first and second left fixed light guide plates 205 and 206 and the right fixed light guide plate 207 to be paired with a pair of first movable light guide plates 208 and one pair. The second movable light guide plate 209 is moved integrally between the lower standby position and the upper operation position, and the second driving means 218 causes the pair of first movable light guide plates 208 and the pair of second movable light guide plates 209 to move. The first and second left fixed light guide plates 205 and 206 and the right fixed light guide plate 207 are moved over the first and second retracted positions and the first and second advanced positions.

従って、例えば、第1の遊技演出において、第1,第2左固定導光板205,206及び右固定導光板207を下待機位置に停止させて、第1左固定導光板205と右固定導光板207の文字模様「PSYCHO」「−PASS」や第2左固定導光板206の文字模様「犯罪係数」を発光させたり、第2の遊技演出において、第1,第2左固定導光板205,206及び右固定導光板207を下待機位置から上作動位置に移動させると共に、1対の第1可動導光板208及び1対の第2可動導光板209を第1,第2退避位置から第1,第2進出位置へ移動させて、第1左固定導光板205と右固定導光板207の文字模様「PSYCHO」「−PASS」や第2左固定導光板206の文字模様「犯罪係数」を発光させ、1対の第1可動導光板208及び1対の第2導光板209の文字模様「WARNING」を発光させたりすることができ、つまり、第1,第2左固定導光板205,206、右固定導光板207、第1,第2可動導光板208,209の斬新な動作並びに発光表示(電飾)を実現して、演出効果を高め得る遊技演出を行うことが可能になる。   Accordingly, for example, in the first game effect, the first left fixed light guide plate 205 and the right fixed light guide plate 205 are stopped at the lower standby position by stopping the first and second left fixed light guide plates 205 and 206 and the right fixed light guide plate 207. The character pattern “PSYCHO” “-PASS” of 207 and the character pattern “crime coefficient” of the second left fixed light guide plate 206 are emitted, or in the second game effect, the first and second left fixed light guide plates 205, 206. The right fixed light guide plate 207 is moved from the lower standby position to the upper operation position, and the pair of first movable light guide plates 208 and the pair of second movable light guide plates 209 are moved from the first and second retracted positions to the first and second retracted positions. The character pattern “PSYCHO” and “-PASS” on the first left fixed light guide plate 205 and the right fixed light guide plate 207 and the character pattern “crime coefficient” on the second left fixed light guide plate 206 are emitted by moving to the second advance position. A pair of first movable light guides 208 and the pair of second light guide plates 209 can emit the light pattern “WARNING”, that is, the first and second left fixed light guide plates 205 and 206, the right fixed light guide plate 207, the first and first (2) A novel operation and light emitting display (electric decoration) of the movable light guide plates 208 and 209 can be realized, and a game effect that can enhance the effect can be performed.

可動役物部材201に第1LED基板210を取付け、複数のLED214a,214b,215a,215bを固定的に設けて、第2駆動手段218により移動される1対の第1可動導光板208及び1対の第2可動導光板209の文字模様「WARNING」を発光可能に、1対の第1可動導光板208及び1対の第2可動導光板209に複数のLED214a,214b,215a,215bからの光を導入する第1,第2光導入構造240,245を設けたので、第1,第2可動導光板208,209が複数位置(第1,第2退避位置と第1,第2進出位置)にあるときに、文字模様「WARNING」を確実に発光させることが可能になる。   A first LED substrate 210 is attached to the movable accessory member 201, a plurality of LEDs 214a, 214b, 215a, 215b are fixedly provided, and a pair of first movable light guide plates 208 and a pair moved by the second driving means 218. The light from the plurality of LEDs 214a, 214b, 215a, 215b on the pair of first movable light guide plates 208 and the pair of second movable light guide plates 209 so that the character pattern “WARNING” of the second movable light guide plate 209 can be emitted. Since the first and second light introducing structures 240 and 245 are provided, the first and second movable light guide plates 208 and 209 are in a plurality of positions (first and second retracted positions and first and second advanced positions). The character pattern “WARNING” can be made to emit light reliably.

可動役物部材201に、第1,第2左固定導光板205,206及び右固定導光板207と、1対の第1可動導光板208及び1対の第2可動導光板209は、第1LED基板210を挟んで前後配置されているので、これら導光板206〜109と第1LED基板210を、可動役物部材201をコンパクトに配置して装備することができる。   The movable accessory member 201 includes a first LED, a second left fixed light guide plate 205, 206, a right fixed light guide plate 207, a pair of first movable light guide plates 208, and a pair of second movable light guide plates 209. Since the light guide plates 206 to 109 and the first LED substrate 210 can be equipped with the movable accessory member 201 arranged in a compact manner, the light guide plates 206 to 109 and the first LED substrate 210 can be equipped.

次に、演出役物装置200において、第1,第2光導入構造240,245を変更した変更形態について説明する。   Next, a modified embodiment in which the first and second light introducing structures 240 and 245 are changed in the effect accessory device 200 will be described.

図55に示すように、変更形態に係る第1光導入構造280は、各第1可動導光板208に対して、第1LED基板210の後面に実装された複数(例えば、5個)のLED281を設けるとともに、透明板282及び導光部材283を設けて、第1可動導光板208の位置に関わらず、複数のLED281からの光を第1可動導光板208に導入して、その文字模様;「WARNING」を発光可能に構成されている。尚、各第1可動導光板208の下端部に略水平な平滑面が形成され、第1光導入構造240に係るLED214a,214bは省略されている。   As shown in FIG. 55, the first light introduction structure 280 according to the modified embodiment includes a plurality of (for example, five) LEDs 281 mounted on the rear surface of the first LED substrate 210 with respect to each first movable light guide plate 208. In addition to providing the transparent plate 282 and the light guide member 283, the light from the plurality of LEDs 281 is introduced into the first movable light guide plate 208 regardless of the position of the first movable light guide plate 208, and the character pattern; “WARNING” is configured to emit light. Note that a substantially horizontal smooth surface is formed at the lower end of each first movable light guide plate 208, and the LEDs 214a and 214b related to the first light introduction structure 240 are omitted.

複数のLED281は、第1退避位置にある第1可動導光板208よりも下側において、左右方向に間隔を空けて一列状に配列され、全て後方へ発光可能に設けられている。左右方向に長い導光部材283が透明板282の後面に固着され、複数のLED281の後方且つ第1可動導光板208の下方に位置するように配置されている。導光部材283の後端部に、後方ほど上方へ移行するように上下方向から45度傾斜した傾斜面283aが形成され、複数のLED281から後方へ向かう光が、透明板282にその前面から垂直に入射されて導光部材283に至り、その傾斜面283aにより上方へ反射され、第1可動導光板208にその下端部から入射され、文字模様;「WARNING」へ向かう。   The plurality of LEDs 281 are arranged in a line at intervals in the left-right direction below the first movable light guide plate 208 in the first retracted position, and are all provided so as to be able to emit light backward. A light guide member 283 that is long in the left-right direction is fixed to the rear surface of the transparent plate 282, and is disposed behind the plurality of LEDs 281 and below the first movable light guide plate 208. An inclined surface 283a inclined 45 degrees from the vertical direction is formed at the rear end of the light guide member 283 so as to move upward in the rear direction, and light traveling backward from the plurality of LEDs 281 is perpendicular to the transparent plate 282 from the front surface. , Reaches the light guide member 283, is reflected upward by the inclined surface 283a, is incident on the first movable light guide plate 208 from the lower end thereof, and proceeds to the character pattern “WARNING”.

図56に示すように、変更形態に係る第2光導入構造285は、各第2可動導光板209に対して、第1LED基板210の後面に実装された複数(例えば、5個)のLED286を設けるとともに、透明板287及び導光部材288を設けて、第2可動導光板209の位置に関わらず、複数のLED286からの光を第2可動導光板209に導入して、その文字模様;「WARNING」を発光可能に構成されている。尚、各第2可動導光板209の上端部に略水平な平滑面が形成され、第2光導入構造245に係るLED215a,215bは省略されている。   As shown in FIG. 56, the second light introduction structure 285 according to the modified form includes a plurality of (for example, five) LEDs 286 mounted on the rear surface of the first LED substrate 210 with respect to each second movable light guide plate 209. In addition to providing the transparent plate 287 and the light guide member 288, the light from the plurality of LEDs 286 is introduced into the second movable light guide plate 209 regardless of the position of the second movable light guide plate 209, and the character pattern; “WARNING” is configured to emit light. In addition, a substantially horizontal smooth surface is formed at the upper end of each second movable light guide plate 209, and the LEDs 215a and 215b related to the second light introduction structure 245 are omitted.

複数のLED286は、第2退避位置にある第2可動導光板209よりも下側において、左右方向に間隔を空けて一列状に配列され、全て後方へ発光可能に設けられている。左右方向に長い導光部材288が透明板287の後面に固着され、複数のLED286の後方且つ第2可動導光板209の上方に位置するように配置されている。導光部材288の後端部に、後方ほど下方へ移行するように上下方向から45度傾斜した傾斜面288aが形成され、複数のLED286から後方へ向かう光が、透明板287にその前面から垂直に入射されて導光部材288に至り、その傾斜面288aにより下方へ反射され、第2可動導光板209にその上端部から入射され、文字模様;「WARNING」へ向かう。   The plurality of LEDs 286 are arranged in a line at intervals in the left-right direction below the second movable light guide plate 209 in the second retracted position, and are all provided to be able to emit light rearward. A light guide member 288 that is long in the left-right direction is fixed to the rear surface of the transparent plate 287 and is disposed behind the plurality of LEDs 286 and above the second movable light guide plate 209. At the rear end of the light guide member 288, an inclined surface 288a inclined by 45 degrees from the vertical direction is formed so as to move downward as it goes rearward, and light traveling backward from the plurality of LEDs 286 is perpendicular to the transparent plate 287 from its front surface. To the light guide member 288, reflected downward by the inclined surface 288a, and incident on the second movable light guide plate 209 from the upper end thereof, toward the character pattern “WARNING”.

◆[電飾パネル]
電飾パネル6(下部パネル部6)について説明する。
電飾パネル6は、前記(図1参照)のように、筐体3の前面部を開閉する前面扉2において、リール11,12,13の表示窓4aを形成する中段パネル部4の下側部分に設けられ、遊技機を電飾し且つ遊技演出を行うことが可能である。
◆ [Lighting Panel]
The electrical decoration panel 6 (lower panel part 6) is demonstrated.
As described above (see FIG. 1), the electrical decoration panel 6 is provided on the front door 2 that opens and closes the front surface of the housing 3, and below the middle panel 4 that forms the display windows 4 a of the reels 11, 12, and 13. It is provided in the portion, and it is possible to illuminate the gaming machine and perform a game effect.

図57、図58に示すように、電飾パネル6は、その本体部となる電飾装置400と、電飾装置400をカバーするパネルカバー401と、電飾装置400及びパネルカバー401を保持するパネル保持枠402とを有する。   As shown in FIGS. 57 and 58, the electrical decoration panel 6 holds an electrical decoration device 400 that is a main body portion thereof, a panel cover 401 that covers the electrical decoration device 400, and the electrical decoration device 400 and the panel cover 401. And a panel holding frame 402.

電飾装置400は、正面視にて左右長が上下長よりも長い(上下長の約3倍の)矩形状に形成されて、前後に多少の厚みを有する。パネルカバー401は、電飾装置400の前面をカバーする透明カバー板部401aと、電飾装置400の外周をカバーする外周カバー部401bとを有し、パネル保持枠402は、パネルカバー401の外周カバー部401bに外嵌される外周枠部402aと、パネルカバー401の透明カバー板部401aの外周近傍の前面部分に前側から当接する前面枠部402bとを有する。   The electrical decoration device 400 is formed in a rectangular shape whose left and right length is longer than the top and bottom length (about three times the top and bottom length) when viewed from the front, and has a slight thickness in the front and rear. The panel cover 401 includes a transparent cover plate portion 401 a that covers the front surface of the electrical decoration device 400 and an outer peripheral cover portion 401 b that covers the outer periphery of the electrical decoration device 400, and the panel holding frame 402 is an outer periphery of the panel cover 401. An outer peripheral frame portion 402a that is externally fitted to the cover portion 401b, and a front frame portion 402b that comes into contact with the front surface portion of the panel cover 401 near the outer periphery of the transparent cover plate portion 401a from the front side.

電飾装置400について詳しく説明する。
図57〜図68に示すように、電飾装置400は、光透過性の有る表面装飾パネル410と、表面装飾パネル410に対してその後面(裏面)側に積層状に配置された主発光部材420(第1発光部材420)と、表面装飾パネル410及び主発光部材420に対してその後面側に積層状に配置された発光パネル430(第2発光部材430)と、発光パネル430に対してその後面側に積層状に配置されたLED基板440と、LED基板440の前面(表面)に実装された複数のLED450,451,452(第1光源)、複数のLED453,454(第2光源)、及び複数のLED455とを有する。 As shown in FIGS. 57 to 68, the lighting device 400 includes a light-transmitting surface decorative panel 410 and a main light emitting member arranged in a laminated manner on the rear surface (back surface) side of the surface decorative panel 410. With respect to 420 (first light emitting member 420), light emitting panel 430 (second light emitting member 430) arranged in a laminated manner on the rear surface side of the surface decorative panel 410 and main light emitting member 420, and light emitting panel 430. LED substrate 440 arranged in a laminated manner on the rear surface side, a plurality of LEDs 450, 451 and 452 (first light source) mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the LED substrate 440, and a plurality of LEDs 453 and 454 (second light source). , And a plurality of LEDs 455. 尚、各LEDはカラー発光可能なものである。 It should be noted that each LED is capable of emitting color. The illumination device 400 will be described in detail. The illumination device 400 will be described in detail.
As shown in FIGS. 57 to 68, the electrical decoration device 400 includes a light-transmitting surface decoration panel 410 and a main light emitting member arranged in a stacked manner on the rear surface (back surface) side of the surface decoration panel 410. 420 (first light-emitting member 420), light-emitting panel 430 (second light-emitting member 430) disposed on the rear side of the surface decoration panel 410 and the main light-emitting member 420, and the light-emitting panel 430 The LED substrate 440 arranged in a stacked manner on the rear surface side, a plurality of LEDs 450, 451, 452 (first light source) and a plurality of LEDs 453, 454 (second light source) mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the LED substrate 440 , And a plurality of LEDs 455. Each LED can emit color light. As shown in FIGS. 57 to 68, the electrical decoration device 400 includes a light-transmitting surface decoration panel 410 and a main light emitting member arranged in a stacked manner on the rear surface (back surface) side of the surface decoration panel 410. 420 (first light-LED member 420), light-LED panel 430 (second light-LED member 430) disposed on the rear side of the surface decoration panel 410 and the main light-LED member 420, and the light-LED panel 430 The LED substrate 440 arranged in a stacked manner on the rear surface side, a plurality of LEDs 450, 451, 452 (first light source) and a plurality of LEDs 453, 454 (second light source) mounted on the front surface (front surface) ) Of the LED substrate 440, And a plurality of LEDs 455. Each LED can emit color light.

表面装飾パネル410、主発光部材420、発光パネル430、及びLED基板440は、複数のビス(場合により接着剤)等の固定手段により互いに固定され、一体化された電飾装置400が構成されている。   The surface decoration panel 410, the main light emitting member 420, the light emitting panel 430, and the LED substrate 440 are fixed to each other by a fixing means such as a plurality of screws (in some cases, an adhesive) to form an integrated electric decoration device 400. Yes.

図57、図58、図59に示すように、表面装飾パネル410は、正面視にてその外形が電飾装置400の外形をなす矩形状に形成され、横断面にて僅かに前方へ膨らむように反る湾曲形状に形成されて、パネルカバー401の透明カバー板部401aの後面に近接状に臨み、その形状に応じて、パネルカバー401及びパネル保持枠402は、同様に、横断面にて僅かに前方へ膨らむように反る湾曲形状に形成されている。   As shown in FIG. 57, FIG. 58, and FIG. 59, the surface decoration panel 410 is formed in a rectangular shape that forms the outer shape of the electrical decoration device 400 when viewed from the front, and swells slightly forward in the cross section. The panel cover 401 and the panel holding frame 402 are similarly formed in a cross section according to the shape of the panel cover 401. It is formed in a curved shape that warps slightly forward.

表面装飾パネル410は、その多く(1/2以上)を占める中央透過部411と、中央透過部411の右側に設けられた右装飾部412と、中央透過部411及び右装飾部412の左右両側に設けられた左サイド装飾部413、及び右サイド装飾部414とを有する。右装飾部412には、本機種特有のキャクタが描かれ、左右のサイド装飾部413,414には、夫々多数の凹凸及び溝が形成されている。   The surface decorative panel 410 includes a central transmission part 411 occupying most (1/2 or more), a right decoration part 412 provided on the right side of the central transmission part 411, and both left and right sides of the central transmission part 411 and the right decoration part 412 Left side decoration part 413 and right side decoration part 414 provided. The right decorative portion 412 is drawn with a model-specific character, and the left and right side decorative portions 413 and 414 are formed with a number of irregularities and grooves, respectively.

表面装飾パネル410は、基本的に、その全体(中央透過部411、右装飾部412、左右のサイド装飾部413,414)から、主発光部材420の発光表示される第1模様部(中央模様部421、複数の枝状模様部422)、及び発光パネル430の発光表示される第2模様部(左右の模様部434,435)を透過して表示させるが、右装飾部412と左右のサイド装飾部413,414は、発光表示される第1,第2模様部と融合されるように、第1,第2模様部から発せられた光によって発光表示される。   The surface decorative panel 410 basically has a first pattern portion (center pattern) on which the main light emitting member 420 is displayed by light emission from the entire surface (central transmission portion 411, right decoration portion 412, left and right side decoration portions 413, 414). Part 421, a plurality of branch-like pattern parts 422), and the second pattern part (left and right pattern parts 434, 435) displayed on the light-emitting panel 430 are transmitted and displayed, but the right decorative part 412 and the left and right sides are displayed. The decorative portions 413 and 414 are lit and displayed by the light emitted from the first and second pattern portions so as to be fused with the first and second pattern portions that are lit and displayed.

図59〜図64に示すように、主発光部材420は、その中央側の所定領域に設けられて表面装飾パネル410の上下長と略同じ直径の正面視円形状に形成された中央模様部421であって、複数のLED450により発光表示される中央模様部421と、中央模様部421から外側へ放射状に延びるように設けられた複数(10個)の枝状模様部422(第1導光部422)であって、複数のLED451,452により発光表示される複数の枝状模様部422とを有する。   As shown in FIGS. 59 to 64, the main light emitting member 420 is provided in a predetermined region on the center side thereof, and has a central pattern portion 421 formed in a circular shape in front view having a diameter substantially the same as the vertical length of the surface decoration panel 410. A central pattern portion 421 that emits light and is displayed by a plurality of LEDs 450, and a plurality (ten) branch-like pattern portions 422 (first light guide portions) provided to extend radially outward from the central pattern portion 421. 422), and a plurality of branch-like pattern portions 422 that are light-emitting and displayed by the plurality of LEDs 451 and 452.

中央模様部421は、断面にて前方凸となる皿状部材421Aにより形成されて、その中央模様部421には、その中央側の円形領域に本機種特有のエンブレムが描かれるとともに、その外周側のリング形状の環状領域に本機種特有の文字群が描かれ、それらの後面側全体に拡散レンズ部421aが形成されている。   The central pattern portion 421 is formed by a plate-like member 421A that is convex forward in cross section. The central pattern portion 421 has an emblem unique to this model drawn in a circular area on the center side, and its outer peripheral side. A character group peculiar to this model is drawn in the ring-shaped annular region of FIG. 5, and a diffusing lens portion 421a is formed on the entire rear surface side thereof.

複数の枝状模様部422は、発光パネル430の前面側、且つ表面装飾パネル410の右装飾部412及び右サイド装飾部414と対応する領域以外の領域において、中央模様部421の略中央を中心に、周方向へ略等角度おきに配置され、それらの基端部が皿状部材421Aの外周部に繋がっている。   The plurality of branch-like pattern portions 422 are centered at the approximate center of the central pattern portion 421 in a region other than the region corresponding to the front decoration side 412 and the right side decoration portion 414 of the front surface decoration panel 410. Further, they are arranged at substantially equal angles in the circumferential direction, and their base end portions are connected to the outer peripheral portion of the dish-shaped member 421A.

複数の枝状模様部422は、互いに長さや形状を異ならせているが、夫々その表面が円筒面状に形成され、複数の枝状模様部422には、夫々その長さ方向全長にわたって後方へ臨み且つ基端側が皿状部材421A内に臨む長尺レンズ部422aが形成されている。   The plurality of branch pattern portions 422 are different in length and shape from each other, but their surfaces are formed in a cylindrical shape, and each of the plurality of branch pattern portions 422 is rearward over the entire length in the length direction. A long lens portion 422a that faces and the base end side faces the dish-like member 421A is formed.

図59〜図62、図65〜図68に示すように、発光パネル430は、正面視にて表面装飾パネル410と略同形同サイズの矩形状に形成され、この発光パネル430は、複数のLED450からの光を受けて主発光部材420の中央模様部421へ出射する中央光透過部431と、複数のLED451,452からの光を受けて主発光部材420の複数の枝状模様部422へ夫々出射する複数(10個)の帯状光透過部432と、複数のLED455からの光を受けて表面装飾パネル410の右装飾部412へ出射する右光透過部433とを有する。   As shown in FIGS. 59 to 62 and 65 to 68, the light emitting panel 430 is formed in a rectangular shape having substantially the same shape and size as the surface decoration panel 410 in a front view. A central light transmitting portion 431 that receives light from the LED 450 and emits the light to the central pattern portion 421 of the main light emitting member 420, and receives light from the plurality of LEDs 451 and 452 to the plurality of branch pattern portions 422 of the main light emitting member 420. Each has a plurality (ten) of strip-shaped light transmission portions 432 that emit light, and a right light transmission portion 433 that receives light from the plurality of LEDs 455 and emits the light to the right decoration portion 412 of the surface decoration panel 410.

中央光透過部431は、主発光部材420の中央模様部421に対応する位置に設けられて、対応する形状及びサイズで形成され、つまり、発光パネル430の中央側の所定領域に設けられた中央光透過部431の前面側に、主発光部材420の中央模様部421が配置されている。   The central light transmitting portion 431 is provided at a position corresponding to the central pattern portion 421 of the main light emitting member 420 and is formed in a corresponding shape and size, that is, a central portion provided in a predetermined region on the central side of the light emitting panel 430. A central pattern portion 421 of the main light emitting member 420 is disposed on the front side of the light transmitting portion 431.

中央光透過部431は中央拡散レンズ部431からなり、この中央拡散レンズ部431は、その中央を中心に60度間隔で6等分された6個のノコギリ断面形状のフネレズレンズ431aにより構成されている。6個のフネレズレンズ431aの後側に6個のLED450が夫々配置され、6個のLED450の光が6個のフネレズレンズ431aにより夫々拡散されて、主発光部材420の中央模様部421に出射され、その光によって中央模様部421が前面全体から発光する。   The central light transmission part 431 includes a central diffuser lens part 431, and the central diffuser lens part 431 is composed of six sawtooth cross-section funnelez lenses 431a that are equally divided into six parts at an interval of 60 degrees around the center. . Six LEDs 450 are respectively arranged on the rear side of the six funnel lenses 431a, and the light of the six LEDs 450 is diffused by the six funnel lenses 431a and emitted to the central pattern portion 421 of the main light emitting member 420, respectively. The central pattern portion 421 emits light from the entire front surface by light.

複数の帯状光透過部432は、主発光部材420の複数の枝状模様部422に夫々対応する位置に設けられて、対応する形状及び長さで形成され、つまり、発光パネル430に中央光透過部431から外側へ放射状に延びるように設けられた複数の帯状光透過部432の前面側に、主発光部材420の複数の枝状模様部422が夫々配置されている。複数の帯状光透過部432には、夫々その長さ方向全長にわたって前方へ臨む長尺レンズ部432aが形成されている。   The plurality of strip-shaped light transmission portions 432 are provided at positions corresponding to the plurality of branch-shaped pattern portions 422 of the main light emitting member 420, respectively, and are formed with corresponding shapes and lengths. A plurality of branch-like pattern portions 422 of the main light emitting member 420 are arranged on the front side of the plurality of strip-shaped light transmission portions 432 provided so as to extend radially outward from the portion 431. Each of the plurality of strip-shaped light transmission portions 432 is formed with a long lens portion 432a that faces forward over the entire length in the length direction.

LED基板440の左部前面側に大部分が位置する3個の帯状光透過部432の各々には、その後面側に2個の後方凸の鈍角3角形状の導光片436が帯状光透過部432の長さ方向に並べて固定的に設けられ、それら2個の導光片436の鈍角側の中央角部に対する対辺部を帯状光透過部432に全長にわたって近接させている。   In each of the three strip-shaped light transmission portions 432, most of which are located on the left front side of the LED substrate 440, two rear-convex obtuse triangular light guide pieces 436 are disposed on the rear surface side. The two light guide pieces 436 are fixedly arranged side by side in the length direction of the portion 432, and the opposite side portions with respect to the central corner portion on the obtuse angle side of the two light guide pieces 436 are close to the belt-like light transmitting portion 432 over the entire length.

前記の3個の帯状光透過部432の上側の1個の帯状光透過部432には、その後面側に1個の導光片436と1個の導光バー437(第2導光部437)が帯状光透過部432の長さ方向に並べて固定的に設けられ、その導光片436の鈍角側の中央角部に対する対辺部と導光バー437を帯状光透過部432に全長にわたって近接させるとともに、導光バー437の基端側部分を後方へ屈曲させている。   One strip-shaped light transmission portion 432 above the three strip-shaped light transmission portions 432 includes one light guide piece 436 and one light guide bar 437 (second light guide portion 437) on the rear surface side. ) Are fixedly arranged side by side in the length direction of the band-shaped light transmitting portion 432, and the opposite side portion of the light guide piece 436 with respect to the central corner portion on the obtuse angle side and the light guide bar 437 are brought close to the band-shaped light transmitting portion 432 over the entire length. At the same time, the base end side portion of the light guide bar 437 is bent backward.

LED基板440の上端側に位置する4個の帯状光透過部432、及びLED基板440の下端側に位置する2個の帯状光透過部432の各々には、その後面側に1個の導光バー437が固定的に設けられ、その導光バー437を帯状光透過部432に全長にわたって近接させるとともに、導光バー437の基端側部分を中央光透過部431の後側に位置させ、且つ後方へ屈曲させている。   Each of the four strip-shaped light transmitting portions 432 positioned on the upper end side of the LED substrate 440 and the two strip-shaped light transmitting portions 432 positioned on the lower end side of the LED substrate 440 has one light guide on the rear surface side. A bar 437 is fixedly provided, and the light guide bar 437 is made close to the belt-like light transmission portion 432 over the entire length, the proximal end portion of the light guide bar 437 is positioned behind the central light transmission portion 431, and It is bent backwards.

このように、合計7個の導光片436と、合計7個の導光バー437が夫々中央拡散レンズ部431側から外側へ延びるよう設けられ、7個の導光片436に夫々対応する7個のLED451と、7個の導光バー437に夫々対応する7個のLED452が設けられている。   In this way, a total of seven light guide pieces 436 and a total of seven light guide bars 437 are provided so as to extend outward from the central diffusing lens portion 431 side, and 7 corresponding to the seven light guide pieces 436, respectively. Seven LEDs 451 and seven LEDs 452 respectively corresponding to the seven light guide bars 437 are provided.

7個の導光片436の中央角部と7個のLED451とが夫々対面するように配設され、7個の導光片436は、夫々がその中央角部からLED451の光を導入して前面全体から発光可能であり、また、7個の導光バー437の基端部と7個のLED452とが夫々対面するように配設され、7個の導光バー437は、夫々がその基端部からLED452の光を導入して、導光バー437内において基端部から前方へ向かう光を屈曲部の内側傾斜面で先端側へ反射させて、前面全体から発光可能である。   The central corners of the seven light guide pieces 436 and the seven LEDs 451 are arranged so as to face each other, and the seven light guide pieces 436 each introduce the light of the LED 451 from the central corner part. Light can be emitted from the entire front surface, and the base ends of the seven light guide bars 437 and the seven LEDs 452 are arranged to face each other, and each of the seven light guide bars 437 has its base. The light of the LED 452 is introduced from the end portion, and the light traveling forward from the base end portion in the light guide bar 437 is reflected to the distal end side by the inner inclined surface of the bent portion, and can be emitted from the entire front surface.

そして、7個の導光片436及び7個の導光バー437の前面全体から出射される光が、10個の帯状光透過部432に夫々出射され、更に10個の帯状光透過部432の長尺レンズ部432aにより拡散されて、主発光部材420の10個の枝状模様部422に夫々出射され、10個の枝状模様部422が、更にそれら長尺レンズ部422aにより夫々光を拡散して、その光によって表面全体から発光する。   Then, the light emitted from the entire front surfaces of the seven light guide pieces 436 and the seven light guide bars 437 is emitted to the ten belt-like light transmission portions 432, respectively, and the ten belt-like light transmission portions 432 are further provided. The light is diffused by the long lens portion 432a and emitted to the ten branch pattern portions 422 of the main light emitting member 420, and the ten branch pattern portions 422 further diffuse light by the long lens portions 422a, respectively. The light is then emitted from the entire surface.

右光透過部433の後側に10個のLED455が分散状に配置され、この10個のLED455の光が、右光透過部433を透過して右装飾部412に当って、右装飾部412が発光表示される。   Ten LEDs 455 are arranged in a distributed manner on the rear side of the right light transmission portion 433, and the light of the ten LEDs 455 passes through the right light transmission portion 433 and strikes the right decoration portion 412, and the right decoration portion 412 Is displayed.

更に、発光パネル430は、中央光透過部431の左側に8個の帯状光透過部432以外の領域に設けられて、複数のLED453により発光表示される左模様部434と、中央光透過部431の右側に2個の帯状光透過部432及び右光透過部433以外の領域に設けられて、複数のLED454により発光表示される右模様部435と有する。左右の模様部434,435には、夫々多数の凹凸及び溝が形成されている。   Further, the light emitting panel 430 is provided on the left side of the central light transmitting portion 431 in an area other than the eight belt-like light transmitting portions 432, and a left pattern portion 434 that emits and displays light by a plurality of LEDs 453, and the central light transmitting portion 431. And a right pattern portion 435 that is provided in a region other than the two band-like light transmission portions 432 and the right light transmission portion 433 and that emits and displays light by a plurality of LEDs 454. A large number of irregularities and grooves are formed in the left and right pattern portions 434 and 435, respectively.

図58〜図60、図67、図68に示すように、LED基板440は、正面視にて発光パネル430よりも小さくて、左右長が上下長よりも長い(上下長の約3倍の)矩形状に形成され、発光パネル430の外形線よりも内側に配置されて、前記のように、そのLED基板440の前面に複数のLED450〜455が実装されている。   As shown in FIGS. 58 to 60, 67, and 68, the LED substrate 440 is smaller than the light emitting panel 430 in the front view, and the left and right length is longer than the vertical length (about three times the vertical length). A plurality of LEDs 450 to 455 are mounted on the front surface of the LED substrate 440 as described above, which is formed in a rectangular shape and arranged on the inner side of the outline of the light emitting panel 430.

ここで、前面扉2の中段パネル部4内、及び下部パネル部6の上部後面側に、メダル投入部21から投入されたメダルか正規のメダルか否かを判別して振り分けるセレクタ62が設けられ、このセレクタ62とLED基板440とが相互干渉しないように、LED基板440は、その上端が発光パネル430の上端よりも幾分下方に位置するように設けられ、また、LED基板440は、その下端も発光パネル430の下端よりも幾分上方に位置するように設けられている。   Here, a selector 62 is provided in the middle panel portion 4 of the front door 2 and on the upper rear side of the lower panel portion 6 to determine whether or not a medal inserted from the medal insertion portion 21 is a regular medal. In order to prevent the selector 62 and the LED board 440 from interfering with each other, the LED board 440 is provided such that its upper end is located slightly below the upper end of the light emitting panel 430. The lower end is also provided so as to be located somewhat above the lower end of the light emitting panel 430.

このLED基板440の構成上、LED基板440の前面に実装された7個のLED453により、LED基板440の上端側と下端側に位置して正面視にてLED基板440の外側まで延びる7個の帯状光透過部432の前面全体を発光可能に、つまり10個の枝状模様部422の全体を発光可能に、7個の導光バー437が設けられている。   Due to the configuration of the LED substrate 440, seven LEDs 453 mounted on the front surface of the LED substrate 440 are positioned on the upper end side and the lower end side of the LED substrate 440 and extend to the outside of the LED substrate 440 in front view. Seven light guide bars 437 are provided so that the entire front surface of the band-shaped light transmitting portion 432 can emit light, that is, the entire ten branch pattern portions 422 can emit light.

ところで、従来の電飾パネルにおいては、絵柄が印された表面装飾パネルが、その後面側に設けられた光源により単に照明されて、常に同じ発光態様で表示され続けるもの、即ち遊技機を電飾するだけのものであったが、本発明のように、遊技機を電飾し且つ遊技演出を行うことが可能な電飾パネル6において、如何にその電飾パネル6による斬新な電飾を実現して、演出効果を高め得る構成とするかが課題である。   By the way, in the conventional electric decoration panel, the surface decoration panel on which the pattern is marked is simply illuminated by the light source provided on the rear surface side thereof, and is continuously displayed in the same light emitting mode, that is, the gaming machine is electric. However, as in the present invention, in the illumination panel 6 that can be used to decorate the gaming machine and perform the game effect, the novel illumination by the illumination panel 6 is realized. Then, it is a problem whether it is set as the structure which can raise production effect.

そこで、この電飾パネル6によれば、光透過性の有る表面装飾パネル410と、表面装飾パネル410に対してその後面側に積層状に配置され、複数のLED450により発光表示される中央模様部421と、複数のLED451,452により発光表示される複数の枝状模様部422とを有する主発光部材420と、表面装飾パネル410及び主発光部材420に対してその後面側に積層状に配置され、複数のLED450からの光を受けて中央模様部421へ出射する中央光透過部421と、複数のLED451,452からの光を受けて複数の枝状模様部422へ出射する複数の帯状光透過部432と、複数のLED453,454により発光表示される左右の模様部434,435とを有する発光パネル430とを備えた。   Therefore, according to this electrical decoration panel 6, a surface decorative panel 410 having light transmittance, and a central pattern portion that is disposed on the rear surface side of the surface decorative panel 410 in a laminated manner and is lit and displayed by a plurality of LEDs 450. 421 and a plurality of branch-like pattern portions 422 that are lit and displayed by the plurality of LEDs 451 and 452, and are arranged in a stacked manner on the rear surface side with respect to the surface decoration panel 410 and the main light emitting member 420. A central light transmitting portion 421 that receives light from the plurality of LEDs 450 and emits the light to the central pattern portion 421; and a plurality of belt-shaped light transmissions that receive the light from the plurality of LEDs 451 and 452 and emit the light to the plurality of branch-like pattern portions 422. And a light emitting panel 430 having left and right pattern portions 434 and 435 that are light-emitted and displayed by a plurality of LEDs 453 and 454.

従って、発光表示される中央模様部421、複数の枝状模様部422、左右の模様部434,435によって、本回胴式遊技機1を鮮やかに電飾するだけでなく、複数のLED450〜454を制御し、中央模様部421、複数の枝状模様部422、左右の模様部434,435を夫々可変に発光表示させて、電飾パネル6による斬新な電飾を実現して、演出効果が高い遊技演出を行うことが可能になる。しかも、3層構造の表面装飾パネル410、主発光部材420、発光パネル30を備えた電飾パネル6の構成を簡単化し、つまり製造、組立て負荷を軽減して、製作コストを軽減できる。   Therefore, the center-patterned portion 421, the plurality of branch-shaped patterned portions 422, and the left and right patterned portions 434 and 435 not only brightly illuminate the torso-type gaming machine 1 but also a plurality of LEDs 450 to 454. The center pattern portion 421, the plurality of branch-like pattern portions 422, and the left and right pattern portions 434 and 435 are variably light-emitted to realize a novel electric decoration by the electric decoration panel 6, and the production effect is achieved. It becomes possible to perform a high game performance. In addition, the configuration of the electric decoration panel 6 including the surface decoration panel 410 having the three-layer structure, the main light emitting member 420, and the light emitting panel 30 can be simplified, that is, the manufacturing and assembly loads can be reduced, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

更に、発光パネル430に対してその後面側に積層状に配置されたLED基板440を備え、そのLED基板440の前面に複数のLED450〜454が実装されているので、表面装飾パネル410、主発光部材420、発光パネル30と共に、LED基板440及び複数のLED450〜454を互いに組付けて、前後方向の厚さが比較的小さな電飾パネル6を構成することができる。依って、筐体3内の機器に制約を受けずに、電飾パネル6を整然と前面扉2に取付けることが可能になる。   Furthermore, the LED board 440 is provided on the rear surface side of the light emitting panel 430 in a stacked manner, and a plurality of LEDs 450 to 454 are mounted on the front surface of the LED board 440. The LED board 440 and the plurality of LEDs 450 to 454 can be assembled together with the member 420 and the light emitting panel 30 to constitute the electrical decoration panel 6 having a relatively small thickness in the front-rear direction. Therefore, it is possible to orderly attach the electrical decoration panel 6 to the front door 2 without being restricted by the equipment in the housing 3.

中央光透過部431は、発光パネル430の中央側の所定領域に設けられた中央拡散レンズ部431からなり、その中央拡散レンズ部431の前面側に主発光部材420の中央模様部421が配置されているので、その中央模様部421を発光パネル430の中央側において全体的に綺麗に発光表示させることができる。   The central light transmission part 431 includes a central diffusion lens part 431 provided in a predetermined region on the central side of the light emitting panel 430, and the central pattern part 421 of the main light emitting member 420 is disposed on the front side of the central diffusion lens part 431. Therefore, the central pattern portion 421 can be luminescently displayed as a whole on the central side of the light emitting panel 430.

発光パネル430は、中央拡散レンズ部431側から外側へ延びる複数の導光バー437であって、夫々がその端部からLED452の光を導入して前面全体から発光可能な複数の導光バー437を有するので、複数の導光バー437から出射される光を主発光部材420の対応する複数の枝状模様部422に導入させて、それら複数の枝状模様部422を全体的に発光させることができる。   The light emitting panel 430 is a plurality of light guide bars 437 extending outward from the central diffusion lens portion 431 side, and each of the light guide bars 437 can introduce light from the LED 452 from its end and emit light from the entire front surface. Therefore, the light emitted from the plurality of light guide bars 437 is introduced into the corresponding plurality of branch pattern portions 422 of the main light emitting member 420 so that the plurality of branch pattern portions 422 emit light as a whole. Can do.

主発光部材420の複数の枝状模様部422は、中央模様部421から外側へ延び、複数のLED451,452の光により前面全体から発光可能であるので、複数の枝状模様部422を全体的に綺麗に発光表示させることができる。   The plurality of branch-like pattern portions 422 of the main light emitting member 420 extend outward from the central pattern portion 421 and can emit light from the entire front surface by the light of the plurality of LEDs 451 and 452. Can be displayed neatly.

次に、前記実施例1を部分的に変更した別の実施例について説明する。尚、変更点以外の構成については、実施例1と同様であり、同一の符号を付して説明を省略する。 Next, another embodiment in which the first embodiment is partially changed will be described. The configuration other than the changed points is the same as that of the first embodiment, and the same reference numerals are given and description thereof is omitted.

◆[演出役物装置]
実施例2の演出役物装置300は、実施例1の演出役物装置200の代わりに採用されるものであり、可動バー役物8A(可動役物8A)と、可動バー役物8Aを鉛直方向に対して上方ほど前方へ移行するように少し(10〜20度程度)傾く傾斜方向へ移動自在に案内する案内機構105と、可動バー役物8Aを支持して下待機位置(第1位置)と上作動位置(第2位置)とにわたって前記案内機構105による案内方向(前記傾斜方向)へ昇降移動させる第1駆動手段106とを備えている。 The effect accessory device 300 of the second embodiment is adopted in place of the effect accessory device 200 of the first embodiment, and the movable bar accessory 8A (movable accessory 8A) and the movable bar accessory 8A are vertically arranged. A guide mechanism 105 that movably guides in an inclined direction that is slightly tilted (about 10 to 20 degrees) so as to move forward as it moves upward in the direction, and a lower standby position (first position) that supports the movable bar accessory 8A. ) And the upper operating position (second position), the first driving means 106 is provided so as to move up and down in the guide direction (the inclined direction) by the guide mechanism 105. 尚、案内機構105と第1駆動手段106については、実施例1と同様である。 The guide mechanism 105 and the first driving means 106 are the same as those in the first embodiment. ◆ [Director equipment] ◆ [Director equipment]
The stage effect device 300 according to the second embodiment is employed in place of the stage effect device 200 according to the first embodiment. The movable bar combination 8A (movable combination 8A) and the movable bar combination 8A are vertically arranged. The guide mechanism 105 for guiding the movable bar in an inclined direction slightly inclined (about 10 to 20 degrees) so as to move forward in the upward direction with respect to the direction, and the lower standby position (first position) supporting the movable bar accessory 8A ) And an upper operating position (second position), and a first driving means 106 that moves up and down in the guide direction (inclination direction) by the guide mechanism 105. The guide mechanism 105 and the first driving means 106 are the same as those in the first embodiment. The stage effect device 300 according to the second embodiment is employed in place of the stage effect device 200 according to the first embodiment. The movable bar combination 8A (movable combination 8A) and the movable bar combination 8A are vertically arranged. The guide mechanism 105 for guiding the movable bar in an inclined direction slightly inclined (about 10 to 20 degrees) so as to move forward in the upward direction with respect to the direction, and the lower standby position (first position) supporting the movable bar accessory 8A) And an upper operating position (second position), and a first driving means 106 that moves up and down in the guide direction (inclination direction) by the guide mechanism 105. The guide mechanism 105 and the first driving means 106 are the same as those in the first embodiment.

尚、以下の演出役物装置300の説明では、前記傾斜方向を上下方向とし、水平方向に対して前方ほど下方へ移行するように少し(10〜20度程度)傾く(前記傾斜方向と直交する)傾斜方向を前後方向とする。   In the following description of the stage effect apparatus 300, the tilt direction is the up-down direction, and the tilt is slightly (about 10 to 20 degrees) so as to move downward toward the front with respect to the horizontal direction (perpendicular to the tilt direction). ) The inclination direction is the front-rear direction.

図69〜図88に示すように、可動バー役物8Aは、可動役物部材301(可動ベース部材301)を有し、この可動役物部材301に、複数の可動部材302,303,304,305(4個の第1可動部材302、4個の第2可動部材303、1個の第3可動部材304、1個の第4可動部材305)が可動に設けられている。   As shown in FIGS. 69 to 88, the movable bar accessory 8A has a movable accessory member 301 (movable base member 301), and the movable accessory member 301 includes a plurality of movable members 302, 303, 304,. 305 (four first movable members 302, four second movable members 303, one third movable member 304, and one fourth movable member 305) are movably provided.

更に、可動役物部材301には、複数の第1,第2可動部材302,303の基端側を接近させた所定位置である初期位置(図69、図70)から展開位置(図71、図72)まで、複数の第1,第2可動部材302,303の基端側に形成される空間306が拡大していくように、複数の第1,第2可動部材302,303を相互に異なる放射方向へ移動させるとともに、第3,第4可動役物304,305を夫々初期位置(図69、図70)から展開位置(図71、図72)まで移動させる第2駆動手段307(役物駆動手段307)が設けられている。   Further, the movable accessory member 301 is moved from the initial position (FIG. 69, FIG. 70), which is a predetermined position where the proximal ends of the plurality of first and second movable members 302, 303 are approached, to the deployed position (FIG. 71, FIG. 71). 72), the plurality of first and second movable members 302 and 303 are mutually connected so that the space 306 formed on the base end side of the plurality of first and second movable members 302 and 303 is enlarged. The second driving means 307 (the combination) moves the third and fourth movable combinations 304 and 305 from the initial position (FIGS. 69 and 70) to the deployed position (FIGS. 71 and 72) while moving in different radial directions. An object driving means 307) is provided.

この第2駆動手段307は、前記とは逆に、複数の第1,第2可動部材302,303を展開位置(図71、図72)から初期位置(図69、図70)まで相互に異なる方向へ移動させると共に、第3,第4可動役物304,305を夫々展開位置(図71、図72)から初期位置(図69、図70)まで移動させ、つまり、複数の可動部材302,303,304,305を初期位置と展開位置とにわたって移動させることができる。   Contrary to the above, the second driving means 307 differs between the first and second movable members 302 and 303 from the deployed position (FIGS. 71 and 72) to the initial position (FIGS. 69 and 70). And the third and fourth movable accessories 304 and 305 are moved from the deployed position (FIGS. 71 and 72) to the initial position (FIGS. 69 and 70), that is, a plurality of movable members 302 and 305 are moved. 303, 304, and 305 can be moved between the initial position and the deployed position.

このように、可動役物部材301に装備された複数の可動部材302,303,304,305、及び第2駆動手段307が、第1駆動手段106によって可動役物部材301と一体的に下待機位置と上作動位置とにわたって上下方向へ移動駆動される。   As described above, the plurality of movable members 302, 303, 304, 305 and the second driving means 307 mounted on the movable accessory member 301 are in a standby state integrally with the movable accessory member 301 by the first driving means 106. It is driven to move up and down over the position and the upper operating position.

次に、可動役物部材301、複数の可動部材302,303,304,305、第2駆動手段307について詳しく説明する。 Next, the movable accessory member 301, the plurality of movable members 302, 303, 304, 305, and the second driving means 307 will be described in detail.

「可動役物部材」
図69〜図79、図81、図83、図85〜図87に示すように、可動役物部材301は、正面視にて左右方向に長い矩形状に形成された可動ベース本体310と、可動ベース本体310の前面側に配置されて左右に並設された第1,第2スライドベース320,325(第2部材320,325)であって、夫々が正面視にて可動ベース本体310と同じ上下長と約1/2弱の左右長を有する矩形状に形成され、可動ベース本体310に左右方向へ移動自在にガイド支持されて、相対的に移動可能に設けられた第1,第2スライドベース320,325とを有する。 As shown in FIGS. 69 to 79, 81, 83, 85 to 87, the movable accessory member 301 is movable with a movable base body 310 formed in a rectangular shape that is long in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. The first and second slide bases 320 and 325 (second members 320 and 325) are arranged on the front side of the base body 310 and arranged side by side on the left and right, and each is the same as the movable base body 310 in the front view. The first and second slides are formed in a rectangular shape having a vertical length and a left-right length of about 1/2, and are supported by a movable base body 310 so as to be movable in the left-right direction so as to be relatively movable. It has bases 320 and 325. "Moving parts" "Moving parts"
69 to 79, 81, 83, 85 to 87, the movable accessory member 301 includes a movable base body 310 that is formed in a rectangular shape that is long in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. First and second slide bases 320 and 325 (second members 320 and 325) arranged on the front side of the base body 310 and arranged side by side on the left and right sides, respectively, which are the same as the movable base body 310 in a front view. The first and second slides are formed in a rectangular shape having a vertical length and a lateral length of about ½, and are supported by the movable base body 310 so as to be movable in the horizontal direction and are relatively movable. And bases 320 and 325. 69 to 79, 81, 83, 85 to 87, the movable accessory member 301 includes a movable base body 310 that is formed in a rectangular shape that is long in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. First and second slide bases 320 and 325 (second members 320 and 325) arranged on the front side of the base body 310 and arranged side by side on the left and right sides, respectively, which are the same as the movable base body 310 in a front view. First and second slides are formed in a rectangular shape having a vertical length and a lateral length of about ½, and are supported by the movable base body 310 so as to be movable in the horizontal direction and are relatively movable. And bases 320 and 325 ..

可動ベース本体310は、正面視形状が同じ第1〜第3ベース311〜313を有し、第1ベース311(第2部材311)の後側に透明な第2ベース312が取付けられ、第2ベース312の後側に第3ベース313が取付けられ、第1ベース311に1対のスライドベース320,325がガイド支持され、第1,第2ベース311,312に第2駆動手段307が装備され、第3ベース313の左右両端部に、そこから後方へ延びる左右1対のアーム部材101が固定され、これらアーム部材101の後部が、案内機構105と第1駆動手段106により案内支持されて移動駆動される。   The movable base main body 310 has first to third bases 311 to 313 having the same front view shape, and a transparent second base 312 is attached to the rear side of the first base 311 (second member 311). A third base 313 is attached to the rear side of the base 312, a pair of slide bases 320 and 325 are guided and supported on the first base 311, and second driving means 307 is provided on the first and second bases 311 and 312. A pair of left and right arm members 101 extending rearward therefrom are fixed to the left and right ends of the third base 313, and the rear portions of the arm members 101 are guided and supported by the guide mechanism 105 and the first driving means 106. Driven.

第1ベース311には、その中央部分にやや上下に長い6角形状の中央開口311aが形成されている。第2ベース312は、その外周部に後方へ突出する鍔状部312aを有し、その鍔状部312aの後端が第3ベース313の前面に当接し、第2,第3ベース312,313の間に、第2駆動手段307の後述の第1,第2スライド板331,332が夫々可動に収容されるとともに、第1,第2スライド板331,332の後側において、第3,第4可動役物304,305が夫々可動に収容されている。   The first base 311 is formed with a hexagonal central opening 311a that is slightly longer in the vertical direction at the center. The second base 312 has a hook-shaped portion 312 a that protrudes rearward on the outer peripheral portion thereof, and the rear end of the hook-shaped portion 312 a abuts on the front surface of the third base 313, and the second and third bases 312, 313. In the meantime, first and second slide plates 331 and 332, which will be described later, of the second drive means 307 are movably accommodated, and the third and third slide plates 331 and 332 are disposed behind the first and second slide plates 331 and 332, respectively. Four movable accessories 304 and 305 are movably accommodated.

第1,第2スライドベース320,325は、夫々、その外周部に後方へ突出する鍔状部320a,325aを有し、その鍔状部320a,325aの後端が第1ベース311の前面に摺接し、その内部に、LED基板321,326が収容状に固定されるとともに、LED基板321,326の後側において、被ガイド支持板322,327が収容状に固定され、第1,第2スライドベース320,325と第1ベース311の間に、第2駆動手段307の後述の複数の揺動アーム341,342(4個の第1揺動アーム341、4個の第2揺動アーム342)が夫々可動に収容されている。   Each of the first and second slide bases 320 and 325 has hook-shaped portions 320 a and 325 a protruding rearward on the outer peripheral portion thereof, and the rear ends of the hook-shaped portions 320 a and 325 a are formed on the front surface of the first base 311. The LED boards 321 and 326 are fixed in a housing shape in sliding contact therewith, and the guided support plates 322 and 327 are fixed in a housing shape on the rear side of the LED boards 321 and 326, and the first and second Between the slide bases 320 and 325 and the first base 311, a plurality of swing arms 341 and 342 (four first swing arms 341 and four second swing arms 342) to be described later of the second drive unit 307. ) Are movably accommodated.

左側の第1スライドベース320は、被ガイド支持板322に後方突出状に形成された3個のピン323a,323b,323cが、第1ベース311に形成された左右方向に長い3つのガイドスリット324a,324b,324cに夫々摺動自在に係合して、第1ベース311にガイド支持され、右側の第2スライドベース325は、被ガイド支持板327に後方突出状に形成された3個のピン328a,328b,328cが、第1ベース311に形成された左右方向に長い3つのガイドスリット329a,329b,329cに夫々摺動自在に係合して、第1ベース311にガイド支持されている。   The first slide base 320 on the left has three guide slits 324a that are formed in the first base 311 and that have three pins 323a, 323b, and 323c that are formed on the guided support plate 322 so as to protrude rearward. , 324b and 324c are slidably engaged with each other, and are guided and supported by the first base 311. The right second slide base 325 has three pins formed on the guided support plate 327 so as to protrude rearward. 328a, 328b, and 328c are slidably engaged with three guide slits 329a, 329b, and 329c that are formed in the first base 311 in the left-right direction, and are supported by the first base 311 as guides.

「複数の可動部材」
図69〜図74、図76〜図80に示すように、図4個の第1可動部材302及び4個の第2可動部材303は、互いにサイズや形状を異ならせているが、左側2個の第1可動部材302(302-1,302-2)及び左側2個第2可動部材303(303-1,303-2)は、第1スライドベース320の前面側に配置され、右側2個の第1可動部材302(302-3,302-4)及び右側2個の第2可動部材303(303-3,303-4)は、第2スライドベース325の前面側に配置されている。尚、各可動部材302,303の長さ方向両端のうち、可動ベース本体310の中心側に近い方を基端とし、その反対を先端とする。
"Multiple movable parts"
As shown in FIGS. 69 to 74 and FIGS. 76 to 80, the four first movable members 302 and the four second movable members 303 are different in size and shape from each other, but two on the left side. The first movable member 302 (302-1, 302-2) and the two left side second movable members 303 (303-1, 303-2) are disposed on the front side of the first slide base 320, and the two right side members. The first movable member 302 (302-3, 302-4) and the two second movable members 303 (303-3, 303-4) on the right side are disposed on the front side of the second slide base 325. Of the both ends in the length direction of each movable member 302, 303, the one closer to the center side of the movable base body 310 is the base end, and the opposite is the tip. As shown in FIGS. 69 to 74 and FIGS. 76 to 80, the four first movable members 302 and the four second movable members 303 are different in size and shape from each other, but two on the left side. The first movable member 302 (302-1, 302-2) and the two left side second movable members 303 (303-1, 303-2) are disposed on the front side of the first slide base 320, and the two right side members. The first movable member 302 (302-3, 302-4) and the two second movable members 303 (303-3, 303-4) on the right side are disposed on the front side of the second slide base 325. Of the both ends in the length direction of each movable member 302, 303, the one closer to the center side of the movable base body 310 is the base end, and the opposite is the tip.

4個の第1可動部材302及び4個の第2可動部材303は、1個の第1可動部材302と、その1個の第1可動部材302に対応する1個の第2可動部材303とで1つのペアを構成して、4つのペア(302-1と303-1、302-2と303-2、302-3と303-3、302-4と303-4)を構成している。4個の第1可動部材302には、それらの基端部分に後方へ突出する筒状軸部302aが夫々設けられ、4個の第2可動部材303には、それらの基端部分に後方へ突出する軸部303aが夫々設けられている。   The four first movable members 302 and the four second movable members 303 include one first movable member 302 and one second movable member 303 corresponding to the one first movable member 302. Constitutes one pair and constitutes four pairs (302-1 and 303-1; 302-2 and 303-2; 302-3 and 303-3; 302-4 and 303-4). . The four first movable members 302 are respectively provided with cylindrical shaft portions 302a protruding rearward at the base end portions thereof, and the four second movable members 303 are provided rearward at the base end portions thereof. Projecting shaft portions 303a are respectively provided.

左側2個の第1可動部材302は、それらの筒状軸部302aが第1スライドベース320の右端側部分に前後貫通状に形成された上下2つの軸孔320bに夫々摺動自在に内嵌されて、第1スライドベース320に夫々回動自在(可動)に連結され、右側2個の第1可動部材302は、それらの筒状軸部302aが第2スライドベース325の左端側部分に前後貫通状に形成された上下2つの軸孔325bに夫々摺動自在に内嵌されて、右側のスライドベース325に夫々回動自在(可動)に連結されている。   The two first movable members 302 on the left side are slidably fitted into two upper and lower shaft holes 320b in which the cylindrical shaft portions 302a are formed in the right end side portion of the first slide base 320 so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction. The two first movable members 302 on the right side are connected to the first slide base 320 so as to be freely rotatable (movable), and the cylindrical shaft portions 302a thereof are moved back and forth on the left end side portion of the second slide base 325. The upper and lower shaft holes 325b formed in a penetrating manner are slidably fitted in the upper and lower shaft holes 325b, respectively, and are connected to the right slide base 325 so as to be rotatable (movable).

左側2個の第2可動部材303は、それらの軸状部303aが左側2個の第1可動部材302の筒状軸部302aに夫々摺動自在に内嵌されて、それら筒状軸部302aを介して、第1スライドベース320に夫々回動自在に支持され、右側2個の第2可動部材303は、それらの軸状部303aが右側2個の第1可動部材302の筒状軸部302aに夫々摺動自在に内嵌されて、それら筒状軸部302aを介して、第2スライドベース325に夫々回動自在に支持されている。   The two second movable members 303 on the left side are slidably fitted into the cylindrical shaft portions 302a of the two left first movable members 302 so that the shaft portions 303a thereof are slidably fitted into the cylindrical shaft portions 302a. The two second movable members 303 on the right side are respectively supported by the first slide base 320 so that the shaft portions 303a thereof are cylindrical shaft portions of the two right movable members 302. Each of them is slidably fitted in 302a, and is supported by the second slide base 325 through the cylindrical shaft portion 302a so as to be rotatable.

このように、左側2つのペア(合計4個)の第1,第2可動部材302,303は、第1スライドベース320と一体的に左右方向へ移動可能に、また、右側2つのペア(合計4個)の第1,第2可動部材302,303は、第2スライドベース325と一体的に左右方向へ移動可能に、そして、各ペアの第1,第2可動部材302,303は、他の第1,第2可動部材302,303と異なる軸心であって、同じ前後方向の軸心回りに独立に(つまり相対的に)回動可能に設けられている。   As described above, the first and second movable members 302 and 303 of the left two pairs (four in total) are movable in the left-right direction integrally with the first slide base 320, and the two right pairs (total) (Four) first and second movable members 302 and 303 are movable in the left-right direction integrally with the second slide base 325, and each pair of first and second movable members 302 and 303 has other The first and second movable members 302 and 303 are different from each other, and are provided so as to be able to rotate independently (that is, relatively) around the same longitudinal axis.

図69〜図76、図78、図79、図83、図85〜図88に示すように、第3可動部材304は、可動ベース本体310の第2,第3ベース312,313の右部間に、第1,第2スライド板331,332の後側において可動に、且つ可動ベース本体310から突出可能に収容され、その基端部分が前後方向の軸304aを介して第2ベース312に回動自在に支持されている。尚、第3可動部材304の長さ方向両端のうち、可動ベース本体310の中心側に近い方を基端とし、その反対を先端とする。   As shown in FIGS. 69 to 76, 78, 79, 83, and 85 to 88, the third movable member 304 is between the right parts of the second and third bases 312 and 313 of the movable base body 310. The first and second slide plates 331 and 332 are accommodated movably on the rear side of the movable base body 310 so as to protrude from the movable base body 310, and the base end portion of the first and second slide plates 331 and 332 is rotated to the second base 312 via the shaft 304a in the front-rear direction. It is supported freely. Of the both ends in the length direction of the third movable member 304, the one closer to the center side of the movable base body 310 is the base end, and the opposite is the tip.

図70〜図72、図74、図76〜図79、図81、図83、図85〜図88に示すように、第4可動部材305は、第1ベース311の中央開口311aと相似形で、且つ中央開口311aよりも大きな6角形状に形成されて、可動ベース本体310の第2,第3ベース312,313の中央部間に、第1スライド板331の後側において可動に、且つ可動ベース本体310から突出可能に収容され、その中心部分が前後方向の軸305aを介して第2ベース312に回動自在に支持されている。   As shown in FIGS. 70 to 72, 74, 76 to 79, 81, 83, and 85 to 88, the fourth movable member 305 is similar to the central opening 311 a of the first base 311. In addition, it is formed in a hexagonal shape larger than the central opening 311a, and is movable and movable between the central portions of the second and third bases 312 and 313 of the movable base body 310 on the rear side of the first slide plate 331. It is accommodated so as to protrude from the base main body 310, and its central portion is rotatably supported by the second base 312 via a shaft 305a in the front-rear direction.

図69、図70に示すように、4個の第1可動部材302及び4個の第2可動部材303が初期位置にあるとき、それらの略全部が水平姿勢になって可動役物部材301の前面側に位置し、部分的に前後に重なりあい、それらの基端部が密接状になって、それらの基端側に空間306は形成されない。また、第3可動部材304が初期位置にあるとき、その大部分が可動ベース本体310内に位置するとともに、上側部分が可動ベース本体310から上方へ突出し、そのために、第2ベース312にその鍔状部312aの上右部を切欠いて突出穴312bが形成され、第5可動部材305が初期位置にあるとき、左右方向に長い横向き姿勢になって、その全体が可動ベース本体310内に位置する。   As shown in FIGS. 69 and 70, when the four first movable members 302 and the four second movable members 303 are in the initial position, almost all of them are in a horizontal posture and the movable accessory member 301 It is located on the front side, partially overlaps with the front and back, and the base ends thereof are in close contact with each other, and the space 306 is not formed on the base end side. Further, when the third movable member 304 is in the initial position, most of the third movable member 304 is located in the movable base main body 310 and the upper portion protrudes upward from the movable base main body 310. When the fifth movable member 305 is in the initial position when the fifth movable member 305 is in the initial position, the upper portion of the shape portion 312a is cut out, and the posture is long in the left-right direction, and the entirety is located in the movable base body 310. .

図70、図71に示すように、4個の第1可動部材302及び4個の第2可動部材303が展開位置にあるとき、放射状に広がって、その大部分が可動役物部材301の前面側よりも外側に位置し、それらの基端側に空間306が形成され、その空間306から第1ベース311の中央開口311aの大部分を前方へ露出させる。また、第3可動部材304が展開位置にあるとき、その大部分が可動ベース本体310から下方へ突出し、そのために、第2ベース312にその鍔状部312aの下右部を切欠いて突出穴312cが形成され、第5可動部材305が展開位置にあるとき、上下方向に長い縦向き姿勢になって、その上側部分と下側部分が可動ベース本体310から上方と下方へ突出し、そのために、第2ベース312にその鍔状部312aの上中央部と下中央部を切欠いて突出穴312d,312eが形成されている。   As shown in FIGS. 70 and 71, when the four first movable members 302 and the four second movable members 303 are in the unfolded position, they spread radially and most of the front surface of the movable accessory member 301. Spaces 306 are formed on the base end sides thereof, and most of the central opening 311a of the first base 311 is exposed forward from the space 306. When the third movable member 304 is in the unfolded position, most of the third movable member 304 protrudes downward from the movable base main body 310. For this reason, the lower right portion of the hook-shaped portion 312a is notched in the second base 312, and the protruding hole 312c. When the fifth movable member 305 is in the unfolded position, the vertically movable posture is long and the upper and lower portions protrude upward and downward from the movable base main body 310. The two bases 312 are formed with projecting holes 312d and 312e by notching the upper central portion and the lower central portion of the flange-shaped portion 312a.

4個の第1可動部材302、4個の第2可動部材303、第3可動部材304、及び第4可動部材305が、第2駆動手段307により初期位置から展開位置へ移動する過程で、図73、図74に示すように、先ず、左下の第1,第2可動部材304,305と第3可動部材304だけが移動して展開途中位置になり、第1,第2可動部材304,305が展開途中位置にあるときに、それらが左方ほど下方へ移行するように少し(10度程度)傾く傾斜姿勢になって、部分的に可動役物部材301の前面側よりも外側に位置し、第3可動部材304が展開途中位置にあるときに、その約半分が可動ベース本体310から下方へ突出する。   In the process in which the four first movable members 302, the four second movable members 303, the third movable member 304, and the fourth movable member 305 are moved from the initial position to the deployed position by the second driving means 307, FIG. 73, as shown in FIG. 74, first, only the lower left first and second movable members 304 and 305 and the third movable member 304 are moved to a deployment middle position, and the first and second movable members 304 and 305 are moved. Are in an inflated position, they are inclined slightly (about 10 degrees) so that they move downward toward the left, and are partially located outside the front side of the movable accessory member 301. When the third movable member 304 is in the unfolded position, about half of the third movable member 304 protrudes downward from the movable base body 310.

このとき、4個の第1可動部材302、4個の第2可動部材303、及び第3可動部材304は、「拳銃」を側方から見た形状になり、4個の第1可動部材302及び4個の第2可動部材303により「拳銃」の本体が、第3可動部材304により「拳銃」のグリップが形成される。一方、4個の第1可動部材302、4個の第2可動部材303、第3可動部材304、及び第4可動部材305が、展開位置になると、一転、「拳銃」を前方から見た形状になり、第1ベース311の中央開口311a及び第4可動部材304により「拳銃」の銃口が形成され、4個の第1可動部材302、4個の第2可動部材303、及び第3可動部材304により「拳銃」を撃った際の火花が形成される。   At this time, the four first movable members 302, the four second movable members 303, and the third movable member 304 have a shape when the “handgun” is viewed from the side, and the four first movable members 302 are formed. The four second movable members 303 form a “handgun” body, and the third movable member 304 forms a “handgun” grip. On the other hand, when the four first movable members 302, the four second movable members 303, the third movable member 304, and the fourth movable member 305 are in the unfolded position, the shape of the “handgun” viewed from the front is changed. A muzzle of “handgun” is formed by the central opening 311a of the first base 311 and the fourth movable member 304, and the four first movable members 302, the four second movable members 303, and the third movable member. In 304, a spark when a “handgun” is shot is formed.

「第2駆動手段」
図81、図83〜図88に示すように、第2駆動手段307は、4個の第1可動部材302及び4個の第2可動部材303を初期位置と展開位置とにわたって移動させるために、可動ベース本体310(第1ベース311)に対して第1,第2スライドベース320,325を左右方向へ相対的に、且つ第1,第2スライドベース320,325を互いに反対方向へ移動させる移動手段330と、移動手段330による可動ベース本体310に対する第1,第2スライドベース320,325の相対的な移動を4個の第1可動部材302及び4個の第2可動部材303の初期位置から展開位置(放射方向)への移動、又は、展開位置から初期位置への移動に変換する作動変換手段340とを有する。 As shown in FIGS. 81 and 83 to 88, the second driving means 307 is used to move the four first movable members 302 and the four second movable members 303 between the initial position and the deployed position. Movement to move the first and second slide bases 320 and 325 relative to the movable base body 310 (first base 311) in the left-right direction and the first and second slide bases 320 and 325 in opposite directions. The relative movement of the means 330 and the first and second slide bases 320 and 325 with respect to the movable base body 310 by the moving means 330 is performed from the initial positions of the four first movable members 302 and the four second movable members 303. It has an operation conversion means 340 that converts the movement to the deployment position (radiation direction) or the movement from the deployment position to the initial position. "Second drive means" "Second drive means"
As shown in FIGS. 81 and 83 to 88, the second driving unit 307 moves the four first movable members 302 and the four second movable members 303 over the initial position and the deployed position. Movement for moving the first and second slide bases 320 and 325 in the left-right direction and the first and second slide bases 320 and 325 in opposite directions with respect to the movable base body 310 (first base 311). The relative movement of the first and second slide bases 320 and 325 with respect to the movable base body 310 by the means 330 and the moving means 330 from the initial positions of the four first movable members 302 and the four second movable members 303. And an operation converting means 340 for converting the movement to the deployment position (radial direction) or the movement from the deployment position to the initial position. As shown in FIGS. 81 and 83 to 88, the second driving unit 307 moves the four first movable members 302 and the four second movable members 303 over the initial position and the deployed position. Movement for moving the first and second slide bases 320 and 325 in the left-right direction and the first and second slide bases 320 and 325 in opposite directions with respect to the movable base body 310 (first base 311). The relative movement of the first and second slide bases 320 and 325 with respect to The movable base body 310 by the means 330 and the moving means 330 from the initial positions of the four first movable members 302 and the four second movable members 303. And an operation converting means 340 for converting the movement to the deployment position (radial direction) ) Or the movement from the deployment position to the initial position.

移動手段330は、第1,第2スライド板331,332と、第1スライド板331を左右方向へ移動させる電動モータ333と、第1,第2スライド板331,332を連動連結して、第2スライド板332を左右方向へ、且つ第1スライド板331の移動方向と反対方向へ移動させるラック・ピニオン334とを有する。   The moving unit 330 interlocks and connects the first and second slide plates 331 and 332, the electric motor 333 that moves the first slide plate 331 in the left-right direction, and the first and second slide plates 331 and 332. 2 has a rack and pinion 334 for moving the slide plate 332 in the left-right direction and in the direction opposite to the moving direction of the first slide plate 331.

第1,第2スライド板331,332は、第2,第3ベース312,313の間に収容され、第1スライド板331は第2スライド板332よりも大きいサイズに形成され、第1スライド板331の下右部の上側に第2スライド板332が配置されている。第1,第2スライド板331,332は、夫々左右方向へ移動自在に第2ベース312にガイド支持されている。   The first and second slide plates 331 and 332 are accommodated between the second and third bases 312 and 313, and the first slide plate 331 is formed to be larger than the second slide plate 332, and the first slide plate A second slide plate 332 is disposed above the lower right portion of 331. The first and second slide plates 331 and 332 are supported by the second base 312 so as to be movable in the left-right direction.

第1スライドベース320側のピン323aの後端部が第1スライド板331に固定されて、第1スライドベース320と第1スライド板331が一体的に移動し、第2スライドベース325側のピン328aの後端部が第2スライド板332に固定されて、第2スライドベース325と第2スライド板332が一体的に移動する。尚、第1,第2ベース311,312には、ピン323a,328aが夫々貫通状に摺動自在に係合する左右方向に長いガイドスリット324d,329dが形成されている。   The rear end portion of the pin 323a on the first slide base 320 side is fixed to the first slide plate 331, the first slide base 320 and the first slide plate 331 move together, and the pin on the second slide base 325 side The rear end portion of 328a is fixed to the second slide plate 332, and the second slide base 325 and the second slide plate 332 move integrally. The first and second bases 311 and 312 are formed with guide slits 324d and 329d that are long in the left-right direction, and the pins 323a and 328a are slidably engaged with each other in a penetrating manner.

電動モータ333は、第1,第2ベース311,312の左部に前後貫通状に後向き姿勢で取付けられ、電動モータ333の出力軸に固着されたピニオン333aが、第1スライド板331に形成されたラック333bに噛合している。   The electric motor 333 is attached to the left part of the first and second bases 311 and 312 in a back-and-forth manner in a rearward posture, and a pinion 333 a fixed to the output shaft of the electric motor 333 is formed on the first slide plate 331. Is engaged with the rack 333b.

ラック・ピニオン334は、第1スライド板331の下右部と第2スライド板332の間に配置されて、第1ベース311に回転自在に支持されたピニオン334aと、第1,第2スライド板331,322に形成されてピニオン334aが噛合するラック334b,334cとを有する。尚、第2ベース312には、ピニオン334aが干渉しないように配置される円形孔334dが形成されている。   The rack and pinion 334 is disposed between the lower right portion of the first slide plate 331 and the second slide plate 332 and is rotatably supported by the first base 311 and the first and second slide plates. And racks 334b and 334c which are formed on 331 and 322 and mesh with the pinion 334a. The second base 312 is formed with a circular hole 334d arranged so that the pinion 334a does not interfere.

作動変換手段340は、4個の第1可動部材302及び4個の第2可動部材303を相互に異なる方向へ揺動させ、その際、4個の第2可動部材303を4個の第1可動部材302よりも大きく揺動させることで、4個の第1可動部材302及び4個の第2可動部材303を放射方向へ移動させる。   The action converting means 340 swings the four first movable members 302 and the four second movable members 303 in different directions, and at this time, the four second movable members 303 are moved to the four first movable members 303. By swinging larger than the movable member 302, the four first movable members 302 and the four second movable members 303 are moved in the radial direction.

作動変換手段340は、前記のように、第1,第2スライドベース320,325と第1ベース311の間に可動に収容された4個の第1揺動アーム341及び4個の第2揺動アーム342であって、4個の第1可動部材302に夫々一体的に連結された4個の第1揺動アーム341と、4個の第2可動部材303に夫々一体的に連結された4個の第2揺動アーム342と、第1ベース311に形成され4個の第1揺動アーム341が夫々係合する4個の第1カム溝343と、第1ベース311に形成され4個の第2揺動アーム342が夫々係合する4個の第2カム溝344とを有する。   As described above, the operation converting means 340 includes the four first swing arms 341 and the four second swing arms movably accommodated between the first and second slide bases 320 and 325 and the first base 311. The movable arms 342 are integrally connected to the four first movable arms 341 integrally connected to the four first movable members 302 and the four second movable members 303, respectively. Four second swing arms 342, four first cam grooves 343 formed on the first base 311 and engaged with the four first swing arms 341, respectively, and formed on the first base 311 4 Each of the second swing arms 342 has four second cam grooves 344 to be engaged.

4個の第1可動部材302の筒状軸部302aの後端部が、4個の第1揺動アーム341の基端側部分に夫々固着され、4個の第1揺動アーム341の先端部分に後方突出状に設けられた従動子341aが4個の第1カム溝343に夫々摺動自在に係合し、また、4個の第2可動部材303の軸部303aの後端部が、4個の第2揺動アーム342の基端側部分に夫々固着され、4個の第2揺動アーム342の先端部分に後方突出状に設けられた従動子342aが4個の第2カム溝344に夫々摺動自在に係合している。尚、各揺動アーム341,342の長さ方向両端のうち、可動ベース本体310の中心側に近い方を基端とし、その反対を先端とする。   The rear end portions of the cylindrical shaft portions 302a of the four first movable members 302 are fixed to the proximal end portions of the four first swing arms 341, respectively, and the tips of the four first swing arms 341 are fixed. A follower 341a provided in a protruding manner in the part is slidably engaged with each of the four first cam grooves 343, and the rear end portions of the shaft portions 303a of the four second movable members 303 are The followers 342a fixed to the proximal end portions of the four second swing arms 342 and provided in a protruding manner at the distal end portions of the four second swing arms 342 have four second cams. The grooves 344 are slidably engaged with each other. Of the both ends of the swing arms 341 and 342 in the length direction, the base end closer to the center of the movable base body 310 is the base end, and the opposite is the front end.

各ペアの第1,第2可動部材302,303の筒状軸部302aと軸部303aは、同軸上にあり、故に、各ペアの第1,第2可動部材302,303に対応する第1,第2揺動アームの少なくとも前後に重なりあった基端側部分に夫々固着されている。   The cylindrical shaft portion 302a and the shaft portion 303a of each pair of the first and second movable members 302 and 303 are coaxial, and therefore the first corresponding to the first and second movable members 302 and 303 of each pair. , The second rocking arm is fixed to at least the proximal end portion overlapped in the front-rear direction.

つまり、第1,第2スライドベース320,325が互いに離隔する方向へ移動すると、第1スライドベース320と一体的に移動する左側2個の第1可動部材302の筒状軸部302a及び左側2個の第2可動部材303の軸部303aと、第2スライドベース325と一体的に移動する右側2個の第1可動部材302の筒状軸部302a及び右側2個の第2可動部材303の軸部303aとの間の間隔が広がるとともに、4個の第1揺動アーム341と、それの従動子341aが係合する4個の第1カム溝343、及び4個の第2揺動アーム342と、それら従動子342aが係合する4個の第2カム溝344によって、4個の第1可動部材302及び4個の第2可動部材303が放射方向へ揺動して、前記空間306が拡大する。   That is, when the first and second slide bases 320 and 325 move away from each other, the cylindrical shaft portions 302a and the left side 2 of the two left first movable members 302 that move integrally with the first slide base 320 are moved. Shaft portions 303 a of the second movable members 303, the cylindrical shaft portions 302 a of the two right movable first members 302 that move integrally with the second slide base 325, and the two right movable members 303. While the space between the shaft portion 303a is widened, the four first swing arms 341, the four first cam grooves 343 engaged with the followers 341a thereof, and the four second swing arms. The four first movable members 302 and the four second movable members 303 are swung in the radial direction by the four second cam grooves 344 with which the followers 342a and the followers 342a engage with each other. Expands.

逆に、第1,第2スライドベース320,325が互いに接近する方向へ移動すると、第1スライドベース320と一体的に移動する左側2個の第1可動部材302の筒状軸部302a及び左側2個の第2可動部材303の軸部303aと、第2スライドベース325と一体的に移動する右側2個の第1可動部材302の筒状軸部302a及び右側2個の第2可動部材303の軸部303aとの間の間隔が狭まるとともに、4個の第1揺動アーム341と、それの従動子341aが係合する4個の第1カム溝343、及び4個の第2揺動アーム342と、それら従動子342aが係合する4個の第2カム溝344によって、4個の第1可動部材302及び4個の第2可動部材303が放射方向と逆方向へ揺動して、前記空間306が縮小する。   On the contrary, when the first and second slide bases 320 and 325 move toward each other, the cylindrical shaft portion 302a and the left side of the two left first movable members 302 that move integrally with the first slide base 320 are moved. The shaft portions 303a of the two second movable members 303, the cylindrical shaft portions 302a of the two right-side first movable members 302 that move integrally with the second slide base 325, and the two right-side second movable members 303. As the distance between the shaft portion 303a and the first swing arm 341 decreases, the four first swing arms 341, the four first cam grooves 343 with which the follower 341a engages, and the four second swing arms. The four first movable members 302 and the four second movable members 303 swing in the direction opposite to the radial direction by the arms 342 and the four second cam grooves 344 with which the followers 342a engage. The space 306 shrinks

但し、4個の第1可動部材302、及び4個の第2可動部材303が初期位置にある状態から、第1,第2スライドベース320,325が互いに離隔する方向へ移動する際、先ず、4個の第1可動部材302及び4個の第2可動部材303のうち、左下の第1,第2可動部材302,303だけが揺動して展開途中位置に切り換わるように、4個の第1カム溝343、及び4個の第2カム溝344が形成されている。   However, when the first and second slide bases 320 and 325 move away from each other from the state where the four first movable members 302 and the four second movable members 303 are in the initial positions, first, Of the four first movable members 302 and the four second movable members 303, only four lower left first and second movable members 302 and 303 swing so as to switch to a deployment middle position. A first cam groove 343 and four second cam grooves 344 are formed.

また、作動変換手段340は、移動手段330による可動ベース本体310に対する第1スライドベース320(第1スライド板331)の相対的な移動を、第3可動部材304の初期位置から展開位置への移動、又は、展開位置から初期位置への移動に変換すると共に、第4可動部材305の初期位置から展開位置への移動、又は、展開位置から初期位置への移動に変換する。   Further, the operation converting means 340 moves the relative movement of the first slide base 320 (first slide plate 331) relative to the movable base main body 310 by the moving means 330 from the initial position of the third movable member 304 to the deployed position. Alternatively, the movement is converted from the deployment position to the initial position, and the fourth movable member 305 is converted from the initial position to the deployment position, or from the deployment position to the initial position.

そのために、この作動変換手段340は、第3可動部材304にその軸304aと偏心した位置に設けられた従動子304bと、この従動子304bが摺動自在に係合するように第1スライド板331に形成されたカム溝304cと、第4可動部材305にその軸305aと偏心した位置に設けられた従動子305bと、この従動子305bが摺動自在に係合するように第1スライド板331に形成されたカム溝305cとを有する。   For this purpose, the operation converting means 340 includes a follower 304b provided at a position eccentric to the shaft 304a of the third movable member 304, and a first slide plate so that the follower 304b is slidably engaged. 331, a cam groove 304c formed in 331, a follower 305b provided at a position eccentric to the shaft 305a of the fourth movable member 305, and the first slide plate so that the follower 305b is slidably engaged. 331 and cam groove 305c formed in 331.

但し、第3,第4可動部材304,305が初期位置にある状態から、第1,第2スライドベース320,325が互いに離隔する方向へ移動する際、先ず、第3,第4可動部材304,305のうち、第3可動部材304だけが揺動して展開途中位置に切り換わるように、カム溝304c,305cが形成されている。   However, when the first and second slide bases 320 and 325 move away from each other from the initial position of the third and fourth movable members 304 and 305, first, the third and fourth movable members 304 are moved. , 305, cam grooves 304c and 305c are formed so that only the third movable member 304 swings and switches to the unfolding position.

ところで、従来の多くの遊技機には、遊技演出用の可動役物を有する演出役物装置が装備されているが、本発明のように、複数の可動部材302,303を有する演出役物装置300において、如何にそれら可動部材202,203の斬新な動作を実現して、演出効果を高め得る遊技演出を行うことができるかが課題である。   By the way, although many conventional gaming machines are equipped with a rendering agent device having a movable accessory for game rendering, as in the present invention, a rendering agent device having a plurality of movable members 302 and 303. In 300, it is a problem how to achieve a game effect that can realize a novel operation of the movable members 202 and 203 and enhance the effect.

そこで、この演出役物装置300によれば、第2駆動手段307により、複数の可動部材302,303の基端側を接近させた初期位置から、これら複数の可動部材302,303の基端側に形成される空間306が拡大していくように、複数の可動部材302,303を相互に異なる放射方向へ移動させるようにしたので、複数の可動部材302,303の斬新な動作を実現して、演出効果を高め得る遊技演出を行うことが可能になる。   Therefore, according to this stage effect device 300, the base end side of the plurality of movable members 302, 303 is moved from the initial position where the base end sides of the plurality of movable members 302, 303 are approached by the second driving means 307. Since the plurality of movable members 302 and 303 are moved in mutually different radial directions so that the space 306 formed in FIG. 3 expands, a novel operation of the plurality of movable members 302 and 303 is realized. Therefore, it is possible to perform a game effect that can enhance the effect.

この場合、相対的に移動可能な第1ベース311とスライドベース320,325とに、複数の可動部材302,303を可動に連結し、第2駆動手段307は、スライドベース320,325を第1ベース311に対して相対的に移動させる移動手段330と、移動手段330による第1ベース311に対するスライドベース320,325の相対的な移動を複数の可動部材302,303の初期位置から放射方向への移動に変換する作動変換手段340とを有し、更に、作動変換手段340は、複数の第1可動部材302を揺動させると共に、複数の第2可動部材303を複数の第1可動部材302よりも大きく揺動させるので、複数の可動部材302,303の放射方向への移動を確実に実現できる。   In this case, a plurality of movable members 302 and 303 are movably coupled to the first base 311 and the slide bases 320 and 325 that are relatively movable, and the second drive unit 307 connects the slide bases 320 and 325 to the first base 311 and the slide bases 320 and 325. A moving means 330 that moves relative to the base 311 and a relative movement of the slide bases 320 and 325 relative to the first base 311 by the moving means 330 from the initial positions of the plurality of movable members 302 and 303 in the radial direction. An action converting means 340 for converting the movement into movement, and the action converting means 340 swings the plurality of first movable members 302 and moves the plurality of second movable members 303 from the plurality of first movable members 302. Since the plurality of movable members 302 and 303 can be reliably moved in the radial direction.

尚、前記の複数可動部材302,303及び第2駆動手段307の代わりに、次の複数の可動部材及び第2駆動手段を採用してもよい。図示省略するが、その複数の可動部材は、可動役物部材301ベース部材に装着された複数の第1可動部材を有し、その第2駆動手段は、複数の第1可動部材と可動役物部材301とを夫々連結する複数の第1リンク機構と、複数の第1リンク機構を作動させて、複数の第1可動部材を揺動させる為のスライド部材とを有する。   Instead of the plurality of movable members 302 and 303 and the second driving means 307, the following plurality of movable members and second driving means may be employed. Although not shown in the drawings, the plurality of movable members include a plurality of first movable members mounted on the base member of the movable accessory member 301, and the second driving means includes the plurality of first movable members and the movable accessory. A plurality of first link mechanisms that respectively connect the members 301 and a slide member that operates the plurality of first link mechanisms to swing the plurality of first movable members.

この場合、その複数の可動部材は、複数の第1可動部材に夫々回動自在に装着された複数の第2可動部材を有し、その第2駆動手段は、第1リンク機構の作動により第1可動部材に対して第2可動部材を相対的に揺動させるように、複数の第2可動部材と複数の第1リンク機構とを夫々連結する複数の第2リンク機構を有する。   In this case, the plurality of movable members have a plurality of second movable members rotatably mounted on the plurality of first movable members, respectively, and the second driving means is operated by the first link mechanism. There are a plurality of second link mechanisms that connect the plurality of second movable members and the plurality of first link mechanisms, respectively, so as to swing the second movable member relative to the one movable member.

◆[電飾パネル]
実施例3の電飾パネル6Aは、実施例1の電飾パネル6の代わりに採用されるものであり、筐体3の前面部を開閉する前面扉2において、リール11,12,13の表示窓4aを形成する中段パネル部4の下側部分に設けられ、遊技機を電飾し且つ遊技演出を行うことが可能である。
◆ [Lighting Panel]
The electrical panel 6A according to the third embodiment is employed instead of the electrical panel 6 according to the first embodiment. In the front door 2 that opens and closes the front surface of the housing 3, the reels 11, 12, and 13 are displayed. It is provided in the lower part of the middle panel portion 4 that forms the window 4a, and it is possible to illuminate the gaming machine and perform a game effect.

図89、図90に示すように、電飾パネル6Aは、その本体部となる電飾装置500と、電飾装置500をカバーするパネルカバー501と、電飾装置500及びパネルカバー501を保持するパネル保持枠502とを有する。   As shown in FIGS. 89 and 90, the electrical decoration panel 6 </ b> A holds an electrical decoration device 500 that is a main body portion thereof, a panel cover 501 that covers the electrical decoration device 500, and the electrical decoration device 500 and the panel cover 501. And a panel holding frame 502.

電飾装置500は、正面視にて左右長が上下長よりも長い(上下長の約3倍の)矩形状に形成されて、前後に多少の厚みを有する。パネルカバー501は、電飾装置500の前面をカバーする透明カバー板部501aと、電飾装置500の外周をカバーする外周カバー部501bとを有し、パネル保持枠502は、パネルカバー501の外周カバー部501bに外嵌される外周枠部502aと、パネルカバー501の透明カバー板部501aの外周近傍の前面部分に前側から当接する前面枠部502bとを有する。尚、パネルカバー501及びパネル保持枠502は、横断面にて僅かに前方へ膨らむように反る湾曲形状に形成されている。   The electrical decoration device 500 is formed in a rectangular shape whose left and right length is longer than the top and bottom length (about three times the top and bottom length) when viewed from the front, and has a certain thickness in the front and rear. The panel cover 501 has a transparent cover plate portion 501 a that covers the front surface of the electrical decoration device 500 and an outer peripheral cover portion 501 b that covers the outer periphery of the electrical decoration device 500, and the panel holding frame 502 is an outer periphery of the panel cover 501. An outer peripheral frame portion 502a that is externally fitted to the cover portion 501b, and a front frame portion 502b that comes into contact with the front surface portion of the panel cover 501 near the outer periphery of the transparent cover plate portion 501a from the front side. The panel cover 501 and the panel holding frame 502 are formed in a curved shape that warps so as to slightly swell forward in the cross section.

電飾装置500について詳しく説明する。
図89〜図99に示すように、電飾装置500は、発光パネル510(発光部材510)と、発光パネル510の左右両部の前面(表面)側に積層状に配置された左装飾板520、及び右装飾板530と、発光パネル510の中央側に設けられた中央発光ユニット540と、発光パネル510の後面(裏面)側に積層状に設けられた複数組(16組)の導光バー550と、発光パネル510、中央発光ユニット540、及び複数の導光バー550の後面側に積層状に配置されたLED基板560と、LED基板560の前面に実装された複数のLED570(第1光源)、複数のLED571(第2光源)、及び複数のLED572,573,574(第3光源)とを有する。 As shown in FIGS. 89 to 99, the lighting device 500 includes a light emitting panel 510 (light emitting member 510) and a left decorative plate 520 arranged in a laminated manner on the front (surface) sides of both the left and right portions of the light emitting panel 510. , And the right decorative plate 530, the central light emitting unit 540 provided on the center side of the light emitting panel 510, and a plurality of sets (16 sets) of light guide bars provided in a laminated manner on the rear surface (back surface) side of the light emitting panel 510. The 550, the light emitting panel 510, the central light emitting unit 540, the LED substrate 560 arranged in a stacked manner on the rear surface side of the plurality of light guide bars 550, and the plurality of LEDs 570 (first light source) mounted on the front surface of the LED substrate 560. ), A plurality of LEDs 571 (second light source), and a plurality of LEDs 527,573,574 (third light source). 尚、各LEDはカラー発光可能なものである。 It should be noted that each LED is capable of emitting color. The illumination device 500 will be described in detail. The illumination device 500 will be described in detail.
As shown in FIGS. 89 to 99, the electrical decoration device 500 includes a light emitting panel 510 (light emitting member 510) and a left decorative plate 520 arranged in a stacked manner on the front (front) side of both left and right portions of the light emitting panel 510. And the right decorative plate 530, the central light emitting unit 540 provided on the center side of the light emitting panel 510, and a plurality of sets (16 sets) of light guide bars provided in a stacked manner on the rear surface (back surface) side of the light emitting panel 510. 550, a light emitting panel 510, a central light emitting unit 540, an LED substrate 560 disposed in a stacked manner on the rear surface side of the plurality of light guide bars 550, and a plurality of LEDs 570 (first light source) mounted on the front surface of the LED substrate 560. ), A plurality of LEDs 571 (second light source), and a plurality of LEDs 572, 573, 574 (third light source). Each LED can emit color light. As shown in FIGS. 89 to 99, the electrical decoration device 500 includes a light emitting panel 510 (light emitting member 510) and a left decorative plate 520 arranged in a stacked manner on the front (front) side of both left and right portions. of the light emitting panel 510. And the right decorative plate 530, the central light emitting unit 540 provided on the center side of the light emitting panel 510, and a plurality of sets (16 sets) of light guide bars provided in a stacked manner on the rear surface (back surface) side of the light emitting panel 510. 550, a light emitting panel 510, a central light emitting unit 540, an LED substrate 560 disposed in a stacked manner on the rear surface side of the plurality of light guide bars 550, and a plurality of LEDs 570 (first light source) mounted on the front surface of the LED substrate 560.), A plurality of LEDs 571 (second light source), and a plurality of LEDs 572, 573, 574 ( third light source). Each LED can emit color light.

発光パネル510、左右の装飾板520,530、中央発光ユニット540、複数の導光バー550、及びLED基板560は、複数のビス(場合により接着剤)等の固定手段により互いに固定され、一体化された電飾装置500が構成されている。   The light emitting panel 510, the left and right decorative plates 520 and 530, the central light emitting unit 540, the plurality of light guide bars 550, and the LED substrate 560 are fixed to each other by fixing means such as a plurality of screws (adhesive in some cases). The illuminated electrical device 500 is configured.

図89〜図95、図98、図99に示すように、発光パネル510は、正面視にてその外形が電飾装置500の外形をなす矩形状に形成され、その前面は横断面にて僅かに前方へ膨らむように反る湾曲形状に形成され、発光パネル510の中央側には、発光パネル510の上下長と略同じ直径の円形開口511が形成されている。   As shown in FIGS. 89 to 95, FIG. 98, and FIG. 99, the light emitting panel 510 is formed in a rectangular shape whose outer shape forms the outer shape of the electrical decoration device 500 in front view, and its front surface is slightly in cross section. A circular opening 511 having a diameter substantially the same as the vertical length of the light emitting panel 510 is formed at the center side of the light emitting panel 510.

発光パネル510は、複数(8個)のLED572により発光表示される左模様部512(第3模様部512)と、複数(8個)のLED573により発光表示される右模様部513(第3模様部513)と、複数のLED574により発光表示される複数(16個)の枝状模様部514(第3模様部514)とを有する。   The light emitting panel 510 includes a left pattern portion 512 (third pattern portion 512) displayed by light emission by a plurality (eight) LEDs 572 and a right pattern portion 513 (third pattern) displayed by light emission by a plurality (eight) LEDs 573. Part 513) and a plurality (16 pieces) of branch-like pattern parts 514 (third pattern parts 514) that are emitted and displayed by the plurality of LEDs 574.

左模様部512は、発光パネル510の円形開口511の左側に設けられ、右模様部513は、発光パネル510の円形開口511の右側に設けられ、これら左右の模様部512,513には、夫々多数の凹凸及び溝が形成されている。   The left pattern portion 512 is provided on the left side of the circular opening 511 of the light emitting panel 510, and the right pattern portion 513 is provided on the right side of the circular opening 511 of the light emitting panel 510, and the left and right pattern portions 512 and 513 are respectively provided. A large number of irregularities and grooves are formed.

複数の枝状模様部514は、左側8個の枝状模様部514と右側8個の枝状模様部514とに分けられて、左模様部512と右模様部513の前面側において、円形開口511から外側へ放射状に延びるように設けられている。左側8個の枝状模様部514と右側8個の枝状模様部514は、夫々、円形開口511の略中央を中心に、周方向へ略等角度おきに配置され、互いに長さや形状を異ならせているが、左模様部512と右模様部513よりも前方へ突出して、その表面が円筒面状に形成されている。   The plurality of branch pattern portions 514 are divided into eight branch pattern portions 514 on the left side and eight branch pattern portions 514 on the right side, and a circular opening is formed on the front side of the left pattern portion 512 and the right pattern portion 513. 511 is provided to extend radially outward from 511. The eight branch pattern portions 514 on the left side and the eight branch pattern portions 514 on the right side are arranged at substantially equal angles in the circumferential direction around the substantially center of the circular opening 511, and have different lengths and shapes. However, it protrudes further forward than the left pattern portion 512 and the right pattern portion 513, and its surface is formed in a cylindrical surface shape.

図89、図91、図92に示すように、左装飾板520は、発光パネル510の左模様部512の左部前面側に配置され、その全体に多数の凹凸及び溝を形成してなる左サイド装飾部521を有する。右装飾板530は、発光パネル510の右模様部513の前面側に配置され、その右端側部分に多数の凹凸及び溝を形成してなる右サイド装飾部531を有し、残りの部分に本機種特有のキャクタが描かれた右装飾部532を有し、右装飾部532の左下部(一部)は、中央発光ユニット540の第1,第2模様部541a,542aの前側に位置している。   As shown in FIGS. 89, 91, and 92, the left decorative plate 520 is disposed on the left front side of the left pattern portion 512 of the light emitting panel 510, and is formed by forming a large number of irregularities and grooves on the left side. A side decoration 521 is provided. The right decorative plate 530 is disposed on the front surface side of the right pattern portion 513 of the light emitting panel 510, and has a right side decorative portion 531 formed with a large number of irregularities and grooves on the right end side portion, and the remaining portion has a book. It has a right decorative part 532 on which a model-specific character is drawn, and the lower left part (a part) of the right decorative part 532 is located on the front side of the first and second pattern parts 541a and 542a of the central light emitting unit 540. Yes.

左右の装飾板520,530は、基本的に、その全体(左右のサイド装飾部521,531、右装飾部532)から、中央発光ユニット540の発光表示される第1,第2模様部541a,542a、及び発光パネル510の発光表示される第3模様部(左右の模様部512,513、複数の枝状模様部514)を透過して表示させるが、左右のサイド装飾部521,531と右装飾部532は、発光表示される第1,第2,第3模様部541a,542a,512,513,514と融合されるように、第1,第2,第3模様部541a,542a,512,513,514から発せられた光によって発光表示される。   The left and right decorative plates 520 and 530 basically have first and second patterned portions 541a, 541a, 541a, 541a, 540a, and a central light emitting unit 540 that emit light. 542a and the third pattern portion (left and right pattern portions 512 and 513, a plurality of branch pattern portions 514) displayed on the light emitting panel 510 are transmitted and displayed, but the right and left side decoration portions 521 and 531 and the right side are displayed. The decorative portion 532 is integrated with the first, second, and third pattern portions 541a, 542a, 512, 513, and 514 that are luminescently displayed, so that the first, second, and third pattern portions 541a, 542a, and 512 are combined. , 513, 514 are emitted and displayed.

図89、図91〜図94、図96〜図99に示すように、中央発光ユニット540は、円板状の第1発光部材541と、第1発光部材541の外周外側に配置されたリング形状の第2発光部材542と、第1発光部材541の後面側に配置された円板状の第1レンズ部材543、及び部分円錐形状(環状)の第1仕切部材544と、第2発光部材542の後面側に配置されたリング形状の第2レンズ部材545、及び部分円錐形状(環状)の第2仕切部材546とを有し、これらの部材541〜546が複数のビス(場合により接着剤)等の固定手段により互いに固定され、一体化された中央発光ユニット540が構成されている。   As shown in FIGS. 89, 91 to 94, and 96 to 99, the central light emitting unit 540 includes a disk-shaped first light emitting member 541 and a ring shape disposed on the outer periphery of the first light emitting member 541. The second light emitting member 542, the disc-shaped first lens member 543 disposed on the rear surface side of the first light emitting member 541, the first conical (annular) partitioning member 544, and the second light emitting member 542. A ring-shaped second lens member 545 disposed on the rear surface side, and a partially conical (annular) second partition member 546, and these members 541 to 546 have a plurality of screws (in some cases, an adhesive). A central light-emitting unit 540 that is fixed and integrated with each other by fixing means such as the like is configured.

第1発光部材541は、本機種特有のエンブレムが描かれた正面視円形状の第1模様部541aであって、複数のLED570により発光表示される第1模様部541aを有し、第2発光部材542は、本機種特有の文字群が描かれた正面視リング形状の第2模様部542aであって、第1模様部541aの外周外側に設けられて複数のLED571より発光表示される第2模様部542aとを有する。   The first light emitting member 541 is a first pattern portion 541a having a circular shape in front view on which an emblem peculiar to this model is drawn. The first light emitting member 541 includes a first pattern portion 541a that emits and displays light by a plurality of LEDs 570. The member 542 is a ring-shaped second pattern portion 542a in which a character group peculiar to this model is drawn. The member 542 is provided on the outer periphery of the first pattern portion 541a and is light-emitting and displayed by a plurality of LEDs 571. And a pattern portion 542a.

第2発光部材542は、断面にて前方凸となるリング皿状部材542Aにより形成され、その外周部には、外側へ突出する複数(20個)の突出部542bが形成されている。第2発光部材542は、発光パネル510の円形開口511に内嵌状に配置され、第2模様部542aの外周外側に、発光パネル510の左右の模様部512,513及び複数の枝状模様部514が設けられ、16個の突出部542bが、発光パネル510の16個の枝状模様部514に夫々繋がった状態になる。   The second light emitting member 542 is formed by a ring dish-shaped member 542A that is convex forward in cross section, and a plurality (20 pieces) of protruding portions 542b that protrude outward are formed on the outer peripheral portion thereof. The second light emitting member 542 is disposed in a circular shape in the circular opening 511 of the light emitting panel 510, and on the outer periphery of the second pattern portion 542a, the left and right pattern portions 512 and 513 of the light emitting panel 510 and a plurality of branch pattern portions. 514 is provided, and the 16 protrusions 542b are connected to the 16 branch pattern portions 514 of the light emitting panel 510, respectively.

第1仕切部材544は、第1発光部材541とLED基板560との間に設けられ、複数のLED570の光を第1模様部541aに導く為の第1空間と複数のLED571の光を第2模様部542aに導く為の第2空間とを仕切るものであり、前方ほど(LED基板560から第1発光部材541に近づくほど)拡径し、且つ前端が第1発光部材541の外周(第2発光部材542の内周)に近接する部分円錐形状に形成されている。   The first partition member 544 is provided between the first light emitting member 541 and the LED substrate 560, and the first space for guiding the light of the plurality of LEDs 570 to the first pattern portion 541a and the light of the plurality of LEDs 571 are second. The second space for guiding to the pattern portion 542a is partitioned, the diameter increases toward the front (as the LED substrate 560 approaches the first light emitting member 541), and the front end is the outer periphery (second) of the first light emitting member 541. It is formed in a partial conical shape close to the inner periphery of the light emitting member 542.

第2仕切部材546は、第2発光部材542とLED基板560との間、且つ第1仕切部材544の外周外側に設けられ、複数のLED571の光を第2模様部542aに導く為の第2空間と複数のLED572,572,574の光を左右の模様部512,513と複数の枝状模様部514に導く為の第3空間とを仕切るものであり、前方ほど(LED基板560から第2発光部材542に近づくほど)拡径し、且つ前端が第2発光部材542の外周に近接する部分円錐形状に形成されている。   The second partition member 546 is provided between the second light emitting member 542 and the LED substrate 560 and outside the outer periphery of the first partition member 544, and is a second for guiding the light of the plurality of LEDs 571 to the second pattern portion 542a. The space is partitioned from the left and right pattern portions 512, 513 and the third space for guiding the light from the plurality of LEDs 572, 572, 574 to the plurality of branch pattern portions 514. The diameter of the light-emitting member 542 is increased and the front end is formed in a partial conical shape close to the outer periphery of the second light-emitting member 542.

第1レンズ部材543は、第1発光部材541の後面側に積層状に、また、第1仕切部材544の前端側に、且つその外周が第1仕切部材544の前端内周に近接するように配置され、つまり第1仕切部材544の前端内周の直径と略同じ直径を有する円形状に形成され、その後面部全体にノコギリ断面形状のフネレズレンズ543a(拡散レンズ543a)が形成されている。   The first lens member 543 is laminated on the rear surface side of the first light emitting member 541, and on the front end side of the first partition member 544 so that the outer periphery thereof is close to the inner periphery of the front end of the first partition member 544. In other words, the first partition member 544 is formed in a circular shape having a diameter substantially equal to the diameter of the inner periphery of the front end.

第2レンズ部材545は、リング皿状部材542A(第2発光部材542)に後側から収容され、つまりリング皿状部材542Aの内周よりも少し大きな内周と、リング皿状部材542Aの外周よりも少し小さな外周とを有するリング形状に形成され、その前面部全体と後面部全体にノコギリ断面形状のフネレズレンズ545a,545b(拡散レンズ545a,545b)が形成されている。   The second lens member 545 is accommodated in the ring dish-shaped member 542A (second light emitting member 542) from the rear side, that is, the inner circumference slightly larger than the inner circumference of the ring dish-shaped member 542A and the outer circumference of the ring dish-shaped member 542A. It is formed into a ring shape having a slightly smaller outer periphery, and Funezrez lenses 545a and 545b (diffusion lenses 545a and 545b) having a saw-shaped cross section are formed on the entire front surface portion and the entire rear surface portion.

第1レンズ部材543の後側であって、正面視にて第1仕切部材544の後端よりも内側に位置する領域に8個のLED570が分散状に配置され、8個のLED570の光は、第1仕切部材544の内側の第1空間を通って、第1レンズ部材543に至り、その第1レンズ部材543により拡散されて、第1発光部材541に照射され、その第1模様部541aが発光表示される。   Eight LEDs 570 are arranged in a distributed manner in a region located behind the first lens member 543 and inside the rear end of the first partition member 544 when viewed from the front, and the light from the eight LEDs 570 is The first lens member 543 passes through the first space inside the first partition member 544, is diffused by the first lens member 543, and is irradiated to the first light emitting member 541, and the first pattern portion 541a. Is displayed.

第1レンズ部材543の後側であって、正面視にて第1仕切部材544の後端と第1仕切部材546の後端の間に位置する領域に10個のLED571が分散状に配置され、10個のLED571の光は、第1仕切部材544と第2仕切部材546の間の第2空間を通って、第2レンズ部材545に至り、その第2レンズ部材545により拡散されて、第2発光部材542に照射され、その第2模様部542aが発光表示される。   Ten LEDs 571 are arranged in a distributed manner in a region located behind the first lens member 543 and between the rear end of the first partition member 544 and the rear end of the first partition member 546 in a front view. The light of the ten LEDs 571 passes through the second space between the first partition member 544 and the second partition member 546, reaches the second lens member 545, is diffused by the second lens member 545, and is The second light emitting member 542 is irradiated, and the second pattern portion 542a is lit and displayed.

図91、図92、図94、図95、図99に示すように、複数組の導光バー550は、発光パネル510の複数の枝状模様部514に夫々対応する位置に設けられて、対応する形状及び長さで構成され、つまり、発光パネル550の中央開口551側から外側へ放射状に延びるように設けられた複数組の導光バー550の前面側に、発光パネル510の複数の枝状模様部514が夫々配置されている。   As shown in FIGS. 91, 92, 94, 95, and 99, the plurality of sets of light guide bars 550 are provided at positions corresponding to the plurality of branch-like pattern portions 514 of the light emitting panel 510, respectively. A plurality of branches of the light emitting panel 510 on the front side of a plurality of light guide bars 550 provided to extend radially outward from the central opening 551 side of the light emitting panel 550. Each of the pattern portions 514 is arranged.

複数組の導光バー550の基端側部分は、中央開口551側へ突出して、第2仕切部材546の前端外周よりも中心側に位置するとともに、第2仕切部材546の周面に近接している。各組の導光バー550は、その長さに応じて1個又は2個又は3個の導光バー部材550aからなり、2個又は3個の導光バー部材550aを有するものでは、それら導光バー部材550aを長さ方向に直列状に接続して構成され、各導光バー部材550aは、その基端側部分をLED基板560の前側に位置させ、且つ後方へ屈曲させている。   Proximal end portions of the plurality of sets of light guide bars 550 protrude toward the central opening 551 and are located closer to the center than the outer periphery of the front end of the second partition member 546 and close to the peripheral surface of the second partition member 546. ing. Each set of light guide bars 550 is composed of one, two, or three light guide bar members 550a according to the length thereof, and has two or three light guide bar members 550a. The light bar members 550a are connected in series in the length direction, and each light guide bar member 550a has a base end portion positioned on the front side of the LED substrate 560 and bent backward.

1個の導光バー部材550aからなる導光バー550が8組、2個の導光バー部材550aからなる導光バー550が4組、3個の導光バー部材550aからなる導光バー550が4組あり、合計28個の導光バー部材550aと、28個の導光バー部材550aに夫々対応する28個のLED574が設けられ、更に、28個の導光バー部材550aのうちの8個の導光バー部材550a(2個の導光バー部材550aからなる4組の導光バー550と、3個の導光バー部材550aからなる4組の導光バー550に1個ずつ設けられている導光バー部材550a)に夫々対応する8個のLED574が設けられ、LED574は合計38個設けられている。   8 sets of light guide bars 550 made up of one light guide bar member 550a, 4 sets of light guide bars 550 made up of two light guide bar members 550a, and light guide bars 550 made up of three light guide bar members 550a. There are four sets, 28 light guide bar members 550a in total, 28 LEDs 574 corresponding to the 28 light guide bar members 550a, respectively, and 8 of the 28 light guide bar members 550a. One light guide bar member 550a (one set is provided for each of four light guide bars 550 including two light guide bar members 550a and four light guide bars 550 including three light guide bar members 550a). Eight LEDs 574 corresponding to the respective light guide bar members 550a) are provided, and a total of 38 LEDs 574 are provided.

尚、左上3組の導光バー550(4個の導光バー部材) はパネル部材550cを介して一体化され、右上3組の導光バー550(4個の導光バー部材) はパネル部材550cを介して一体化されている(図95)。28個の導光バー部材550aの基端部と28個のLED574とが夫々対面するように配設され、28個の導光バー部材550aは、夫々がその基端部からLED574の光を導入して、導光バー部材550a内において基端部から前方へ向かう光を屈曲部の内側傾斜面で先端側へ反射させる。   The upper left three sets of light guide bars 550 (four light guide bar members) are integrated via a panel member 550c, and the upper right three sets of light guide bars 550 (four light guide bar members) are panel members. It is integrated via 550c (FIG. 95). The 28 light guide bar members 550a are arranged so that the base ends of the 28 light guide bar members 550a face each other, and the 28 light guide bar members 550a each introduce the light of the LED 574 from the base end portions thereof. In the light guide bar member 550a, the light traveling forward from the proximal end portion is reflected to the distal end side by the inner inclined surface of the bent portion.

更に、28個の導光バー部材550aのうちの前記8個の導光バー部材550aには、それらの長さ方向途中部に8個の途中光導入部550bが後方突出状に形成され(図92、図94、図95)、その8個の途中光導入部550bと8個のLED574とが夫々対面するように配設され、8個の導光バー部材550aは、夫々がその途中光導入部550bからもLED574の光を導入する。こうして、28個の導光バー部材550aは、前面全体から発光可能である。そして、28個の導光バー部材550a、つまり16組の導光バー550の前面全体から出射される光が、発光パネル510の16個の枝状模様部514に夫々出射され、それら枝状模様部514が夫々発光する。   Further, of the eight light guide bar members 550a out of the 28 light guide bar members 550a, eight halfway light introducing portions 550b are formed in a rearward projecting shape in the middle part in the length direction (see FIG. 92, FIG. 94, FIG. 95), the eight halfway light introduction portions 550b and the eight LEDs 574 are arranged so as to face each other, and the eight light guide bar members 550a each introduce halfway light. The light of the LED 574 is also introduced from the part 550b. Thus, the 28 light guide bar members 550a can emit light from the entire front surface. Then, light emitted from the entire front surface of the 28 light guide bar members 550a, that is, the 16 sets of light guide bars 550, is emitted to the 16 branch pattern portions 514 of the light emitting panel 510, respectively. Each of the parts 514 emits light.

図90〜図92、図98、図99に示すように、LED基板560は、正面視にて発光パネル500よりも小さくて、左右長が上下長よりも長い(上下長の約3倍の)矩形状に形成され、発光パネル500の外形線よりも内側に配置されて、前記のように、そのLED基板560の前面に複数のLED570〜574が実装されている。   As shown in FIGS. 90 to 92, 98, and 99, the LED substrate 560 is smaller than the light emitting panel 500 in the front view, and the left and right length is longer than the vertical length (about three times the vertical length). A plurality of LEDs 570 to 574 are mounted on the front surface of the LED substrate 560 as described above.

ここで、前面扉2の中段パネル部4内、及び下部パネル部6(6A)の上部後面側に、メダル投入部21から投入されたメダルか正規のメダルか否かを判別して振り分けるセレクタ62が設けられ、このセレクタ62とLED基板560とが相互干渉しないように、LED基板560は、その上端が発光パネル500の上端よりも幾分下方に位置するように設けられ、また、LED基板560は、その下端も発光パネル500の下端よりも幾分上方に位置するように設けられている。   Here, in the middle panel 4 of the front door 2 and the upper rear side of the lower panel 6 (6A), a selector 62 for determining whether or not a medal inserted from the medal insertion unit 21 is a regular medal. In order to prevent the selector 62 and the LED substrate 560 from interfering with each other, the LED substrate 560 is provided such that its upper end is located slightly below the upper end of the light emitting panel 500, and the LED substrate 560 is provided. The lower end of the light-emitting panel 500 is provided somewhat above the lower end of the light-emitting panel 500.

このLED基板560の構成上、LED基板560の前面に実装された28個のLED574により、正面視にてLED基板560の外側まで延びる枝状模様部514を含めて、16個の枝状模様部514の全体を発光可能に、16組の導光バー550(28個の導光バー部材550a)が設けられている。   Due to the configuration of the LED substrate 560, there are 16 branch-like pattern portions including the branch-like pattern portion 514 extending to the outside of the LED substrate 560 in a front view by 28 LEDs 574 mounted on the front surface of the LED substrate 560. 16 sets of light guide bars 550 (28 light guide bar members 550a) are provided so that the entire 514 can emit light.

ところで、従来の電飾パネルにおいては、絵柄が印された表面装飾パネルが、その後面側に設けられた光源により単に照明されて、常に同じ発光態様で表示され続けるもの、即ち遊技機を電飾するだけのものであったが、本発明のように、遊技機を電飾し且つ遊技演出を行うことが可能な電飾パネル6Aにおいて、如何にその電飾パネル6による斬新な電飾を実現して、演出効果を高め得る構成とするかが課題である。   By the way, in the conventional electric decoration panel, the surface decoration panel on which the pattern is marked is simply illuminated by the light source provided on the rear surface side thereof, and is continuously displayed in the same light emitting mode, that is, the gaming machine is electric. However, as in the present invention, in the illumination panel 6A that can be used to decorate the gaming machine and perform the game effect, the novel illumination by the illumination panel 6 is realized. Then, it is a problem whether it is set as the structure which can raise production effect.

そこで、この電飾パネル6Aによれば、複数のLED570により発光表示される第1模様部541aを有する第1発光部材541と、第1模様部541aの外周外側に設けられて複数のLED571により発光表示される第2模様部542aを有する第2発光部材542と、第1,第2発光部材541,542の後面側に設けられ、複数のLED570,571が前面に実装されたLED基板560と、第1,第2発光部材541,542とLED基板560との間に設けられ、複数のLED570の光を第1模様部541aに導く為の第1空間と複数のLED571の光を第2模様部542aに導く為の第2空間とを仕切る環状の第1仕切部材544とを備えた。   Therefore, according to the electrical panel 6A, the first light emitting member 541 having the first pattern portion 541a that emits light and is displayed by the plurality of LEDs 570, and the plurality of LEDs 571 that are provided outside the outer periphery of the first pattern portion 541a. A second light emitting member 542 having a second pattern portion 542a to be displayed, an LED substrate 560 provided on the rear surface side of the first and second light emitting members 541 and 542, and a plurality of LEDs 570 and 571 mounted on the front surface; A first space provided between the first and second light emitting members 541 and 542 and the LED substrate 560 for guiding the light from the plurality of LEDs 570 to the first pattern portion 541a and the light from the plurality of LEDs 571 to the second pattern portion. And an annular first partition member 544 that partitions the second space for leading to 542a.

更に、第2模様部542aの外周外側に設けられて複数のLED572,573,574により発光表示される左右の模様部512,513と複数の枝状模様部514と有する発光パネル510を備え、その発光パネル510の後面側にLED基板560を設けて、そのLED基板560の前面に複数のLED572,573,574を実装し、発光パネル510及び第1,第2発光部材541,542とLED基板560との間、且つ第1仕切部材544の外周外側に設けられ、第2空間と複数のLED572,573,574の光を左右の模様部512,513と複数の枝状模様部514に導く為の第3空間とを仕切る環状の第2仕切部材546を備えた。   Furthermore, a light emitting panel 510 provided on the outer periphery of the second pattern portion 542a and having left and right pattern portions 512, 513 and a plurality of branch-like pattern portions 514 that are emitted and displayed by the plurality of LEDs 572, 573, 574 is provided. An LED substrate 560 is provided on the rear surface side of the light emitting panel 510, and a plurality of LEDs 572, 573, 574 are mounted on the front surface of the LED substrate 560. The light emitting panel 510, the first and second light emitting members 541, 542, and the LED substrate 560 are mounted. , And on the outer periphery of the first partition member 544, for guiding the light of the second space and the plurality of LEDs 572, 573, 574 to the left and right pattern portions 512, 513 and the plurality of branch pattern portions 514. An annular second partition member 546 that partitions the third space was provided.

従って、発光表示される第1,第2模様部541,542、左右の模様部512,513、複数の枝状模様部514によって、本回胴式遊技機1を鮮やかに電飾するだけでなく、複数のLED470〜474を制御し、第1,第2模様部541,542、左右の模様部512,513、複数の枝状模様部514を夫々可変に発光表示させて、電飾パネル6Aによる斬新な電飾を実現して、演出効果が高い遊技演出を行うことが可能になる。しかも、第1仕切部材544によって、第1,第2模様部541,542を、それらの境界が明瞭になるように発光表示させることができ、更に、第2仕切部材546によって、第2模様部542と、左右の模様部512,513及び複数の枝状模様部514を、それらの境界が明瞭になるように発光表示させることができる。   Accordingly, the first and second pattern portions 541 and 542, the left and right pattern portions 512 and 513, and the plurality of branch-like pattern portions 514 are not only brightly lit up. By controlling the plurality of LEDs 470 to 474, the first and second pattern portions 541 and 542, the left and right pattern portions 512 and 513, and the plurality of branch pattern portions 514 are variably emitted and displayed. Realizing innovative lighting, it becomes possible to perform a game production with a high production effect. In addition, the first partition member 544 can display the first and second pattern portions 541 and 542 in a light-emitting manner so that their boundaries are clear, and the second partition member 546 allows the second pattern portion to be displayed. 542, the left and right pattern portions 512 and 513, and the plurality of branch-like pattern portions 514 can be displayed in a light-emitting manner so that their boundaries are clear.

第1模様部541が正面視円形状に形成され、第2模様部542aが正面視リング形状に形成され、第1,第2仕切部材544,546が夫々前方ほど拡径する部分円錐形状に形成されているので、電飾パネル6Aの中央側に第1模様部541aを設け、その第1模様部542aを囲むように第2模様部542aを設け、その第2模様部542aの外周外側に左右の模様部512,513及び複数の枝状模様部514を設けて、それらの境界が明瞭になるように発光表示させることができる。   The first pattern portion 541 is formed in a circular shape when viewed from the front, the second pattern portion 542a is formed as a ring shape when viewed from the front, and the first and second partition members 544 and 546 are each formed in a partial conical shape whose diameter increases toward the front. Therefore, the first pattern portion 541a is provided on the center side of the lighting panel 6A, the second pattern portion 542a is provided so as to surround the first pattern portion 542a, and the left and right outer sides of the second pattern portion 542a are provided on the left and right sides. The pattern portions 512 and 513 and the plurality of branch-like pattern portions 514 can be provided and light-emitting display can be performed so that the boundary between them is clear.

更に、第1,第2仕切部材544,546を前方ほど拡径する部分円錐形状に形成することで、複数のLED571の光を第2模様部542aに導く為の第2空間を確保したうえで、例えば、正面視にて、複数の枝状模様部514が、第2模様部542aの外周よりも内側から外側へ延びるように設けることができるので、意図する第1,第2模様部541a,542aと複数の枝状模様部514の発光表示を実現することができる。   Further, by forming the first and second partition members 544 and 546 in a partial conical shape with a diameter increasing toward the front, a second space for guiding the light of the plurality of LEDs 571 to the second pattern portion 542a is secured. For example, since the plurality of branch-like pattern portions 514 can be provided so as to extend from the inner side to the outer side than the outer periphery of the second pattern portion 542a in front view, the intended first and second pattern portions 541a, Light-emitting display of the 542a and the plurality of branch-like pattern portions 514 can be realized.

◆[演出制御手段]
演出制御手段600は、演出制御基板81(CPU,ROM,RAM)により構成されており、メイン制御基板70、演出ボタン検出スイッチ96、操作キー検出スイッチ97からの信号に基づいて、画像表示器7、演出用ランプ92a〜94d、サイドランプ93a,93b、スピーカ94a,94d、案内駆動機構部100A、可動バー役物8、電飾パネル6(6A)を制御して、遊技の進行に応じて、各種遊技演出を行わせる。
◆ [Direction control means]
The effect control means 600 is constituted by an effect control board 81 (CPU, ROM, RAM). Based on signals from the main control board 70, the effect button detection switch 96, and the operation key detection switch 97, the image display 7 By controlling the production lamps 92a to 94d, the side lamps 93a and 93b, the speakers 94a and 94d, the guide drive mechanism 100A, the movable bar accessory 8, and the electrical decoration panel 6 (6A), according to the progress of the game, Make various game effects. The effect control means 600 is composed by an effect control board 81 (CPU, ROM, RAM). Based on signals from the main control board 70, the effect button detection switch 96, and the operation key detection switch 97, the image display 7 By controlling the production lamps 92a to 94d, the side lamps 93a and 93b, the speakers 94a and 94d, the guide drive mechanism 100A, the movable bar accessory 8, and the electrical decoration panel 6 (6A), according to the progress of the game, Make various game effects.

実施例1に係る画像表示器7の動作、可動バー役物8の動作及び電飾による遊技演出は次の通りである。 The operation of the image display device 7 according to the first embodiment, the operation of the movable bar accessory 8 and the game effects by electrical decoration are as follows.

画像表示器7の動作による遊技演出については、第1昇降駆動手段104を制御し、通常時、画像表示器7を上待機位置に位置させるが、その通常時から動作させる遊技演出は基本的に図100に示す1種類となり、その画像表示器動作演出1では、図101(1)(2)に示すように、画像表示器7を(1)上待機位置→(2)下作動位置→(1)上待機位置に移動させる。   As for the game effect by the operation of the image display 7, the first elevating drive means 104 is controlled and the image display 7 is normally positioned at the upper standby position. As shown in FIGS. 101 (1) and 101 (2), the image display 7 is moved to (1) upper standby position → (2) lower operation position → ( 1) Move to the upper standby position.

ここで、前記のように、画像表示器7の画面7aが上方ほど前方へ位置するように、画像表示器7を前傾姿勢にして設けることで、図101(1)に示すように、画像表示器7を上待機位置に位置させた状態で、その画像表示器7の上部後側に、演出用発光部14aを設けることができる。このとき、演出用発光部14aの大部分は画像表示器7の後側に隠れた状態になるが、図101(2)に示すように、画像表示器7が上待機位置から下作動位置へ下降すると、演出用発光部14aの全体が露出して、この演出用発光部14aの発光により演出を行うことができる。   Here, as shown in FIG. 101 (1), as shown in FIG. 101 (1), as described above, the image display 7 is provided in a forward inclined posture so that the screen 7a of the image display 7 is positioned forward. In the state where the display device 7 is positioned at the upper standby position, the effect light emitting portion 14a can be provided on the upper rear side of the image display device 7. At this time, most of the effect light-emitting portion 14a is hidden behind the image display 7, but the image display 7 is moved from the upper standby position to the lower operation position as shown in FIG. When lowered, the entire effect light emitting unit 14a is exposed, and an effect can be performed by the light emission of the effect light emitting unit 14a.

可動バー役物8の動作による遊技演出については、第1,第2駆動手段106,218を制御し、通常時、可動バー役物8を下待機位置に位置させ、第1,第2可動導光板208,209を夫々第1,第2退避位置に位置させるが、その通常時から動作させる遊技演出は基本的に図102に示す4種類となる。   As for the game effect by the operation of the movable bar accessory 8, the first and second driving means 106 and 218 are controlled, and the movable bar accessory 8 is normally positioned at the lower standby position so that the first and second movable guides are moved. The light plates 208 and 209 are positioned at the first and second retracted positions, respectively, and there are basically four types of game effects that are operated from the normal time as shown in FIG.

可動バー役物動作演出1(第1の遊技演出)では、図103(1)(2)に示すように、可動役物部材201を下待機位置に停止させ、且つ第2可動導光板209を第2退避位置に停止させた状態で、第2駆動手段218により、第1可動導光板208を(1)第1退避位置→(2)第1進出位置→(3)第1退避位置に移動させ、更にその際、第1退避位置と第1進出位置との間で進退移動させることができる。可動バー役物動作演出2では、図103(1)(3)に示すように、第1,第2可動導光板208,209を夫々第1,第2退避位置に保持して、第1駆動手段106により、可動役物部材201を(1)下待機位置→(3)上昇途中位置→(1)下待機位置に移動させる。尚、上昇途中位置とは、下待機位置から上作動位置へ至るまでの途中位置である。   In the movable bar accessory operation effect 1 (first game effect), the movable accessory member 201 is stopped at the lower standby position and the second movable light guide plate 209 is moved as shown in FIGS. With the second drive unit 218 stopped at the second retracted position, the first movable light guide plate 208 is moved from (1) first retracted position → (2) first advanced position → (3) first retracted position. Further, at that time, it is possible to move forward and backward between the first retracted position and the first advanced position. In the movable bar accessory action effect 2, as shown in FIGS. 103 (1) and (3), the first and second movable light guide plates 208 and 209 are held at the first and second retracted positions, respectively, and the first drive is performed. By means 106, the movable accessory member 201 is moved from (1) the lower standby position to (3) the ascending position → (1) the lower standby position. Note that the ascending position is an intermediate position from the lower standby position to the upper operating position.

可動バー役物動作演出3では、図103(1)(3)(4)に示すように、第1,第2可動導光板208,209を夫々第1,第2退避位置に保持して、第1駆動手段106により、可動役物部材201を(1)下待機位置→(4)上作動位置→(1)下待機位置に移動させる。可動バー役物動作演出4(第2の遊技演出)では、図103(1)(3)〜(6)に示すように、第1駆動手段106により、可動役物部材201を(1)下待機位置→(4)〜(6)上作動位置→(1)下待機位置に移動させ、可動役物部材201が上作動位置にあるときに、第2駆動手段218により、第1,第2可動導光板208,209を夫々(4)第1,第2退避位置→(6)第1,第2進出位置→(4)第1,第2退避位置に移動させる。   In the movable bar accessory action effect 3, as shown in FIGS. 103 (1), (3), and (4), the first and second movable light guide plates 208 and 209 are held at the first and second retracted positions, respectively. The first driving means 106 moves the movable accessory member 201 from (1) a lower standby position to (4) an upper operation position → (1) a lower standby position. In the movable bar accessory operation effect 4 (second game effect), as shown in FIGS. 103 (1) (3) to (6), the first driving means 106 moves the movable accessory member 201 down (1). Standby position → (4) to (6) Upper operating position → (1) Move to lower standby position, and when the movable accessory member 201 is in the upper operating position, the second driving means 218 causes the first and second The movable light guide plates 208 and 209 are moved to (4) first and second retracted positions → (6) first and second advanced positions → (4) first and second retracted positions, respectively.

尚、図103(1)(3)〜(5)に示すように、第1駆動手段106により、可動役物部材201を(1)下待機位置→(4)(5)上作動位置→(1)下待機位置に移動させ、可動役物部材201が上作動位置にあるときに、第2駆動手段218により、第1可動導光板208だけを(4)第1退避位置→(5)第1進出位置→(4)第1退避位置に移動させるようにしてもよい。   As shown in FIGS. 103 (1) (3) to (5), the first driving means 106 moves the movable accessory member 201 to (1) lower standby position → (4) (5) upper operation position → ( 1) When the movable accessory member 201 is moved to the lower standby position and the movable accessory member 201 is in the upper operating position, the second driving means 218 moves only the first movable light guide plate 208 from (4) first retracted position to (5) first. 1 advance position → (4) You may make it move to the 1st retreat position.

尚、可動バー役物8の動作による他の遊技演出として、図104に示すように、可動役物部材201を下待機位置に停止させ、第1,第2可動導光板208,209を夫々第1,第2退避位置→第1,第2進出位置→第1,第2退避位置に移動させるようにしてもよい。この場合、第2可動導光板209が静止側部材249と干渉しないものとする。   As another game effect by the operation of the movable bar accessory 8, as shown in FIG. 104, the movable accessory member 201 is stopped at the lower standby position, and the first and second movable light guide plates 208 and 209 are respectively first. You may make it move to 1st, 2nd retracted position-> 1st, 2nd advance position-> 1st, 2nd retracted position. In this case, it is assumed that the second movable light guide plate 209 does not interfere with the stationary side member 249.

また、第1可動導光板208の位置に関わらず、第2駆動手段218により第2可動導光板209を第2退避位置と第2進出位置とにわたって移動させ得るように構成して、図105に示すように、可動役物部材201を下待機位置に停止させ、且つ第1可動導光板208を第1退避位置に停止させた状態で、第2駆動手段218により、第2可動導光板208を第2退避位置→第2進出位置→第2退避位置に移動させ、更にその際、第2退避位置と第2進出位置との間で進退移動させることができてもよい。この場合も、第2可動導光板209が静止側部材249と干渉しないものとする。   Further, the second movable light guide plate 209 can be moved between the second retracted position and the second advanced position by the second driving means 218 regardless of the position of the first movable light guide plate 208, as shown in FIG. As shown, the second movable light guide plate 208 is moved by the second driving means 218 with the movable accessory member 201 stopped at the lower standby position and the first movable light guide plate 208 stopped at the first retracted position. It may be possible to move the second retracted position → the second advanced position → the second retracted position, and at that time, move forward and backward between the second retracted position and the second advanced position. Also in this case, it is assumed that the second movable light guide plate 209 does not interfere with the stationary member 249.

また、同じく、第1可動導光板208の位置に関わらず、第2駆動手段218により第2可動導光板209を第2退避位置と第2進出位置とにわたって移動させ得るように構成して、図106に示すように、第1駆動手段106により、可動役物部材201を下待機位置→上作動位置→下待機位置に移動させ、可動役物部材201が上作動位置にあるときに、第2駆動手段218により、第2可動導光板209だけを第2退避位置→第2進出位置→第2退避位置に移動させるようにしてもよい。   Similarly, the second movable light guide plate 209 can be moved between the second retracted position and the second advanced position by the second driving means 218 regardless of the position of the first movable light guide plate 208. 106, the first driving means 106 moves the movable accessory member 201 from the lower standby position to the upper operation position → the lower standby position, and when the movable accessory member 201 is in the upper operation position, Only the second movable light guide plate 209 may be moved by the driving means 218 from the second retracted position to the second advanced position to the second retracted position.

そして、画像表示器7及び可動バー役物8の動作による全体的な遊技演出において、画像表示器動作演出1を単独で行わせたり、或いは、可動バー役物動作演出1〜4の何れかを単独で行わせたり、或いは、画像表示器動作演出1と可動バー役物動作演出1〜4の何れかとを組合せて同時に行わせたりする。   Then, in the overall game effect by the operation of the image display 7 and the movable bar accessory 8, the image display operation effect 1 is performed alone, or any of the movable bar accessory operation effects 1 to 4 is performed. It can be performed alone, or can be performed simultaneously by combining any one of the image display operation effect 1 and the movable bar accessory operation effects 1 to 4.

尚、画像表示器7及び可動バー役物8の動作速度や動作タイミングについては、適宜設定可能である。例えば、画像表示器動作演出1と可動バー役物動作演出2〜4の何れかとを組合せて同時に行わせる場合、画像表示器7が上待機位置から下作動位置へ移動するタイミングと、可動役物部材201が下待機位置から上作動位置へ移動するタイミングを同じにしてもよいし、更に、画像表示器7が下作動位置から上待機位置へ移動するタイミングと、可動役物部材201が上作動位置から下待機位置へ移動するタイミングを同じにしてもよい。   Note that the operation speed and operation timing of the image display 7 and the movable bar accessory 8 can be set as appropriate. For example, when the image display operation effect 1 and any one of the movable bar accessory operation effects 2 to 4 are performed simultaneously, the timing at which the image display 7 moves from the upper standby position to the lower operation position, and the movable accessory The timing at which the member 201 moves from the lower standby position to the upper operating position may be the same. Furthermore, the timing at which the image display 7 moves from the lower operating position to the upper standby position, and the movable accessory member 201 at the upper operating position. The timing for moving from the position to the lower standby position may be the same.

可動バー役物8の電飾による遊技演出については、複数のLED211a,212a〜212d,213a〜213c、214a,214b,215a,215b,216a,216b,217aを制御し、その遊技演出は基本的に図107に示す10種類となる。   Regarding the game effect by the electric decoration of the movable bar accessory 8, the plurality of LEDs 211a, 212a to 212d, 213a to 213c, 214a, 214b, 215a, 215b, 216a, 216b, 217a are controlled, and the game effect is basically There are 10 types shown in FIG.

可動バー役物電飾演出1では、中央電飾器202の複数のLED211aにより中央電飾部材226を発光表示させ、可動バー役物電飾演出2では、左電飾器203の複数のLED212aにより縦縞模様(左)を発光表示させ、可動バー役物電飾演出3では、右電飾器204の複数のLED213aにより縦縞模様(右)を発光表示させる。   In the movable bar accessory lighting effect 1, the central lighting member 226 is displayed by emitting light by the plurality of LEDs 211a of the central lighting device 202. In the movable bar role lighting effect 2, the plurality of LEDs 212a of the left lighting device 203 are used. The vertical stripe pattern (left) is lit and displayed, and in the movable bar accessory lighting effect 3, the vertical stripe pattern (right) is lit and displayed by the plurality of LEDs 213a of the right lighting device 204.

可動バー役物電飾演出4では、左電飾器203の複数のLED212b〜212dにより稲妻模様を発光表示させ、可動バー役物電飾演出5では、右電飾器204の複数のLED213bにより稲妻エフェクトを発光表示させ、可動バー役物電飾演出6では、右電飾器204の複数のLED213cにより7セグ表示器235に数字を表示させ、可動バー役物電飾演出7では、同じく右電飾器204の複数のLED213cにより7セグ表示器235に波動を表示させる。   In the movable bar accessory lighting effect 4, a lightning pattern is emitted and displayed by the plurality of LEDs 212 b to 212 d of the left lighting device 203, and in the movable bar character lighting effect 5, the lightning bolt is displayed by the plurality of LEDs 213 b of the right lighting device 204. In the movable bar accessory lighting effect 6, the number is displayed on the 7-segment display 235 by the plurality of LEDs 213c of the right lighting device 204, and in the movable bar role lighting effect 7, the right power is also displayed. Waves are displayed on the 7-segment display 235 by the plurality of LEDs 213c of the decoration 204.

可動バー役物電飾演出8では、複数のLED216aにより第1左固定導光板205の「PSYCHO」を発光表示させ、可動バー役物電飾演出9では、複数のLED217aにより右固定導光板207の「−PASS」を発光表示させ、可動バー役物電飾演出10では、複数のLED216Bにより第2左固定導光板206の「犯罪係数」を発光表示させ、可動バー役物電飾演出11では、複数のLED214a又は214bにより第1可動導光板208の「WARNING」を発光表示させ、可動バー役物電飾演出12では、LED215a又は215bにより1対の第2可動導光板209の「WARNING」を発光表示させる。   In the movable bar accessory lighting effect 8, “PSYCHO” of the first left fixed light guide plate 205 is emitted and displayed by the plurality of LEDs 216a. In the movable bar accessory lighting effect 9, the right fixed light guide plate 207 is displayed by the plurality of LEDs 217a. “−PASS” is displayed by light emission, and in the movable bar accessory lighting effect 10, the “criminal coefficient” of the second left fixed light guide plate 206 is displayed by light emission by a plurality of LEDs 216B. “WARNING” of the first movable light guide plate 208 is emitted and displayed by a plurality of LEDs 214a or 214b, and “WARNING” of the pair of second movable light guide plates 209 is emitted by the LED 215a or 215b in the movable bar accessory lighting effect 12 Display.

そして、可動バー役物8の電飾による全体的な遊技演出において、可動バー役物電飾演出1〜12の何れかを単独で行わせたり、或いは、可動バー役物電飾演出1〜12の何れか複数を組合せて同時に行わせたりする。例えば、通常時は、可動バー役物電飾演出8,9を行わせて、その他の可動バー役物電飾演出を行わせいないようにして、つまり、「PSYCHO」「−PASS」のみを発光表示させる。尚、可動バー役物電飾演出1〜12の各々については、対応する複数のLEDを全て一斉に点灯させて、対象物や対象模様を単に発光表示させるだけでなく、対応する複数のLEDの点灯→消灯のタイミングをずらすように制御して、対象物や対象模様を可変に発光表示させる態様も含むものとする。   Then, in the overall game effect by the illumination of the movable bar accessory 8, any one of the movable bar accessory illumination effects 1 to 12 is performed alone, or the movable bar accessory illumination effects 1 to 12 are performed. Any one or more of these may be combined and performed simultaneously. For example, during normal times, the movable bar accessory lighting effects 8 and 9 are performed and the other movable bar role lighting effects are not performed, that is, only “PSYCHO” and “−PASS” are emitted. Display. For each of the movable bar accessory lighting effects 1 to 12, not only the corresponding plurality of LEDs are turned on all at once, but the target object and the target pattern are not simply displayed by light emission, but also the corresponding plurality of LEDs. It also includes a mode in which the object and the target pattern are variably emitted and displayed by controlling to turn on / off timing.

ここで、動バー役物8の動作と電飾とを組み合わせた遊技演出について、例えば、可動バー役物動作演出4を行わせる際、先ず、可動役物部材201を下待機位置に停止させているときに(上作動位置へ移動させる前)、可動バー役物電飾演出8,9のみを行わせ、次に、可動役物部材201を下待機位置から上作動位置へ移動させて、上作動位置に一時的に停止させ、また、第1,第2可動導光208,209を第1,第2退避位置から第1,第2進出位置へ移動させて、第1,第2進出位置に一時的に停止させているときに、可動バー役物電飾演出1〜5を行わせることができる。   Here, for a game effect that combines the action of the moving bar accessory 8 and electrical decoration, for example, when the movable bar accessory action effect 4 is performed, first, the movable accessory member 201 is stopped at the lower standby position. (Before moving to the upper operating position), only the movable bar accessory lighting effects 8 and 9 are performed, and then the movable accessory member 201 is moved from the lower standby position to the upper operating position, The first and second advanced positions are temporarily stopped by moving the first and second movable light guides 208 and 209 from the first and second retracted positions to the first and second advanced positions. When it is temporarily stopped, the movable bar accessory lighting effects 1 to 5 can be performed.

尚、可動役物部材201が下待機位置にあるときに、第1可動導光板208だけが第1退避位置から第1進出位置へ移動する際(図103(2))、また、第2可動導光板209だけが第2退避位置から第2進出位置へ移動する際(図105)、また、第1,第2可動導光板208,209の両方が夫々第1、第2退避位置から第1、第2進出位置へ移動する際(図104)、可動役物部材201の電飾演出については、可動バー役物電飾演出1〜10の少なくとも1つの電飾演出を行わせてもよいし(この場合、図103(2)での電飾演出と図105での電飾演出と図104での電飾演出を異ならせてもよい)、可動バー役物電飾演出1〜10の何れも行わず、つまり可動役物部材201を全く発光させないようにしてもよい。また、このとき動作する可動導光板208,209の電飾演出(つまり「WARNIG」の発光)を行わせてもよいし行わせなくてもよい。   When only the first movable light guide plate 208 moves from the first retracted position to the first advanced position when the movable accessory member 201 is at the lower standby position (FIG. 103 (2)), the second movable When only the light guide plate 209 moves from the second retracted position to the second advanced position (FIG. 105), both the first and second movable light guide plates 208 and 209 are first from the first and second retracted positions, respectively. When moving to the second advance position (FIG. 104), at least one of the movable bar accessory lighting effects 1 to 10 may be performed for the lighting effect of the movable accessory member 201. (In this case, the lighting effect in FIG. 103 (2) may be different from the lighting effect in FIG. 105 and the lighting effect in FIG. 104), any of the movable bar accessory lighting effects 1-10 In other words, the movable accessory member 201 may not emit light at all. In addition, the lighting effect (that is, “WARNIG” light emission) of the movable light guide plates 208 and 209 operating at this time may or may not be performed.

また、可動役物部材201が上作動位置にあるときに、第1可動導光板208だけが第1退避位置から第1進出位置へ移動する際(図103(5))、また、第2可動導光板209だけが第2退避位置から第2進出位置へ移動する際(図106)、また、第1,第2可動導光板208,209の両方が夫々第1、第2退避位置から第1、第2進出位置へ移動する際(図103(6))、可動役物部材201の電飾演出については、可動バー役物電飾演出1〜10の少なくとも1つの電飾演出を行わせてもよいし(この場合、図103(5)での電飾演出と図106での電飾演出と図103(6)での電飾演出を異ならせてもよい)、可動バー役物電飾演出1〜10の何れも行わず、つまり可動役物部材201を全く発光させないようにしてもよい。また、このとき動作する可動導光板208,209の電飾演出(つまり「WARNIG」の発光)を行わせてもよいし行わせなくてもよい。   Further, when only the first movable light guide plate 208 moves from the first retracted position to the first advanced position when the movable accessory member 201 is in the upper operating position (FIG. 103 (5)), the second movable When only the light guide plate 209 moves from the second retracted position to the second advanced position (FIG. 106), both the first and second movable light guide plates 208 and 209 are first from the first and second retracted positions, respectively. When moving to the second advancing position (FIG. 103 (6)), for the lighting effect of the movable accessory member 201, at least one of the movable bar accessory lighting effects 1 to 10 is performed. (In this case, the lighting effect in FIG. 103 (5) may be different from the lighting effect in FIG. 106 and the lighting effect in FIG. 103 (6)), or movable bar accessory lighting Do not perform any of the effects 1 to 10, that is, make the movable accessory member 201 not emit light at all. There. In addition, the lighting effect (that is, “WARNIG” light emission) of the movable light guide plates 208 and 209 operating at this time may or may not be performed.

また、可動役物部材201が下待機位置にあるとき又は上作動位置にあるときに、第1可動導光板208が第1退避位置と第1進出位置との間でガタガタと何らかの煽りを行うように進退移動する際、或いは、第2可動導光板209が第2退避位置と第2進出位置との間でガタガタと何らかの煽りを行うように進退移動する際、その作動する可動導光板208,209の電飾演出(つまり「WARNIG」の発光)については、ガタガタと進退移動するときに行わせなくてもよいし、そこで行わないで、或いはそこでの電飾演出に引き続いて、完全に進出したときに行わせてもよい。また、可動役物部材201の電飾演出については、行なわせていない状態から、可動導光板208,209の電飾演出に同期して、つまり、可動導光板208,209の電飾演出がガタガタと進退移動するときに行わせなくてもよいし、そこで行わないで、或いはそこでの電飾演出に引き続いて、完全に進出したときに行わせてもよい。   Further, when the movable accessory member 201 is in the lower standby position or the upper operating position, the first movable light guide plate 208 may rattle between the first retracted position and the first advanced position. When the second movable light guide plate 209 moves forward and backward to move back and forth between the second retracted position and the second advanced position, the movable light guide plates 208 and 209 that operate are moved. The lighting effect (that is, “WARNIG” light emission) does not have to be performed when moving back and forth, or when it does not perform there, or when it fully advances following the lighting effect there You may let it be done. In addition, the electric effect of the movable accessory member 201 is not synchronized with the electric effect of the movable light guide plates 208 and 209, that is, the electric effect of the movable light guide plates 208 and 209 is rattling. It may not be performed when moving forward and backward, or may not be performed there, or may be performed when advancing completely, following the lighting production there.

尚、画像表示器7を前記以外の方向へ案内して駆動するようにしてもよい。例えば、図108に示すように、画像表示器7を左右方向(画像表示器7の画面7aと平行な所定方向)へ移動可能に案内する第1案内機構を設け、その第1案内機構による案内方向(左右方向)へ駆動可能な第1駆動手段を設けてもよい。   The image display 7 may be driven by being guided in a direction other than the above. For example, as shown in FIG. 108, a first guide mechanism that guides the image display 7 so as to be movable in the left-right direction (a predetermined direction parallel to the screen 7a of the image display 7) is provided, and guidance by the first guide mechanism is provided. You may provide the 1st drive means which can drive to a direction (left-right direction).

また、可動役物8を前記以外の方向へ案内して駆動するのようにしてもよい。例えば、図109に示すように、前記可動役物8の代わりに、画像表示器7の画面7aの側端縁と平行な縦型の可動役物8Aを設け、その可動役物8Aを左右方向(所定方向と平行な方向)へ移動可能に案内する第2案内機構を設け、その第2案内機構による案内方向(左右方向)へ駆動可能な第2駆動手段を設けてもよい。   Further, the movable accessory 8 may be driven while being guided in a direction other than the above. For example, as shown in FIG. 109, instead of the movable accessory 8, a vertical movable accessory 8A parallel to the side edge of the screen 7a of the image display 7 is provided, and the movable accessory 8A is moved in the horizontal direction. A second guide mechanism for movably guiding (a direction parallel to a predetermined direction) may be provided, and a second driving unit capable of driving in the guide direction (left-right direction) by the second guide mechanism may be provided.

実施例5の回胴式遊技機1は、図110に示すように、前記画像表示器7の代わりに、遊技機1の上部且つ左部に画像表示器7Aを備えている。この画像表示器7Aは、画面上端縁が画面下端縁よりも前方へ位置するように、更に、画面左端縁が画面右端縁よりも前方へ位置するように、画面7Aaを傾斜させて配置され、その画面7Aaを遊技者が見易いようにしている。   As shown in FIG. 110, the spinning cylinder type gaming machine 1 of the fifth embodiment includes an image display 7 </ b> A on the upper left side of the gaming machine 1 instead of the image display 7. The image display 7A is disposed with the screen 7Aa inclined so that the upper end edge of the screen is positioned forward of the lower end edge of the screen and the left edge of the screen is positioned forward of the right edge of the screen. The screen 7Aa is made easy for the player to see.

ここで、画像表示器7Aを画面7aと平行な図110(1)に矢印a1で示す方向へ移動可能に案内して駆動可能に構成してもよいし、画像表示器7Aを画面7aと平行な図110(1)に矢印a2で示す方向へ移動可能に案内して駆動可能に構成してもよい。或いは、矢印a1で示す方向と矢印a2で示す方向の両方へ駆動可能にしてもよい。   Here, the image display unit 7A may be configured to be movable by being guided so as to be movable in the direction indicated by the arrow a1 in FIG. 110 (1) parallel to the screen 7a. 110 (1) may be configured such that it can be driven by being guided so as to be movable in the direction indicated by arrow a2. Or you may enable it to drive to both the direction shown by the arrow a1, and the direction shown by the arrow a2.

尚、図示省略するが、遊技機1の上部且つ右部に画像表示器7Aを備え、この画像表示器7Aは、画面上端縁が画面下端縁よりも前方へ位置するように、更に、画面右端縁が画面左端縁よりも前方へ位置するように、画面7Aaを傾斜させて配置され、その画面7Aaを遊技者が見易いようにしてもよい。   Although not shown in the drawing, an image display 7A is provided on the upper right side of the gaming machine 1, and the image display 7A further includes a screen right end so that the upper end edge of the screen is positioned forward of the lower end edge of the screen. The screen 7Aa may be tilted so that the edge is positioned forward of the left edge of the screen, so that the player can easily see the screen 7Aa.

尚、画像表示器7Aは、画面上端縁と画面下端縁の前後方向の位置を同じにして、画面左端縁(又は画面右端縁)が画面右端縁(画面左端縁)よりも前方へ位置するように、画面7Aaを傾斜させて配置されてもよい。   In the image display 7A, the upper edge of the screen and the lower edge of the screen in the front-rear direction are the same, and the left edge of the screen (or the right edge of the screen) is positioned forward of the right edge of the screen (the left edge of the screen). The screen 7Aa may be inclined.

可動役物8については、図示省略するが、画像表示器7Aの構成に応じた形状、姿勢にして配設し、画像表示器7Aの画面7Aaと平行な方向(例えば、図110(1)に矢印a1又は矢印a2で示す方向と平行な方向)へ移動可能に案内して駆動可能に構成してもよい。   Although not shown, the movable accessory 8 is arranged in a shape and posture according to the configuration of the image display 7A, and is parallel to the screen 7Aa of the image display 7A (for example, in FIG. 110 (1)). It may be configured such that it can be guided and driven in a movable manner in a direction parallel to the direction indicated by arrow a1 or arrow a2.

尚、本発明については、その趣旨を逸脱しない範囲において、前記開示事項期外の種々の変更を付加して実施することが可能である。そして、本発明については、前記回胴式遊技機以外の種々の回胴式遊技に適用してもよいし、場合によっては、回胴式遊技機以外にパチンコ遊技機等の種々の遊技機に適用可能である。   In addition, about this invention, it is possible to add and implement the various change outside the said disclosure matter in the range which does not deviate from the meaning. In addition, the present invention may be applied to various spinning-type games other than the above-mentioned spinning-type gaming machine, and in some cases, to various gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines in addition to the spinning-type gaming machine. Applicable.

1 回胴式遊技機
2 前面扉
3 筐体
6,6A 下部パネル,電飾パネル
7 画像表示器
7a 画面
8 可動役物
101 アーム部材
102 ベース部材
103 第1案内機構
104 第1昇降駆動手段(第1駆動手段)
105 第2案内機構
106 第2昇降駆動手段(第2駆動手段),第1駆動手段
117 第1ガイドロッド
118e 第1リニアガイド
154 第2ガイドロッド
201 可動役物部材(ベース部材)
205 第1左固定導光板(第1導光板)
206 第2左固定導光板(第1導光板)
207 右固定導光板(第1導光板)
208 第1可動導光板(第1可動役物,第2導光板)
209 第2可動導光板(第2可動役物,第2導光板) 209 Second movable light guide plate (second movable accessory, second light guide plate)
210 第1LED基板214a,214b,215a,215b,281,286 LED(第2光源) 210 1st LED substrate 214a, 214b, 215a, 215b, 281,286 LEDs (second light source)
216a,216b,217a LED(第1光源) 216a, 216b, 217a LED (first light source)
218 第2駆動手段240,280 第1光導入構造245,285 第2光導入構造249 静止側部材260 差動機構261 電動モータ300 演出役物装置302 第1可動部材303 第2可動部材307 役物駆動手段311 第1ベース(第1部材) 218 Second driving means 240, 280 First light introduction structure 245,285 Second light introduction structure 249 Rest side member 260 Differential mechanism 261 Electric motor 300 Directing accessory device 302 First movable member 303 Second movable member 307 Accessory Drive means 311 1st base (1st member)
320 第1スライドベース(第2部材) 320 1st slide base (2nd member)
325 第2スライドベース(第2部材) 325 Second slide base (second member)
330 移動手段340 作動変換手段410 表面装飾パネル420 主発光部材(第1発光部材) 330 Transportation means 340 Operation conversion means 410 Surface decoration panel 420 Main light emitting member (first light emitting member)
421 中央模様部(第1模様部,第1導光部) 421 Central pattern part (1st pattern part, 1st light guide part)
422 枝状模様部(第1模様部) 422 Branch pattern part (first pattern part)
430 発光パネル(第2発光部材) 430 light emitting panel (second light emitting member)
431 中央光透過部(中央拡散レンズ部) 431 Central light transmission part (central diffusion lens part)
432 帯状光透過部434 左模様部(第2模様部) 432 Band-shaped light transmitting part 434 Left pattern part (second pattern part)
435 右模様部(第2模様部) 435 Right pattern part (second pattern part)
437 導光バー(第2導光部) 437 light guide bar (second light guide)
440 LED基板450,451,452 LED(第1光源) 440 LED board 450,451,452 LED (first light source)
453,454 LED(第2光源) 453,454 LED (second light source)
510 発光パネル(発光部材) 510 light emitting panel (light emitting member)
512 左模様部(第3模様部) 512 Left pattern part (3rd pattern part)
513 右模様部(第3模様部) 513 Right pattern part (third pattern part)
514 枝状模様部(第3模様部) 514 Branch pattern part (third pattern part)
541 第1発光部材541a 第1模様部542 第2発光部材542a 第2模様部544 第1仕切部材546 第2仕切部材560 LED基板570 LED(第1光源) 541 First light emitting member 541a First pattern portion 542 Second light emitting member 542a Second pattern portion 544 First partition member 546 Second partition member 560 LED substrate 570 LED (first light source)
571 LED(第2光源) 571 LED (second light source)
572,573,574 LED(第3光源) 527,573,574 LED (3rd light source)
600 演出制御手段1 torso-type gaming machine 2 front door 3 housing 6, 6A lower panel, illumination panel 7 image display 7a screen 8 movable accessory 101 arm member 102 base member 103 first guide mechanism 104 first lifting drive means (first 1 drive means) 600 production control means 1 torso-type gaming machine 2 front door 3 housing 6, 6A lower panel, illumination panel 7 image display 7a screen 8 movable accessory 101 arm member 102 base member 103 first guide mechanism 104 first lifting drive means (first 1 drive) means)
105 2nd guide mechanism 106 2nd raising / lowering drive means (2nd drive means), 1st drive means 117 1st guide rod 118e 1st linear guide 154 2nd guide rod 201 A movable accessory member (base member) 105 2nd guide mechanism 106 2nd raising / lowering drive means (2nd drive means), 1st drive means 117 1st guide rod 118e 1st linear guide 154 2nd guide rod 201 A movable accessory member (base member)
205 First left fixed light guide plate (first light guide plate) 205 First left fixed light guide plate (first light guide plate)
206 Second left fixed light guide plate (first light guide plate) 206 Second left fixed light guide plate (first light guide plate)
207 Right fixed light guide plate (first light guide plate) 207 Right fixed light guide plate (first light guide plate)
208 first movable light guide plate (first movable accessory, second light guide plate) 208 first movable light guide plate (first movable accessory, second light guide plate)
209 Second movable light guide plate (second movable accessory, second light guide plate) 209 Second movable light guide plate (second movable accessory, second light guide plate)
210 1st LED board 214a, 214b, 215a, 215b, 281,286 LED (2nd light source) 210 1st LED board 214a, 214b, 215a, 215b, 281,286 LED (2nd light source)
216a, 216b, 217a LED (first light source) 216a, 216b, 217a LED (first light source)
218 2nd drive means 240,280 1st light introduction structure 245,285 2nd light introduction structure 249 Stationary side member 260 Differential mechanism 261 Electric motor 300 Staging effect device 302 1st movable member 303 2nd movable member 307 Driving means 311 first base (first member) 218 2nd drive means 240,280 1st light introduction structure 245,285 2nd light introduction structure 249 Stationary side member 260 Differential mechanism 261 Electric motor 300 Staging effect device 302 1st movable member 303 2nd movable member 307 Driving means 311 first base (first member)
320 First slide base (second member) 320 First slide base (second member)
325 Second slide base (second member) 325 Second slide base (second member)
330 moving means 340 operation converting means 410 surface decoration panel 420 main light emitting member (first light emitting member) 330 moving means 340 operation converting means 410 surface decoration panel 420 main light emitting member (first light emitting member)
421 Central pattern part (first pattern part, first light guide part) 421 Central pattern part (first pattern part, first light guide part)
422 Branched pattern part (first pattern part) 422 Branched pattern part (first pattern part)
430 Light emitting panel (second light emitting member) 430 Light emitting panel (second light emitting member)
431 Central light transmission part (central diffusion lens part) 431 Central light transmission part (central diffusion lens part)
432 Band-shaped light transmission portion 434 Left pattern portion (second pattern portion) 432 Band-shaped light transmission portion 434 Left pattern portion (second pattern portion)
435 Right pattern part (second pattern part) 435 Right pattern part (second pattern part)
437 Light guide bar (second light guide part) 437 Light guide bar (second light guide part)
440 LED substrate 450, 451, 452 LED (first light source) 440 LED substrate 450, 451, 452 LED (first light source)
453, 454 LED (second light source) 453, 454 LED (second light source)
510 Light Emitting Panel (Light Emitting Member) 510 Light Emitting Panel (Light Emitting Member)
512 Left pattern (third pattern) 512 Left pattern (third pattern)
513 Right pattern part (3rd pattern part) 513 Right pattern part (3rd pattern part)
514 Branched pattern part (third pattern part) 514 Branched pattern part (third pattern part)
541 1st light emission member 541a 1st pattern part 542 2nd light emission member 542a 2nd pattern part 544 1st partition member 546 2nd partition member 560 LED board 570 LED (1st light source) 541 1st light emission member 541a 1st pattern part 542 2nd light emission member 542a 2nd pattern part 544 1st partition member 546 2nd partition member 560 LED board 570 LED (1st light source)
571 LED (second light source) 571 LED (second light source)
572, 573, 574 LED (third light source) 572, 573, 574 LED (third light source)
600 Production control means 600 Production control means

第1発明に係る遊技機は、遊技に関する情報を表示する画像表示器(7) であって、その画面(7a)を画面一端縁が画面他端縁よりも前方へ位置するように傾斜させた画像表示器(7) と、前記画像表示器(7) をその画面(7a)と平行な所定方向へ移動可能に案内する第1案内機構(103) と、前記画像表示器(7) を前記所定方向へ駆動可能な第1駆動手段(104) と、前記画像表示器(7)の移動を補助する第1アシスト機構(126)とを備えたことを特徴としている。 The gaming machine according to the first aspect of the present invention is an image display (7) for displaying information relating to a game, wherein the screen (7a) is inclined so that one end edge of the screen is located forward of the other end edge of the screen. An image display (7), a first guide mechanism (103) for guiding the image display (7) to be movable in a predetermined direction parallel to the screen (7a), and the image display (7) A first driving means (104) capable of driving in a predetermined direction and a first assist mechanism (126) for assisting the movement of the image display (7) are provided.

第2発明に係る遊技機は、第1発明において、前記画像表示器(7) の画面(7a)の前側に配設された可動役物(8) と、前記可動役物(8) を前記所定方向と平行な方向へ移動可能に案内する第2案内機構(105) と、前記可動役物(8) を前記所定方向と平行な方向へ駆動可能な第2駆動手段(106) と、前記可動役物(8)の移動を補助する第2アシスト機構(166)とを備えたことを特徴としている。 A gaming machine according to a second aspect of the present invention is the game machine according to the first aspect, wherein the movable accessory (8) disposed on the front side of the screen (7a) of the image display (7) and the movable accessory (8) are A second guide mechanism (105) for guiding movement in a direction parallel to a predetermined direction; a second drive means (106) capable of driving the movable accessory (8) in a direction parallel to the predetermined direction ; A second assist mechanism (166) for assisting the movement of the movable accessory (8) is provided.

Claims (2)

  1. 遊技に関する情報を表示する画像表示器であって、その画面を画面一端縁が画面他端縁よりも前方へ位置するように傾斜させた画像表示器と、
    前記画像表示器をその画面と平行な所定方向へ移動可能に案内する第1案内機構と、
    前記画像表示器を前記所定方向へ駆動可能な第1駆動手段とを備えたことを特徴とする遊技機。
    An image display for displaying information about the game, the image display tilted so that one end edge of the screen is located forward of the other end edge of the screen;
    A first guide mechanism for guiding the image display so as to be movable in a predetermined direction parallel to the screen;
    A gaming machine comprising: first driving means capable of driving the image display in the predetermined direction.
  2. 前記画像表示器の画面の前側に配設された可動役物と、
    前記可動役物を前記所定方向と平行な方向へ移動可能に案内する第2案内機構と、
    前記可動役物を前記所定方向と平行な方向へ駆動可能な第2駆動手段とを備えたことを特徴とする請求項1に記載の遊技機。
    A movable accessory disposed on the front side of the screen of the image display;
    A second guide mechanism for guiding the movable accessory so as to be movable in a direction parallel to the predetermined direction;
    The gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising second driving means capable of driving the movable accessory in a direction parallel to the predetermined direction.
JP2014175848A 2014-08-29 2014-08-29 Game machine Pending JP2016049240A (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2014175848A JP2016049240A (en) 2014-08-29 2014-08-29 Game machine

Applications Claiming Priority (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2014175848A JP2016049240A (en) 2014-08-29 2014-08-29 Game machine

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
JP2016049240A true JP2016049240A (en) 2016-04-11

Family

ID=55657247

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
JP2014175848A Pending JP2016049240A (en) 2014-08-29 2014-08-29 Game machine

Country Status (1)

Country Link
JP (1) JP2016049240A (en)

Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2012034746A (en) * 2010-08-04 2012-02-23 Kyoraku Sangyo Kk Pachinko game machine
JP2014128404A (en) * 2012-12-28 2014-07-10 Kyoraku Sangyo Co Ltd Game machine

Patent Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2012034746A (en) * 2010-08-04 2012-02-23 Kyoraku Sangyo Kk Pachinko game machine
JP2014128404A (en) * 2012-12-28 2014-07-10 Kyoraku Sangyo Co Ltd Game machine

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
JP4688562B2 (en) Amusement machine lighting equipment
JP5102457B2 (en) Game machine
JP5342133B2 (en) Game machine
JP2004166961A (en) Game machine
JP4276110B2 (en) Game machine
US20040166925A1 (en) Gaming machine
US20050032571A1 (en) Gaming machine
JP4819768B2 (en) Lower panel unit and slot machine
JP2007325883A (en) Game machine and display device for game machine
JP4808083B2 (en) Game machine
JP2007325878A (en) Game machine
JP6206519B2 (en) Game machine
JP2008099945A (en) Game machine
JP4442086B2 (en) Game machine
JP5707349B2 (en) Game machine
JP2004344271A (en) Pinball game machine
JP4348942B2 (en) Game machine
JP5592062B2 (en) Slot machine
JP2007325884A (en) Game machine
JP6199831B2 (en) Game machine
JP4269620B2 (en) Game machine
JP2007325879A (en) Game machine
JP5912815B2 (en) Pachinko machine
JP4543223B2 (en) Game machine
JP4205091B2 (en) Game machine

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
A02 Decision of refusal

Free format text: JAPANESE INTERMEDIATE CODE: A02

Effective date: 20160323